Operating Instructions
audio/video multi-channel receiver
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Information for users on collection and disposal of old equipment and used batteries
Symbol for
equipment
These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean
that used electrical and electronic products and batteries should not be mixed with
general household waste.
For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries,
please take them to applicable collection points in accordance with your national
legislation.
By disposing of these products and batteries correctly, you will help to save valuable
resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the
environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling.
Symbol examples
for batteries
For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries,
please contact your local municipality, your waste disposal service or the point of
sale where you purchased the items.
These symbols are only valid in the European Union.
For countries outside the European Union:
If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local authorities or dealer and
ask for the correct method of disposal.
Pb
K058a_A1_En
VENTILATION CAUTION
This product is for general household purposes. Any
When installing this unit, make sure to leave space
around the unit for ventilation to improve heat
radiation (at least 60 cm at top, 10 cm at rear, and
30 cm at each side).
failure due to use for other than household purposes
(such as long-term use for business purposes in a
restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which
requires repair will be charged for even during the
WARNING
warranty period.
K041_En
Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for
ventilation to ensure reliable operation of the
product, and to protect it from overheating. To
prevent fire hazard, the openings should never be
blocked or covered with items (such as newspapers,
table-cloths, curtains) or by operating the
CAUTION
The STANDBY/ON switch on this unit will not
completely shut off all power from the AC outlet.
Since the power cord serves as the main disconnect
device for the unit, you will need to unplug it from
the AC outlet to shut down all power. Therefore,
make sure the unit has been installed so that the
power cord can be easily unplugged from the AC
outlet in case of an accident. To avoid fire hazard,
the power cord should also be unplugged from the
AC outlet when left unused for a long period of time
equipment on thick carpet or a bed.
D3-4-2-1-7b_A_En
(for example, when on vacation).
D3-4-2-2-2a_A_En
If the AC plug of this unit does not match the AC
outlet you want to use, the plug must be removed
and appropriate one fitted. Replacement and
mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of
this unit should be performed only by qualified
service personnel. If connected to an AC outlet, the
cut-off plug can cause severe electrical shock. Make
sure it is properly disposed of after removal.
Operating Environment
Operating environment temperature and humidity:
+5 ºC to +35 ºC (+41 ºF to +95 ºF); less than 85 %RH
(cooling vents not blocked)
The equipment should be disconnected by removing
the mains plug from the wall socket when left
unused for a long period of time (for example, when
Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area, or in
locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight (or
strong artificial light)
D3-4-2-1-7c_A_En
on vacation).
D3-4-2-2-1a_A_En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Thank you for buying this Pioneer product. Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate
your model properly. After you have finished reading the instructions, put them away in a safe place for future reference.
Contents
Connecting an HDMI-equipped component to
Flow of settings on the receiver . . . . . 6
the front panel input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Connecting a USB device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Plugging in the receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
01 Before you start
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Checking what’s in the box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Installing the receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Loading the batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Operating range of remote control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
04 Basic Setup
Switching the speaker impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Changing the OSD display language
02 Controls and displays
(OSD Language). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Automatically setting up for surround sound
(Auto MCACC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup . . . . 40
The Input Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Input function default and possible settings . . . . . . 41
Remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
03 Connecting your equipment
Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Determining the speakers’ application . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Other speaker connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Placing the speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
THX speaker system setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Some tips for improving sound quality . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Connecting the speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Installing your speaker system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Standard 5.1/6.1/7.1-channel surround connections . . . 19
Bi-amping your speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Bi-wiring your speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Selecting the Surr Back system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
ZONE 2 setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Speaker B setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Bi-Amping setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
About the audio connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
About the video converter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Connecting your TV and playback components . . . . . 23
Connecting using HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Connecting your DVD player with no HDMI output . . 24
Connecting your TV with no HDMI input . . . . . . . . . 25
Connecting an HDD/DVD recorder, VCR
05 Basic playback
Playing a source. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Playing a source with HDMI connection . . . . . . . . . 42
Selecting the multichannel analog inputs . . . . . . . . 43
Playing an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Playing back audio files stored on an iPod. . . . . . . . 43
Playing a USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Playing back audio files stored on a USB
memory device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Playing back photo files stored on a USB
memory device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
About playable file formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Listening to the radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Improving FM sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Using Neural THX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Tuning directly to a station. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Saving station presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Naming station presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Listening to station presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
An introduction to RDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
and other video sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Connecting a satellite/cable receiver
06 Listening to your system
Auto playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Listening in surround sound. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Standard surround sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Using the Home THX modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Using the Advanced surround effects . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Listening in stereo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Using Front Stage Surround Advance . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Using Stream Direct. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Using surround back channel processing . . . . . . . . . 53
Using the Virtual Surround Back mode . . . . . . . . . . 53
Setting the Up Mix function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Selecting MCACC presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Choosing the input signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Better sound using Phase Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
or other set-top box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Connecting the multichannel analog inputs. . . . . . . . 28
Connecting other audio components . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
About the WMA9 Pro decoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Connecting additional amplifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Connecting AM/FM antennas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Connecting external antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
MULTI-ZONE setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Making MULTI-ZONE connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Connecting an IR receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Operating other Pioneer components
with this unit’s sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Switching components on and off
using the 12 volt trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC output . . . . . 34
4
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
07 KURO LINK
11 The system and the other setup
Making the KURO LINK connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Cautions on the KURO LINK function . . . . . . . . . . . 57
About connections with a product of a different
brand that supports the KURO LINK function . . . . . 58
KURO LINK Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Setting the PQLS function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Before using synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Synchronized amp mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Synchronized amp mode operations . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Canceling synchronized amp mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Making receiver settings from the System Setup
menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Manual speaker setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Surround back speaker setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Speaker Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Channel Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Speaker Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
X-Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
THX Audio Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
The Other Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Multi Channel Input Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
ZONE Audio Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Power ON Level Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Volume Limit Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Remote Control Mode Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Flicker Reduction Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
08 Using other functions
Setting the Audio options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Setting the Video options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Switching the speaker system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Using the MULTI-ZONE controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Making an audio or a video recording . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Reducing the level of an analog signal . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Using the sleep timer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Dimming the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Switching the HDMI output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Checking your system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Resetting the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Default system settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
12 Additional information
Speaker Setting Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Positional relationship between speakers and
monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
No sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Other audio problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Video. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Professional Calibration EQ graphical output . . . . . 96
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Important information regarding
09 Controlling the rest of your system
Operating multiple receivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Setting the remote to control other components . . . . 67
Selecting preset codes directly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Resetting the remote control presets. . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Default preset codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Controls the components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
the HDMI connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Surround sound formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Dolby. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
DTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Windows Media Audio 9 Professional . . . . . . . . . . 101
About iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
About THX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
About Neural – THX Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Auto Surround, ALC and Stream Direct
with different input signal formats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Preset code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Cleaning the unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Our philosophy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
10 The Advanced MCACC menu
Making receiver settings from the Advanced
MCACC menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Automatic MCACC (Expert) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Manual MCACC setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Fine Channel Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Fine Speaker Distance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Standing Wave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Checking MCACC Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Speaker Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Channel Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Speaker Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Standing Wave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Acoustic Cal EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Output PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Data Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Renaming MCACC presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Copying MCACC preset data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Clearing MCACC presets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
5
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Flow of settings on the receiver
The unit is a full-fledged AV receiver equipped with an abundance of functions and terminals. It can be used easily
after following the procedure below to make the connections and settings.
The colors of the steps indicate the following:
Required setting item
Setting to be made as necessary
MCACC speaker settings
• Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto
MCACC) (page 39)
1
2
Before you start
• Checking what’s in the box (page 8)
• Loading the batteries (page 8)
9
10 The Input Setup menu (page 40)
Determining the speakers’ application (page 16)
• 7.1ch surround connection
• 5.1ch surround & Front Bi-amping connection
• 5.1ch surround & ZONE 2 connection
• 5.1ch surround & Speaker B connection
(When using connections other than the
recommended connections)
Connecting the speakers
• Placing the speakers (page 17)
• Connecting the speakers (page 18)
• Standard5.1/6.1/7.1-channel surroundconnections
(page 19)
11 Switching the HDMI output (page 65)
3
4
12 Basic playback (page 42)
13 Adjusting the sound and picture quality as desired
• Using the various listening modes
• Using surround back channel processing (page 53)
• Better sound using Phase Control (page 55)
• Measure the all EQ type (SYMMETRY/ALL CH ADJ/
FRONT ALIGN) (page 72)
• Change the channel level while listening (Tip on
page 86)
• Switches on/off the Acoustic Calibration EQ, Sound
retriever or Dialog Enhancement (page 60)
• Bi-amping your speakers (page 20)
Connecting the components
• About the audio connection (page 21)
• About the video converter (page 22)
• Connecting your TV and playback components
(page 23)
• Connecting AM/FM antennas (page 30)
• Plugging in the receiver (page 37)
• Setting the PQLS function (page 59)
• Setting the Audio options (Tone, Loudness or
Sound delay, etc.) (page 60)
• Setting the Video options (page 61)
5
Switching the speaker impedance (page 38)
(Only if the impedance of the connected speakers is
6 Ω to 8 Ω)
14 Other optional adjustments and settings
• KURO LINK Setup (page 58)
• The Advanced MCACC menu (page 71)
• The system and the other setup (page 84)
6
7
Power On
Changing the OSD display language (OSD
Language) (page 38)
15 Making maximum use of the remote control
• Operating multiple receivers (page 67)
• Setting the remote to control other components
(page 67)
8
Surround back speaker setting (page 85)
6
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before you start
01
Chapter 1:
Before you start
Furthermore, Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby TrueHD,
which are designed for the next-generation high-
definition media such as Blu-ray Disc and HD DVD,
support up to 7.1 channels and 8 channels respectively.
Features
•
Advanced Direct Energy design
This receiver offers a new advancement in discrete
design unique to Pioneer for high-power drivability, low
distortion and stable imaging. Through a circuit design
that minimizes the energy loss of the amplifier for each of
the channels, this receiver generates equal amplifier
power to all channels, eliminating the possibility of one
channel dominating a particular sound field.
DTS-EXPRESS is a low-bitrate encoding technology
supporting up to 5.1 channels, with fixed data transfer
rates ranging from 24 kbps to 256 kbps (this encoding is
available only when signals are delivered to this receiver
as primary audio).
DTS-HD Master Audio delivers audio signals to listeners
without any loss of data with its high transfer rates.
•
Easy setup using Advanced MCACC
•
Phase Control
The Auto MCACC Setup provides a quick but accurate
surround sound setup, which includes the advanced
features of Professional Acoustic Calibration EQ. This
innovative technology measures the reverb
characteristics of your listening area, allowing you to
customize your system calibration with the help of a
graphical output that can be displayed on-screen or
using computer. With the additional benefits of
numerous MCACC preset memories, standing wave
control and microphone measurements from a series of
reference points, your home theater experience can be
truly customized for optimal surround sound.
The Phase Control technology incorporated into this
receiver’s design provides coherent sound reproduction
through the use of phase matching for an optimal sound
image at your listening position.
•
Sound Retriever
The Sound Retriever feature employs DSP technology to
restore sound pressure and smooth jagged artifacts left
over after compression. This helps bring CD quality
sound back to WMA, MP3 and MPEG-4 AAC audio files
and achieves a richer sense of presence when playing
Dolby Digital, DTS or WMA 9 Pro audio formats recorded
in multiple channels on DVDs and other discs.
•
THX Select2 Plus certified design
This receiver bears the THX Select2 Plus logo, which
means it has passed a rigorous series of quality and
performance tests covering every aspect of the product.
This includes testing of pre-amplifier and power amplifier
performance and operation, and hundreds of other
parameters in both the digital and analog domain,
making your home theater experience as faithful as
possible to what the director intended.
•
Front Stage Surround Advance
With the Front Stage Surround Advance feature, you can
enjoy seamless, natural surround sound effects using
only the front speakers, without deteriorating the quality
of the original sound.
•
Auto Level Control
When the source is played in Auto level control mode
(ALC), this receiver automatically equalizes the playback
sound level according to the variation in recording levels.
•
Dolby Digital and DTS decoding, including Dolby
Digital EX, Dolby Pro Logic IIx, DTS 96/24, DTS-ES, Dolby
Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS-EXPRESS and DTS-HD
Master Audio
Dolby Digital and DTS decoding brings theater sound
right into your home with up to six channels of surround
sound, including a special LFE (Low Frequency Effects)
channel for deep, realistic sound effects.
•
HDMI and digital video conversion
This receiver is compatible with the HDMI digital video
format, providing you with high-definition digital video/
audio via a single cable.
High-quality sound formats such as DTS-HD and Dolby
TrueHD are supported while this receiver is also
compatible with the DeepColor feature. You can operate
this receiver in synchronization with your Pioneer
component that supports the KURO LINK function by
connecting your component to this receiver via HDMI.
Also, the built-in digital video converter of this receiver
makes both de-interlacing and up-scaling possible, and
analog video signals being input are converted and
output as digital video signals at the HDMI terminal.
The built-in Dolby Pro Logic IIx and DTS Neo:6 decoders
not only provide full surround sound decoding for Dolby
Surround sources, but will also generate convincing
surround sound for any stereo source.
Also, with the addition of a surround back speaker, you
can take advantage of the built-in Dolby Digital EX and
DTS-ES decoders for six-channel surround sound.
7
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before you start
01
•
iPod and USB Ready
This receiver has the terminals for connecting an iPod
unit and a USB mass storage device.
Loading the batteries
The iPod terminal is ready for handling digital audio, and
this receiver’s enhanced compatibility makes on-screen
control of your iPod an added possibility.
The USB terminal allows you to listen to two-channel
audio from a USB mass storage device connected to this
receiver.
CAUTION
Incorrect use of batteries may result in such hazards as
leakage and bursting. Observe the following precautions:
Checking what’s in the box
Please check that you’ve received the following supplied
• Never use new and old batteries together.
accessories:
• Insert the plus and minus sides of the batteries
properly according to the marks in the battery case.
• Setup microphone (cable: 5 m)
• Remote control unit
• Batteries with the same shape may have different
voltages. Do not use different batteries together.
• AA size IEC R6 dry cell batteries (to confirm system
operation) x2
• When disposing of used batteries, please comply
with governmental regulations or environmental
public instruction’s rules that apply in your country or
area.
• AM loop antenna
• FM wire antenna
• iPod cable
• WARNING
• Power cord
Do not use or store batteries in direct sunlight or
other excessively hot place, such as inside a car or
near a heater. This can cause batteries to leak,
overheat, explode or catch fire. It can also reduce the
life or performance of batteries.
• Warranty card
• These operating instructions
Installing the receiver
• When installing this unit, make sure to put it on a
level and stable surface.
Operating range of remote control unit
The remote control may not work properly if:
Don’t install it on the following places:
– on a color TV (the screen may distort)
– near a cassette deck (or close to a device that gives off
a magnetic field). This may interfere with the sound.
– in direct sunlight
– in damp or wet areas
– in extremely hot or cold areas
– in places where there is vibration or other movement
– in places that are very dusty
– in places that have hot fumes or oils (such as a kitchen)
• There are obstacles between the remote control and
the receiver’s remote sensor.
• Direct sunlight or fluorescent light is shining onto the
remote sensor.
• The receiver is located near a device that is emitting
infrared rays.
• The receiver is operated simultaneously with another
infrared remote control unit.
• Do not touch this receiver’s bottom panel while the
power is turned on. The bottom panel gets hot when
the power is on, and touching it could cause burns.
30°
30°
7 m
8
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controls and displays
02
Chapter 2:
Controls and displays
Remote control
1
RECEIVER
12
13
This switches between standby and on for this receiver.
RECEIVER
SOURCE
2
Input function buttons
1
2
Press to select control of other components (see
Controlling the rest of your system on page 67).
DVD
TV
BD
CD
DVR
HDMI
Use INPUT SELECT to select the input function (page 42).
CD-R
VIDEO
3
Number buttons and other receiver/component
iPod USB TUNER INPUT SELECT
HDMI OUT
controls
Use the number buttons to directly select a radio
frequency (page 48) or the tracks on a CD, DVD, etc.
1
2
3
SIGNAL SEL MCACC
SLEEP
ENTER can be used to enter commands for TV or DTV.
4
5
6
3
4
SBch
A.ATT
DIMMER
Press
first to access:
RECEIVER
7
8
9
D.ACCESS CH LEVEL
CLASS
HDMI OUT – Switch the HDMI output terminal
(page 65).
ENTER
0
INPUT
MASTER
VOLUME
SIGNAL SEL – Use to select an input signal (page 55).
TV CONTROL
14
15
MCACC – Press to switch between MCACC presets
(page 54).
CH
VOL
MUTE
SLEEP – Use to put the receiver in sleep mode and
select the amount of time before sleep (page 65).
AUDIO
PARAMETER
VIDEO
PARAMETER
LIST
TUNE TOOLS
5
6
SBch – Use to select the surround back/virtual surround
TOP MENU
BAND
T.EDIT
GUIDE
back channel mode (page 53)
.
PRESET
ENTER
PRESET
RETURN
A.ATT – Attenuates (lowers) the level of an analog
input signal to prevent distortion (page 64).
PTY
SEARCH
DIMMER – Dims or brightens the display (page 65).
HOME
MENU
iPod CTRL
TUNE
CH LEVEL – Press repeatedly to select a channel,
then use / to adjust the level (page 86).
Press TUNER first to access:
AUTO/ALC/
DIRECT
MENU
STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR
DVD
HDD
THX
PHASE CTRL
STATUS
D.ACCESS – After pressing, you can access a radio
7
8
station directly using the number buttons (page 48).
TV/DTV
AUDIO
MPX
PQLS
CLASS – Switches between the seven banks (classes)
of radio station presets (page 48).
INFO
DISP
CH
RECEIVER
TV CTRL
16
17
4
TV CONTROL buttons
9
10
11
REMOTE
SETUP
These buttons are dedicated to control the TV assigned to
TV operation selector switch. Thus if you only have one TV
to hook up to this system assign it to the TV operation
selector switch (see page 68 for more on this).
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
MAIN
– Use to turn on/off the power of the TV.
INPUT – Use to select the TV input signal.
CH +/– – Use to select channels.
RECEIVER
The remote has been conveniently color-coded according
to component control using the following system:
VOL +/– – Use to adjust the volume on your TV.
• White – Receiver control, TV Control
• Blue – Other controls
9
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controls and displays
02
5
Tuner/component control buttons/HOME MENU
8
9
AUDIO – Changes the audio or channel on DVD or
BD discs.
DISP – Switches between named station presets and
radio frequencies.
These button controls can be accessed after you have
selected the corresponding input function button (DVD,
DVR, TV, etc.). The BAND, T.EDIT and PTY SEARCH
tuner controls are explained on page 48.
CH +/– – Use to select channels for DVD/DVR units.
Press
first to access:
RECEIVER
REMOTE SETUP
AUDIO PARAMETER – Use to access the Audio
options (page 60).
Use to input the preset code when making remote
control settings and to set the remote control mode
(page 67).
VIDEO PARAMETER – Use to access the Video
options (page 61).
10 TV CTRL
HOME MENU – Use to access the Home Menu
(pages 38, 40, 58, 71, 84 and 88).
Use this button to set preset code of your TV’s
manufacturer when controlling TV (see Selecting preset
codes directly on page 67 for more on this).
RETURN – Press to confirm and exit the current
menu screen (also use to return to the previous menu
with DVDs or to select closed captioning with DTV).
11 MULTI-ZONE operation selector switch
Switch to perform operations in the main zone, ZONE 2
and ZONE 3 (page 64).
6
/// (TUNE/PRESET) /ENTER
Use the arrow buttons when setting up your surround
sound system (see page 71) and the Audio or Video
options (page 60 or 61). Also used to control DVD menus/
options and for deck 1 of a double cassette deck player.
Use TUNE/ to find radio frequencies and use PRESET
/ to find preset stations (page 48).
12 Remote control LED
Lights when a command is sent from the remote control
(page 67).
13 SOURCE
Press to turn on/off other components connected to the
receiver (see page 67 for more on this).
7
Component/Receiver control buttons
The main buttons (, , etc.) are used to control a
component after you have selected it using the input
function buttons.
14 MASTER VOLUME +/–
Use to set the listening volume.
15 MUTE
The controls above these buttons can be accessed after
you have selected the corresponding input function
button (for example DVD, DVR or TV). These buttons also
function as described below.
Mutes the sound or restores the sound if it has been
muted (adjusting the volume also restores the sound).
RECEIVER
16
Switches the remote to control the receiver (used to
select the white commands above the number buttons
(A.ATT, etc.)). Also use this button to set up surround
sound.
Press TUNER first to access:
MPX – Switches between stereo and mono reception
of FM broadcasts. If the signal is weak, then switching
to mono will improve the sound quality (page 48)
.
17
Press first to access:
RECEIVER
Press to turn on/off the illumination of some of the
buttons.
AUTO/ALC/DIRECT – Switches between Auto
Surround (page 50), Auto level control mode and
Stream Direct mode (page 53).
STEREO – Switches between stereo playback and
Front Stage Surround Advance modes (page 52).
STANDARD – Press for Standard decoding and to
switch between the various 2 Pro Logic IIx and
Neo:6 options (page 50).
ADV SURR – Use to switch between the various
surround modes (page 51).
THX – Press to select a Home THX listening mode
(page 51).
PHASE CTRL – Press to switch on/off Phase Control
(page 55).
STATUS – Press to check selected receiver settings
(page 65).
PQLS – Press to select PQLS setting (page 59).
10
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controls and displays
Front panel
02
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
VSX-LX52
STANDBY/ON
ENTER
PHASE
CONTROL
ADVANCED
MCACC
BAND
TUNE
TUNE
PQLS
HDMI
PRESET
PRESET
TUNER EDIT
MASTER
VOLUME
INPUT
SELECTOR
AUTO SURR/ALC/
STREAM DIRECT
ADVANCED
SURROUND
STANDARD
SURROUND
MULTI-ZONE
STEREO
HOME THX
SPEAKERS
CONTROL
ON/OFF
PHONES
VIDEO CAMERA
iPod
iPhone
MCACC SETUP MIC
USB
HDMI
4
9
10
11 12 13
14
15
1
INPUT SELECTOR dial
9
PHONES jack
Use to select an input function.
Use to connect headphones. When the headphones are
connected, there is no sound output from the speakers.
2
STANDBY/ON
Switches the receiver between on and standby. Power
10 Listening mode buttons
indicator lights when the receiver is on.
AUTO SURR/ALC/STREAM DIRECT – Switches
When the KURO LINK function is set to ON, the power
between Auto Surround (page 50), Auto level control
indicator lights dimly when the power is in standby.
mode and Stream Direct mode (page 53)
.
STEREO – Switches between stereo playback and
Front Stage Surround Advance modes (page 52).
3
Tuner controls
BAND – Switches between AM and FM radio bands
ADVANCED SURROUND – Use to switch between
the various surround modes (page 51).
(page 48).
TUNE +/– – Use to find radio frequencies (page 48).
STANDARD SURROUND – Press for Standard
decoding and to switch between the various 2 Pro
Logic IIx and Neo:6 options (page 50).
HOME THX – Press to select a Home THX listening
mode (page 51).
PRESET +/– – Use to find preset stations (page 48).
TUNER EDIT – Use with TUNE +/–
ENTER to memorize and name stations for recall
(page 48)
,
PRESET +/– and
.
4
PHASE CONTROL indicator
Phase Control is selected (page 55)
ADVANCED MCACC indicator Lights when EQ is
–
Lights to indicate
11 SPEAKERS
Use to change the speaker system (page 63).
.
–
12 MULTI-ZONE controls
set to ON in the AUDIO PARAMETER menu (page 60)
.
If you’ve made MULTI-ZONE connections (see MULTI-
ZONE setup on page 31) use these controls to control the
sub zone from the main zone (see Using the MULTI-ZONE
controls on page 63).
PQLS indicator – Lights when the PQLS feature is
active (page 59).
HDMI indicator – Blinks when connecting an HDMI-
equipped component; lights when the component is
13 MCACC SETUP MIC jack
Use to connect the supplied microphone (page 39).
connected (page 23)
.
5
Character display
See Display on page 12.
14 iPod/iPhone/USB terminals
Use to connect your Apple iPod as an audio and video
source, or connect a USB device for audio and photo
playback (page 36).
6
ENTER
7
Remote sensor
Receives the signals from the remote control (see
Operating range of remote control unit on page 8).
15 HDMI input connector
Use for connection to compatible HDMI device (Video
camera, etc.). See Connecting an HDMI-equipped
component to the front panel input on page 35.
8
MASTER VOLUME dial
11
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controls and displays
02
Display
1
2
3
45
6
7
8
9
10 11
12
13
14
15 16
2
DIGITAL PLUS
DSD PCM
TrueHD WMA9Pro MULTI-ZONE PQLS ALC ATT STEREO
TUNED RDS
AUTO
PCM
HDMI
DIGITAL
ANALOG
L
C
R
2
DTS HD ES 96/24
SL
SR
S.RTRV SOUND UP MIX OVER
MONO
dB
XL XC XR
TV
DVD
BD DVR
CD TUNER
CD-R
VIDEO
HDMI [ 2 ]
USB
[ 3 ]
MSTR
LFE
iPod
[ 4 ]
AUTO SURROUND
STREAM DIRECT
2
PROLOGIC
THX ADV.SURROUND
x
Neo:6
STEREO STANDARD
SP AB
SLEEP
9
17
18 19 20
21
22
1
SIGNAL indicators
9
Listening mode indicators
Light to indicate the currently selected input signal.
AUTO lights when the receiver is set to select the input
signal automatically (page 55).
AUTO SURROUND – Lights when the Auto Surround
feature is switched on (page 50).
ALC – Lights when the ALC (Auto level control) mode
is selected (page 53).
2
Program format indicators
Light to indicate the channels being input when PCM
signals are being input. They do not indicate the audio
signals being output from the receiver.
STREAM DIRECT – Lights when Direct/Pure Direct is
selected (page 53).
ADV.SURROUND – Lights when one of the
Advanced Surround modes has been selected
(page 51).
L/R – Left front/Right front channel
C – Center channel
SL/SR – Left surround/Right surround channel
LFE – Low frequency effects channel (the (( )) indicators light
when an LFE signal is being input)
XL/XR – Two channels other than the ones above
XC – Either one channel other than the ones above, the mono
surround channel or matrix encode flag
STEREO – Lights when stereo listening is switched
on (page 52).
STANDARD – Lights when one of the Standard
Surround modes is switched on (page 50).
THX – Lights when one of the Home THX modes is
3
Digital format indicators
selected (page 51).
Light when a signal encoded in the corresponding format
is detected.
10
(PHASE CONTROL)
Lights when the Phase Control is switched on (page 55).
4
S.RTRV
Lights when the Sound Retriever function is active
(page 60)
11 Analog signal indicators
Light to indicate reducing the level of an analog signal
(page 64).
.
5
MULTI-ZONE
Lights when the MULTI-ZONE feature is active (page 63).
12 Tuner indicators
TUNED – Lights when a broadcast is being received.
STEREO – Lights when a stereo FM broadcast is being
6
DSD PCM – Light during DSD (Direct Stream Digital) to
PCM conversion with SACDs.
received in auto stereo mode.
PCM – Lights during playback of PCM signals.
MONO – Lights when the mono mode is set using
MPX.
7
SOUND
Lights when any of the Midnight, Loudness or tone
RDS – Lights when an RDS broadcast is received.
controls feature is selected (page 60).
Lights when Dialog Enhancement is switched on.
13
Lights when the sound is muted (page 10).
8
UP MIX
Lights when the Up Mix is switched on (page 54).
12
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controls and displays
02
14 Master volume level
Shows the overall volume level.
“---” indicates the minimum level, and “+12dB” indicates
the maximum level.
15 Input function indicators
Light to indicate the input function you have selected.
16 Scroll indicators
Light when there are more selectable items when making
the various settings.
17 Speaker indicators
Lights to indicate the current speaker system, A and/or B
(page 63).
18 SLEEP
Lights when the receiver is in sleep mode (page 65).
19 Matrix decoding format indicators
2PRO LOGIC IIx – This lights to indicate 2 Pro
Logic II / 2 Pro Logic IIx decoding (page 50).
Neo:6 – When one of the Neo:6 modes of the receiver
is on, this lights to indicate Neo:6 processing (page 50)
.
20 MSTR
Lights during playback of DTS-HD Master Audio signal.
21 Character display
Displays various system information.
22 Remote control mode indicator
Lights to indicate the receiver’s remote control mode
setting. (Not displayed when set to 1.) (page 67)
13
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting your equipment
03
CChaoptnern3:ecting your equipment
This receiver provides you with many connection possibilities, but it doesn’t have to be difficult. This page explains the
kinds of components you can connect to make up your home theater system.
Rear panel
ASSIGN-
(
ASSIGNABLE
BD IN
IN
1
IN
2
IN
3
OUT 1 KURO
OUT 2
AL
OPTICAL
HDMI
ABLE
)
AC IN
LINK
IN
2
ASSIGNABLE
17
IN
2
IN
3
1
2
3
OUT
11
NTENNA
1
3
ONENT
EO
4
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
DVD
CD
TV/SAT
DVR
VIDEO
NABLE
IN
1
CENTER SURROUND
CENTER
IN
2
AUDIO
FM UNMAL
75
ޓޓ (
)
DVD
(
)
DVR
L
5
7
8
9
10
(
)
Single
Y
Y
R
R
AM LOOP
PB
PB
SUBWOOFER SURROUND SURROUND
BACK
ZONE2 ZONE3
DVD
IN
TV/SAT VIDEO
DVR
CD
IN
CD-R/TAPE
OUT IN
SUBWOOFER
OUT
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
IN
P
R
P
R
R
MULTI CH IN
PRE OUT
6
MONITOR
OUT
Y
VIDEO
SPEAKERS
16
FRONT
CENTER
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK /
B
(
)
Single
R
L
R
L
R
L
A
P
B
S-VIDEO
PR
TRIGGER
15
13
14
(TPUT 12 V
TOTAL 50 mA MAX)
CONTROL
IR
IN
1
2
IN
IN
OUT
OUT
RS-232C
12
1
2
3
Optical digital audio output/input(s) (x4)
CAUTION
Use the OUT jack for recording to a CD or MiniDisc
recorder.
See Connecting other audio components on page 28.
• Before making or changing the connections, switch
off the power and disconnect the power cord from the
power outlet. Plugging in should be the final step.
Use the IN jacks for digital audio sources, including DVD
players/recorders, digital satellite receivers, CD players,
• To avoid hum, do not lay connected cables over the
top of the receiver.
etc.
See also The Input Setup menu on page 40 to assign
the inputs.
4
Component video connectors (x3)
Use the inputs to connect any video source that has
component video output, such as a DVD player.
See Connecting your DVD player with no HDMI output
on page 24.
1
HDMI connectors (x6)
Use the output to connect monitor or TV.
Multiple inputs and two outputs for high-quality audio/
video connection to compatible HDMI devices.
See Connecting your TV and playback components on
page 23.
See Connecting your TV with no HDMI input on
page 25.
5
MULTI-ZONE audio/video outputs
See Switching the HDMI output on page 65.
Use to connect a second or third amplifier and monitors
or TVs in a separate room.
See MULTI-ZONE setup on page 31.
2
Coaxial digital audio inputs (x2)
Use for digital audio sources, including DVD players/
recorders, digital satellite receivers, CD players, etc.
See also The Input Setup menu on page 40 to assign
the inputs.
6
Composite and S-Video monitor outputs
Use to connect monitors and TVs.
See Connecting your TV with no HDMI input on
page 25.
14
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting your equipment
03
7
Audio/video source inputs/(outputs) (x5)
Use for connection to audio/visual sources, such as DVD
players/recorders, VCRs, etc. Each set of inputs has jacks
for composite video, S-Video and stereo analog audio.
See Connecting an HDD/DVD recorder, VCR and other
video sources on page 27.
8
Stereo analog audio source inputs/(outputs) (x3)
Use for connection to audio sources such as CD players,
tape decks, turntables, etc.
See Connecting other audio components on page 28.
9
Multichannel analog audio inputs
7.1 channel inputs for connection to a DVD player with
multichannel analog outputs.
See Connecting the multichannel analog inputs on
page 28.
10 Multichannel pre-amplifier outputs
Use to connect separate amplifiers for front, center,
surround, surround back and subwoofer channels.
See Connecting additional amplifiers on page 29 (see
also Installing your speaker system on page 19 for
powered subwoofer connection).
11 AM and FM antenna terminals
Use to connect indoor or outdoor antennas for radio
broadcasts.
See Connecting AM/FM antennas on page 30.
12 RS-232C connector
Use for connection to a PC for graphical output when
using Advanced MCACC.
See Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC output on
page 34.
13 Control input/output
Use to connect other Pioneer components so that you
can control all your equipment from a single IR remote
sensor.
See Operating other Pioneer components with this
unit’s sensor on page 33.
14 Remote inputs/output
Use for connection to an external remote control sensor
for use in a MULTI-ZONE setup, for example.
See Connecting an IR receiver on page 33.
15 12 V trigger jacks (total 50 mA max.) (x2)
Use to switch components in your system on and off
according to the input function of the receiver.
See Switching components on and off using the 12
volt trigger on page 34.
16 Speaker terminals
Use for connection to the main front, center, surround
and surround back speakers.
See Connecting the speakers on page 18.
17 AC power inlet
Connect the supplied power cord here.
See Plugging in the receiver on page 37.
15
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting your equipment
03
[3] 5.1ch surround & ZONE 2 connection
(Multi Zone)
With these connections you can simultaneously enjoy
5.1-channel surround sound in the main zone with stereo
playback on another component in ZONE 2. (The
selection of input devices is limited.)
Determining the speakers’ application
Surround sound with a strong sense of presence can be
enjoyed by connecting 7 speakers and 1 subwoofer. It is
also possible to achieve high sound quality using bi-amp
connections and to enjoy music in other rooms using the
MULTI-ZONE feature. High sound quality can be
achieved with a minimum of two speakers.
• Surr Back System setting: ZONE 2
• Be sure to connect speakers to the front left and right
L
Front
left
SW
R
Front
right
R
channels ( L and
).
L
Left
R
Right
C
• The Surr Back System setting must be made if you
use any of the connections shown below other than
[1] (see Selecting the Surr Back system on page 21).
Center
Subwoofer
ZONE 2
Surround
Surround
left
[1] 7.1ch surround connection
(Simple connection & Best surround)
*Default setting
right
SR
SL
These connections prioritize surround sound with a
speaker layout like that in a movie theater.
[4] 5.1ch surround & Speaker B connection
With these connections you can simultaneously enjoy
5.1-channel surround sound in the main zone with stereo
playback of the same sound on the B speakers.
• Surr Back System setting: Normal (default)
• If you have six speakers, either only connect one
surround back speaker (6.1 ch surround), or connect
for the 7.1-channel setting as shown on the diagram
below but without the center speaker.
• Surr Back System setting: Speaker B
Speaker B
L
Front
left
SW
R
Front
right
C
L
Front
left
SW
R
Front
right
Center
C
Subwoofer
Center
Subwoofer
Surround
right
Surround
left
SR
SL
Surround
left
Surround
right
SR
SL
SBL
Surround
back left
SBR
Surround
back right
Other speaker connection
• Your favorite speaker connections can be selected
even if you have fewer than 5.1 speakers.
[2] 5.1ch surround & Front Bi-amping connection
(High quality surround)
Bi-amping connection of the front speakers for high
sound quality with 5.1-channel surround sound.
• When not connecting a subwoofer, connect speakers
with low frequency reproduction capabilities to the
front channel. (The subwoofer’s low frequency
component is played from the front speakers, so the
speakers could be damaged.)
• Surr Back System setting: Front Bi-Amp
•
After connecting, be sure to conduct the Auto
MCACC (speaker environment setting) procedure.
See Automatically setting up for surround sound
(Auto MCACC) on page 39.
L
Front
left*
SW
R
Front
right*
C
Center
Subwoofer
Surround
right
Surround
left
SR
SL
*Bi-amp compatible speaker
16
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting your equipment
Placing the speakers
03
THX speaker system setup
If you have a complete THX speaker system, follow the
diagram below to place your speakers. Note that the
surround speakers ( indicates bi-polar radiating
speakers) should output at an angle parallel to the
listener.
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your
speakers as shown below.
5.1 channel surround system:
Center
Front right
Front left
L
C
R
Subwoofer
120°
120°
SL
SR
Surround
SBR
Surround
Surround
left
right
Surround
6.1 channel surround system:
SBL
Center
Front left
Front right
Surround back
Subwoofer
• If you have two surround back speakers THX
recommends placing them together and the same
distance from your listening position for the following
THX modes: THX Select2 CINEMA, THX Select2
MUSIC and THX Select2 GAMES.
120°
120°
Surround
Surround
right
• If you are using a THX certified subwoofer use the
THX INPUT jack on the subwoofer (if your subwoofer
has one) or switch the filter position to THX on your
subwoofer.
left
Surround Back
See also THX Audio Setting on page 87 to make the
settings that will give you the best sound experience
when using the Home THX modes (page 51).
7.1 channel surround system:
Center
Front left
Front right
Subwoofer
90°
90°
Surround
Surround
right
left
60°
Surround back
Surround back
right
left
• If you have two surround back speakers THX
recommends placing them together and the same
distance from your listening position (see below).
17
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting your equipment
03
Some tips for improving sound quality
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect
on the quality of the sound. The following guidelines
should help you to get the best sound from your system.
Connecting the speakers
Each speaker connection on the receiver comprises a
positive (+) and negative (–) terminal. Make sure to
match these up with the terminals on the speakers
themselves.
• The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the
other speakers should be at about ear-level when
you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the
floor (except the subwoofer), or mounting them very
high on a wall is not recommended.
CAUTION
• These speaker terminals carry HAZARDOUS LIVE
voltage. To prevent the risk of electric shock when
connecting or disconnecting the speaker cables,
disconnect the power cord before touching any
uninsulated parts.
• For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2
m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from the TV.
• If you’re using a center speaker, place the front
speakers at a wider angle. If not, place them at a
narrower angle.
• Make sure that all the bare speaker wire is twisted
together and inserted fully into the speaker terminal.
If any of the bare speaker wire touches the back panel
it may cause the power to cut off as a safety measure.
• Place the center speaker above or below the TV so
that the sound of the center channel is localized at
the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker
does not cross the line formed by the leading edge of
the front left and right speakers.
Bare wire connections
1
2
3
Twist exposed wire strands together. (fig. A)
Loosen terminal and insert exposed wire. (fig. B)
Tighten terminal. (fig. C)
• It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening
position. The angle depends on the size of the room.
Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
• Surround and surround back speakers should be
positioned 60 cm to 90 cm higher than your ears and
tilted slight downward. Make sure the speakers don’t
face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should
be more directly behind the listener than for home
theater playback.
fig. A
fig. B
fig. C
10 mm
• If the surround speakers cannot be set directly to the
side of the listening position with a 7.1-channel
system, the surround effect can be enhanced by
turning off the Up Mix function (see Setting the Up
Mix function on page 54).
Important
• Please refer to the manual that came with your
speakers for details on how to connect the other end
of the speaker cables to your speakers.
• Try not to place the surround speakers farther away
from the listening position than the front and center
speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound
effect.
• Use an RCA cable to connect the subwoofer. It is not
possible to connect using speaker cables.
CAUTION
• Make sure that all speakers are securely installed.
This not only improves sound quality, but also
reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from
speakers being knocked over or falling in the event of
external shocks such as earthquakes.
18
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting your equipment
Installing your speaker system
03
At the very least, front left and right speakers only are necessary. Note that your main surround speakers should always
be connected as a pair, but you can connect just one surround back speaker if you like (it must be connected to the
left surround back terminal).
Standard 5.1/6.1/7.1-channel surround connections
Center
Subwoofer
Front left
Front right
LINE LEVEL
INPUT
ASSIGN-
ABLE
(
ASSIGNABLE
BD IN
IN
1
IN
2
IN
3
OUT 1 KURO
OUT 2
COAXIAL
IN
OPTICAL
HDMI
)
AC IN
LINK
1
IN
2
ASSIGNABLE
IN
1
IN
2
IN
3
OUT
1
3
ANTENNA
COMPONENT
VIDEO
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
DVD
CD
TV/SAT
DVR
VIDEO
ASSIGNABLE
IN
1
CD-R/TAPE
FRONT
CENTER SURROUND
FRONT
CER
IN
2
AUDIO
FM UNMAL
75
ޓޓ (
)
L
DVD
(
)
DVR
L
(
)
Single
Y
Y
R
R
AM LOOP
PB
PB
SUBWOOFER SURROUND SURROUND
BACK
ZONE2 ZONE3
DVD
IN
TV/SAT VIDEO
DVR
CD
IN
CD-R/TAPE
OUT IN
SUBWOOFER
OUT
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
IN
PR
PR
MONITOR
OUT
MULTI CH IN
PRE OUT
MONITOR
OUT
Y
VIDEO
SPEAKERS
FRONT
CENTER
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK /
B
(
)
Single
R
L
R
L
R
L
A
PB
S-VIDEO
PR
12 V TRIGGER
(OUTPUT 12 V
TOTAL 50 mA MAX)
CONTROL
IN
IR
IN
1
2
IN
OUT
OUT
RS-232C
1
2
The surround back terminals can also be
used for the Speaker B and ZONE 2.
7.1 ch surround setting
Surround back left
Surround back right
6.1 ch surround setting
Surround back
No connect
Speaker B setting
Surround left
Surround right
Speaker B - Right
Speaker B - Left
ZONE 2 setting
ZONE 2 - Left
ZONE 2 - Right
19
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting your equipment
03
Bi-amping your speakers
Bi-amp compatible
Bi-amp compatible
speaker
speaker
Center
Subwoofer
High
Low
High
Low
Front left
Front right
ASSIGN-
(
ASSIGNABLE
BD IN
IN
1
IN
2
IN
3
OUT 1 KURO
OUT 2
COAXIAL
IN
OPTICAL
HDMI
ABLE
)
AC IN
LINK
1
IN
2
ASSIGNABLE
IN
1
IN
2
IN
3
OUT
1
3
ANTENNA
COMPONENT
VIDEO
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
DVD
CD
TV/SAT
DVR
VIDEO
ASSIGNABLE
IN
1
CD-R/TAPE
FRONT
CENTER SURROUND
FRONT
CER
IN
2
AUDIO
FM UNMAL
75
ޓޓ (
)
L
DVD
(
)
DVR
L
(
)
Single
Y
Y
R
R
AM LOOP
PB
PB
SUBWOOFER SURROUND SURROUND
BACK
ZONE2 ZONE3
DVD
IN
TV/SAT VIDEO
DVR
CD
IN
CD-R/TAPE
OUT IN
SUBWOOFER
OUT
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
IN
PR
PR
MONITOR
OUT
MULTI CH IN
PRE OUT
MONITOR
OUT
Y
VIDEO
SPEAKERS
CENTER SURROUND
FRONT
SURROUND BACK /
B
(
)
Single
R
L
R
L
R
L
A
PB
S-VIDEO
PR
12 V TRIGGER
(OUTPUT 12 V
TOTAL 50 mA MAX)
CONTROL
IN
IR
IN
1
2
IN
OUT
OUT
RS-232C
1
2
Surround left
Surround right
Bi-amping is when you connect the high frequency driver
and low frequency driver of your speakers to different
amplifiers for better crossover performance. Your
speakers must be bi-ampable to do this (having separate
terminals for high and low) and the sound improvement
will depend on the kind of speakers you’re using.
Bi-wiring your speakers
Your speakers can also be bi-wired if they support bi-
amping.
• With these connections, the Surr Back System
setting makes no difference.
•
To bi-wire a speaker, connect two speaker cords to
the speaker terminal on the receiver.
CAUTION
• Most speakers with both High and Low terminals
have two metal plates that connect the High to the
Low terminals. These must be removed when you are
bi-amping the speakers or you could severely
damage the amplifier. See your speaker manual for
more information.
• If your speakers have a removable crossover network,
make sure you do not remove it for bi-amping. Doing
so may damage your speakers.
CAUTION
• Don’t connect different speakers from the same
terminal in this way.
• When bi-wiring as well, heed the cautions for bi-
amping shown at the left.
20
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting your equipment
Selecting the Surr Back system
03
About the audio connection
The surround back terminals can be used for bi-amping,
Speaker B and ZONE 2 connections, in addition to for the
surround back speakers. Make this setting according to
the application.
There are several types of audio input and output
terminals on this receiver. The receiver selects the first
available signal in the following order:
Types of cables and
terminals
Transferable audio
signals
ZONE 2 setup
With these connections you can simultaneously enjoy
5.1-channel surround sound in the main zone with stereo
playback on another component in ZONE 2.
HDMI
HD audio
1
Connect a pair of speakers to the surround back
speaker terminals.
See Standard 5.1/6.1/7.1-channel surround connections
on page 19.
Digital (Coaxial)
Conventional digital audio
Conventional analog audio
2
Select ‘ZONE 2’ from the Surr Back System menu.
Digital (Optical)
See Surround back speaker setting on page 85 to do this.
Speaker B setup
You can listen to stereo playback in another room.
RCA (Analog)
(White/Red)
1
Connect a pair of speakers to the surround back
speaker terminals.
See Standard 5.1/6.1/7.1-channel surround connections
on page 19.
2
Select ‘Speaker B’ from the Surr Back System
menu.
• With an HDMI cable, video and audio signals can be
transferred in high quality over a single cable.
See Surround back speaker setting on page 85 to do this.
Bi-Amping setup
Bi-amping connection of the front speakers for high
sound quality with 5.1-channel surround sound.
CAUTION
• When connecting optical cables, be careful when
inserting the plug not to damage the shutter
protecting the optical socket.
1
Connect a Bi-amp compatible speakers to the front
and surround back speaker terminals.
• When storing optical cable, coil loosely. The cable
may be damaged if bent around sharp corners.
See Bi-amping your speakers on page 20.
2
Select ‘Front Bi-Amp’ from the Surr Back System
menu.
See Surround back speaker setting on page 85 to do this.
21
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting your equipment
About the video converter
03
The video converter ensures that all video sources are output through all of the MONITOR VIDEO OUT jacks. The only
exception is HDMI: since this resolution cannot be downsampled, you must connect your monitor/TV to the receiver’s
1
HDMI video outputs when connecting this video source.
If several video components are assigned to the same input function (see The Input Setup menu on page 40), the
converter gives priority to HDMI, component, S-Video, then composite (in that order).
VSX-LX52
TANDBY/ON
ENTER
PHASE
CONTROL
ADVANCED
MCACC
BAND
TUNE
TUNE
PQLS
HDMI
PRESET
PRESET
TUNER EDIT
INPUT
SELECTOR
AUTO SURR/ALC/
STREAM DIRECT
ADVANCED
SURROUND
STANDARD
SURROUND
MULTI-ZONE
MASTER
VOLUME
STEREO
HOME THX
SPEAKERS
CONTROL
ON/OFF
PHONES
VIDEO CAMERA
iPod
iPhone
MCACC SETUP MIC
USB
HDMI
4
This receiver
Source device
TV monitor
Terminal for
Terminal for
connection with
source device
connection with TV
Types of cables
monitor
HDMI IN
HDMI OUT
PR
PR
PB
Y
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO IN
COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
S-VIDEO IN
VIDEO IN
S-VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
Video signals can be output
• For optimal video performance, THX recommends
switching Digital Video Conversion (in Setting the
Video options on page 61) OFF.
This product incorporates copyright protection
technology that is protected by method claims of certain
U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned
by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners.
Use of this copyright protection technology must be
authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended
for home and other limited viewing uses only unless
otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation.
Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
Note
1 • If the video signal does not appear on your TV or flat screen TV, try adjusting the resolution settings on your component or display. Note that
some components (such as video game units) have resolutions that may not be converted. In this case, try switching Digital Video Conversion
(in Setting the Video options on page 61) OFF.
• The signal input resolutions that can be converted from the component video input for the HDMI output are 480i/576i, 480p/576p, 720p and
1080i. 1080p signals cannot be converted.
• Only signals with an input resolution of 480i/576i can be converted from the component video input for the composite monitor output.
22
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting your equipment
03
Connecting your TV and playback components
Connecting using HDMI
If you have an HDMI or DVI (with HDCP) equipped component (Blu-ray disc player, etc.), you can connect it to this
receiver using a commercially available HDMI cable.
If the TV and playback components support the Pioneer KURO LINK feature, the convenient KURO LINK functions can
be used (see KURO LINK on page 57).
HDMI/DVI-compatible
Blu-ray disc player
Other HDMI/DVI-
equipped component
HDMI/DVI-compatible monitor
or flat screen TV
Select one
DIGITAL OUT
HDMI OUT
HDMI OUT
HDMI IN
AUDIO OUT
R
L
ANALOG
COAXIAL OPTICAL
This connection is
required in order to
listen to the sound of
the TV over the receiver.
ASSIGN-
OUT 1 KURO
COAXIAL ASSIGNABLE
IN
IN
2
IN
3
(
OUT 2
BD IN
IN
1
OPTICAL
OUT
HDMI
ABLE
2
ASSIGNABLE
)
LINK
IN
1
IN
1
IN
2
IN
3
1
3
COMPONENT
VIDEO
(
)
DVD
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
CD
TV/SAT
FRONT
DVR
VIDEO
ASSIGNABLE
IN
1
CD-R/TAPE
CENTER SURROUND
FRONT
CENTER
IN
2
(
)
L
DVD
(
)
DVR
Y
Y
R
PB
PB
TV/SAT
SUBWOOFER
S
ZONE2 ZONE3
DVD
IN
VIDEO
IN
DVR
CD
IN
CD-R/TAPE
OUT IN
SUBWOOFER
IN
OUT
OUT
OUT
IN
PR
PR
MONITOR
OUT
MULTI CH IN
PRE
MONITOR
OUT
Y
VIDEO
SPEAKERS
SURROUND
FRONT
CENTER
R
L
R
L
A
PB
S-VIDEO
PR
12 V TRIGGER
(OUTPUT 12 V
TOTAL 50 mA MAX)
CONTROL
IN
IR
IN
1
2
IN
OUT
OUT
RS-232C
1
2
• When connecting a Blu-ray disc player, connect the
player to the receiver’s BD IN terminal.
• If your Blu-ray disc player offers multi-channel analog
audio outputs, see Connecting the multichannel
analog inputs on page 28.
• When connecting to an HDMI/DVI-compatible
monitor or a flat screen TV using the HDMI OUT 2
terminal, switch the HDMI output setting to HDMI
OUT 2 or HDMI OUT ALL. See Switching the HDMI
output on page 65.
• The sound of the TV cannot be heard over the receiver
if the TV is connected using an HDMI cable.
If you want to listen to the sound of the TV over the
receiver, connect the receiver and TV with audio
cables.
• The HDMI indicator lights on the front panel when an
HDMI-equipped component is connected.
• For input components, connections other than HDMI
connections are also possible (see Connecting your
DVD player with no HDMI output on page 24).
23
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting your equipment
03
Connecting your DVD player with no HDMI output
This diagram shows connections of a TV (with HDMI input) and DVD player (or other playback component with no
HDMI output) to the receiver.
DVD player, etc.
HDMI/DVI-compatible
monitor or flat screen TV
Select one
Select one
HDMI IN
VIDEO OUT
AUDIO OUT
DIGITAL OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
VIDEO S-VIDEO
R
L
ANALOG
COAXIAL OPTICAL
PR
PB
Y
ASSIGN-
(
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
BD IN
IN
1
IN
2
IN
3
OUT 1 KURO OUT 2
OPTICAL
OUT
HDMI
ABLE
IN
2
)
LINK
IN
1
ASSIGNABLE
IN
2
IN
1
IN
3
1
3
COMPONENT
VIDEO
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
DVD
CD
TV/SAT
(
)
VIDEO
DVR
ASSIGNABLE
FRONT
CENTER SURROUND
FRONT
CENTER
IN
1
IN
2
CD-R/TAPE
L
(
)
)
R
DVD
Y
R
PB
SUBWOOFER
S
ZONE2 ZONE3
TV/SAT VIDEO
DVR
CD
IN
CD-R/TAPE
OUT IN
SUBWOOFER
DVD
OUT
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
PR
MONITOR
OUT
MULTI CH IN
PRE
MONITOR
OUT
Y
VIDEO
SPEAKERS
SURROUND
FRONT
CENTER
R
L
R
L
A
PB
S-VIDEO
PR
12 V TRIGGER
(OUTPUT 12 V
TOTAL 50 mA MAX)
CONTROL
IN
IR
IN
1
2
IN
OUT
OUT
RS-232C
1
2
• If you want to listen to the sound of the TV over the
receiver, connect the receiver and TV with audio
cables.
• Component video should give superior picture quality
when compared to composite. You can also take
advantage of progressive scan video (if your source
and TV are both compatible), which delivers a very
stable, flicker-free picture. See the manuals that
came with your TV and source component to check
whether they are compatible with progressive-scan
video.
24
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting your equipment
03
Connecting your TV with no HDMI input
This diagram shows connections of a TV (with no HDMI input) and DVD player (or other playback component) to the
receiver.
• With these connections, the picture is not output to the TV even if the DVD player is connected with an HDMI cable.
Connect the DVD player’s video signals using a composite or component cord.
DVD player, etc.
TV
Select one
Select one
AUDIO OUT
Select one
VIDEO IN
VIDEO OUT
VIDEO S-VIDEO
HDMI OUT
DIGITAL OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO IN
PB
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
S-VIDEO VIDEO
R
L
PR
ANALOG
Y
COAXIAL OPTICAL
PR
PB
Y
ASSIGN-
(
ASSIGNABLE
BD IN
IN
1
IN
2
IN
3
OUT 1 KURO
OUT 2
COAXIAL
IN
OPTICAL
HDMI
ABLE
)
LINK
1
IN
2
ASSIGNABLE
IN
1
IN
2
IN
3
OUT
1
3
COMPONENT
VIDEO
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
DVD
CD
TV/SAT
DVR
VIDEO
ASSIGNABLE
IN
1
CD-R/TAPE
FRONT
CENTER SURROUND
FRONT
CENTER
IN
2
(
)
L
DVD
(
)
DVR
Y
R
PB
SUBWOOFER
S
ZONE2 ZONE3
DVD
IN
TV/SAT VIDEO
DVR
CD
IN
CD-R/TAPE
OUT IN
SUBWOOFER
OUT
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
IN
PR
MONITOR
OUT
MULTI CH IN
PRE O
MONITOR
OUT
Y
VIDEO
SPEAKERS
SURROUND
FRONT
CENTER
R
L
R
L
A
PB
S-VIDEO
PR
12 V TRIGGER
(OUTPUT 12 V
TOTAL 50 mA MAX)
CONTROL
IN
IR
IN
1
2
IN
OUT
OUT
RS-232C
1
2
• Connect using an HDMI cable to listen to HD audio
on the receiver. Do not use an HDMI cable to input
video signals.
Depending on the video component, it may not be
possible to output signals connected by HDMI and
other methods simultaneously, and it may be
necessary to make output settings. Please refer to the
operating instructions supplied with your component
for more information.
• Component video should give superior picture quality
when compared to composite. You can also take
advantage of progressive scan video (if your source
and TV are both compatible), which delivers a very
stable, flicker-free picture. See the manuals that
came with your TV and source component to check
whether they are compatible with progressive-scan
video.
• If your DVD player has multichannel analog outputs,
you can connect these instead. See also Connecting
the multichannel analog inputs on page 28.
25
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting your equipment
03
1
• The input functions below are assigned by default to
the receiver’s different input terminals. Refer to The
Input Setup menu on page 40 to change the
assignments if other connections are used.
For example, the BD terminal is fixed to BD input; no
other audio signals can be input to this terminal.
About HDMI
The HDMI connection transfers uncompressed digital
video, as well as almost every kind of digital audio that the
connected component is compatible with, including
DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, SACD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby
TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio (see below for
limitations), Video CD/Super VCD and CD. See About the
video converter on page 22 for more on HDMI
compatibility.
Input Terminals
Input function
Digital
HDMI
Component
IN 1
DVD
COAX-1
This receiver incorporates High-Definition Multimedia
Interface (HDMI™) technology.
BD
(BD)
TV/SAT
DVR
OPT-1
OPT-2
OPT-3
This receiver supports the functions described below
through HDMI connections.
IN 2
VIDEO
HDMI 1
HDMI 2
HDMI 3
• Digital transfer of uncompressed video (contents
protected by HDCP (1080p/24, 1080p/60, etc.))
(HDMI-1)
(HDMI-2)
(HDMI-3)
(HDMI-4)
2
• DeepColor signal transfer
2
• x.v.Color signal transfer
• Input of multi-channel linear PCM digital audio
signals (192 kHz or less) for up to 8 channels
HDMI 4
(front panel)
• Input of the following digital audio formats:
CD
COAX-2
– Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS, High bitrate
audio (Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio), DVD-
Audio, CD, SACD (DSD signal), Video CD, Super VCD
• Synchronized operation with components using the
KURO LINK function (see KURO LINK on page 57)
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia
Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI
Licensing, LLC.
“x.v.Color” and x.v.Color logo are trademarks of Sony
Corporation.
Note
1 • An HDMI connection can only be made with DVI-equipped components compatible with both DVI and High Bandwidth Digital Content
Protection (HDCP). If you choose to connect to a DVI connector, you will need a separate adaptor (DVIHDMI) to do so. A DVI connection,
however, does not support audio signals. Consult your local audio dealer for more information.
• If you connect a component that is not compatible with HDCP, an HDCP ERROR message is displayed on the front panel display. Some
components that are compatible with HDCP still cause this message to be displayed, but so long as there is no problem with displaying video
this is not a malfunction.
• Depending on the component you have connected, using a DVI connection may result in unreliable signal transfers.
•
This receiver supports SACD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD and DTS-HD Master Audio. To take advantage of these formats, however, make
sure that the component connected to this receiver also supports the corresponding format.
2 Signal transfer is only possible when connected to a compatible component.
26
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting your equipment
03
Connecting an HDD/DVD recorder, VCR and other video sources
This receiver has two sets of audio/video inputs and outputs suitable for connecting analog or digital video devices,
including HDD/DVD recorders and VCRs.
When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the recorder to (see also The
Input Setup menu on page 40).
HDD/DVD recorder, VCR, etc.
Select one
Select one
VIDEO OUT
VIDEO S-VIDEO
Select one
VIDEO IN
AUDIO IN
ANALOG
AUDIO OUT
DIGITAL OUT
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
R
L
R
L
ANALOG
COAXIAL OPTICAL
ASSIGN-
ABLE
(
ASSIGNABLE
BD IN
IN
1
IN
2
IN
3
OUT 1 KURO
OUT 2
COAXIAL
IN
OPTICAL
HDMI
)
LINK
1
IN
2
ASSIGNABLE
IN
1
IN
2
IN
3
OUT
1
3
COMPONENT
VIDEO
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
DVD
CD
TV/SAT
DVR
VIDEO
ASSIGNABLE
IN
1
CD-R/TAPE
FRONT
CENTER SURROUND
FRONT
CENTER
IN
2
(
)
L
DVD
(
)
DVR
Y
Y
R
PB
PB
SUBWOOFER SU
ZONE2 ZONE3
DVD
IN
TV/SAT VIDEO
DVR
CD
IN
CD-R/TAPE
OUT IN
SUBWOOFER
OUT
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
IN
PR
PR
MONITOR
OUT
MULTI CH IN
PRE O
MONITOR
OUT
Y
VIDEO
SPEAKERS
SURROUND
FRONT
CENTER
R
L
R
L
PB
S-VIDEO
PR
12 V TRIGGER
(OUTPUT 12 V
TOTAL 50 mA MAX)
CONTROL
IN
IR
IN
1
2
IN
OUT
OUT
RS-232C
1
2
27
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting your equipment
03
Connecting a satellite/cable receiver or
other set-top box
Connecting the multichannel analog
inputs
Satellite and cable receivers, and terrestrial digital TV
For DVD Audio and SACD playback, your DVD player may
have 5.1 channel analog outputs. Make sure that the
player is set to output multichannel analog audio.
tuners are all examples of so-called ‘set-top boxes’.
When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the
receiver which input you connected the set-top box to
(see The Input Setup menu on page 40).
DVD player, etc.
STB
FRONT
OUTPUT
CENTER
OUTPUT
SURROUND
OUTPUT
R
SUBWOOFER
OUTPUT
R
L
L
Select one
Select one
VIDEO OUT
S-VIDEO VIDEO
AUDIO OUT
DIGITAL OUT
R
L
ANALOG
COAXIAL OPTICAL
ASSIGN-
ABLE
(
ASSIGNABLE
OUT 1 KURO
OUT 2
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
)
LINK
IN
1
IN
2
IN
1
IN
2
3
OUT
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
(
)
DVD
CD
TV/SAT
DVR
VIDEO
FRONT
CENTER SURROUND
FRONT
CENTER
CD-R/TAPE
ASSIGN-
ABLE
(
ASSIGNABLE
IN
1
IN
2
IN
3
OUT 1 KURO
OUT 2
COAXIAL
IN
OPTICAL
)
LINK
1
IN
2
IN
1
IN
2
IN
3
OUT
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
DVD
CD
TV/SAT
DVR
VIDEO
O
DVR
CD
IN
CD-R/TAPE
OUT IN
SUBWOOFER
SUBWOOFER SU
FRONT
CENTER SURROUND
FRONT
CENTER
CD-R/TAPE
OUT
IN
MULTI CH IN
PRE O
SPEAK
URROUND
FRONT
CENTER
E2 ZONE3
DVD
N
TV/SAT VIDEO
DVR
CD
IN
CD-R/TAPE
OUT IN
SUBWOOFER
SUBWOOFER
S
R
L
R
L
A
T
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
IN
MONITOR
OUT
MULTI CH IN
PRE O
O
12 V TRIGGER
(OUTPUT 12 V
SPEAKERS
FRONT
CENTER
SURROUND
TOTAL 50 mA MAX)
R
L
R
L
A
1
2
S-VIDEO
12 V TRIGGER
(OUTPUT 12 V
TOTAL 50 mA MAX)
CONTROL
IN
IR
IN
1
2
IN
OUT
OUT
1
2
• If your player has 7.1-channel analog outputs, the
player’s surround back output terminals are not
used. Please refer to the operating instructions
supplied with your component for more information.
Connecting other audio components
This receiver has both digital and analog inputs, allowing
you to connect audio components for playback.
This receiver features five stereo audio-only inputs. One
of these inputs have corresponding outputs for use with
audio recorders.
Most digital components also have analog connections.
28
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting your equipment
03
When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the
receiver which input you connected the component to
(see also The Input Setup menu on page 40).
Connecting additional amplifiers
This receiver has more than enough power for any home
use, but it’s possible to add additional amplifiers to every
channel of your system using the pre-outs. Make the
connections shown below to add amplifiers to power
your speakers.
CD-R, MD, DAT, etc.
Select one
Select one
ANALOG
INPUT
AUDIO IN
AUDIO OUT
DIGITAL IN
DIGITAL OUT
R
L
ANALOG
R
L
ANALOG
OPTICAL
COAXIAL OPTICAL
L
Front channel
amplifier
R
ANALOG
INPUT
Center channel
amplifier (mono)
ANALOG
INPUT
L
ASSIGN-
(
ASSIGNABLE
OUT 1 KURO
OUT 2
COAXIAL
IN
OPTICAL
Surround channel
amplifier
ABLE
)
LINK
1
IN
2
R
IN
1
IN
2
IN
3
OUT
TICAL
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
DVD
CD
TV/SAT
DVR
VIDEO
T
FRONT
CENTER SURROUND
FR
CENTER
CD-R/TAPE
ANALOG
INPUT
)
FRONT
CENTER
AUDIO
L
(
L
R
Surround back
channel amplifier
O
DVR
CD
IN
CD-R/TAPE
OUT IN
BWOOFER
SUBWOOFER
S
R
OUT
IN
SUBWOOFER SURROUND SURROUND
BACK
MULTI CH IN
PRE
PRE OUT
SPEAKERS
SURROUND
ANALOG
INPUT
FRONT
CENTER
ERS
R
L
R
L
A
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK /
B
(
Sin
R
L
R
L
12 V TRIGGER
Powered
subwoofer
(OUTPUT 12 V
TOTAL 50 mA MAX)
T
1
2
• You can use the additional amplifier on the surround
back channel pre-outs for a single speaker as well. In
this case plug the amplifier into the left (L (Single))
terminal only.
• If your turntable has line-level outputs (i.e., it has a
built-in phono pre-amp), connect it to the CD inputs
instead.
• If you’re connecting a recorder, connect the analog
audio outputs to the analog audio inputs on the
recorder.
• The sound from the surround back terminals will
depend on how you have configured the Surround
back speaker setting on page 85.
About the WMA9 Pro decoder
• To hear sound only from the pre-outs, switch the
speaker system to OFF, or simply disconnect any
speakers that are connected directly to the receiver.
This unit has an on-board Windows Media™ Audio 9
1
Professional (WMA9 Pro) decoder, so it is possible to
playback WMA9 Pro-encoded audio using HDMI, coaxial
or optical digital connection when connected to a WMA9
Pro-compatible player. However, the connected DVD
player, set-top box, etc. must be able to output WMA9 Pro
format audio signals through a coaxial or optical digital
output.
If you’re not using a subwoofer, change the front speaker
setting (see Speaker Setting on page 85) to LARGE.
Note
1 • Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other
countries.
• With WMA9 Pro, sound problems may occur depending on your computer system. Note that WMA9 Pro 96 kHz sources will be
downsampled to 48 kHz.
29
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting your equipment
Connecting AM/FM antennas
03
Connecting external antennas
To improve FM reception connect an external FM
antenna to the FM UNBAL 75 Ω.
Connect the AM loop antenna and the FM wire antenna
as shown below. To improve reception and sound quality,
connect external antennas (see Connecting external
antennas below).
75 Ω coaxial cable
1
2
ANTENNA
FM UNBAL
75
3
ANTENNA
FM UNBAL
75
AM LOOP
5
AM LOOP
To improve AM reception, connect a 5 m to 6 m length of
vinyl-coated wire to the AM LOOP terminals without
disconnecting the supplied AM loop antenna.
4
fig. a
fig. b
fig. c
For the best possible reception, suspend horizontally
outdoors.
Outdoor
antenna
ANTENNA
1
Pull off the protective shields of both AM antenna
Indoor antenna
(vinyl-coated wire)
FM UNBAL
wires.
75
2
Push open the tabs, then insert one wire fully into
AM LOOP
each terminal, then release the tabs to secure the AM
antenna wires.
5 m to 6 m
3
Fix the AM loop antenna to the attached stand.
To fix the stand to the antenna, bend in the direction
indicated by the arrow (fig. a) then clip the loop onto the
stand (fig. b).
• If you plan to mount the AM antenna to a wall or other
surface, secure the stand with screws (fig. c) before
clipping the loop to the stand. Make sure the
reception is clear.
4
Place the AM antenna on a flat surface and in a
direction giving the best reception.
5
Connect the FM wire antenna in the same way as
the AM loop antenna.
For best results, extend the FM antenna fully and fix to a
wall or door frame. Don’t drape loosely or leave coiled up.
30
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting your equipment
MULTI-ZONE setup
03
This receiver can power up to three independent systems in separate rooms after you have made the proper MULTI-
ZONE connections. An example MULTI-ZONE setup is shown below, but the number of MULTI-ZONE connections (and
the way you choose to connect them) depends on how you want to set up your system.
Main zone
Sub zone (ZONE 3)
Sub zone (ZONE 2)
BD IN
IN
1
IN
2
IN
3
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
1
3
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO IN
ASSIGNABLE
IN
1
IN
2
(
)
L
DVD
(
)
D
Y
R
PB
ZONE2 ZONE3
DVD
IN
TV/SAT
IN
OUT
OUT
PR
PR
MONITOR
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
Y
VIDEO
PB
AUDIO IN
AUDIO IN
R
S-VIDEO
PR
R
L
L
CONTROL
IN
IR
IN
1
2
IN
OUT
RS-232C
Different sources can be playing in three zones at the
same time or, depending on your needs, the same source
can also be used. The main and sub zones have
independent power (the main zone power can be off
while one (or both) of the sub zones is on) and the sub
zones can be controlled by the remote or front panel
controls. However, you may need to specify the volume
settings in ZONE Audio Setup on page 89.
Making MULTI-ZONE connections
It is possible to make these connections if you have a
separate TV and speakers for your primary (ZONE 2) sub
1
zone, and a separate amplifier (and speakers) for your
secondary (ZONE 3) sub zone. You will also need a
separate amplifier if you are not using the MULTI-ZONE
setup using speaker terminals (ZONE 2) on page 32 for
your primary sub zone. There are two primary sub zone
setups possible with this system. Choose whichever
works best for you.
MULTI-ZONE listening options
The following table shows the signals that can be output
to ZONE 2 and ZONE 3:
Sub Zone
ZONE 2
Input functions available
a
Analog audio signals (AUDIO ZONE 2 OUT).
b
With video signals, the composite video (VIDEO
ZONE 2 OUT) signals can be output.
a,c
ZONE 3
Analog audio signals (AUDIO ZONE 3 OUT).
a.Any analog signal. (This does not apply for the MULTI CH IN input.)
b.JPEG files cannot be played with the USB input.
c.iPod/USB function cannot be selected for ZONE 3.
Note
1 You can’t use sound controls (such as the tone controls or Midnight listening) or any surround modes with a separate amplifier in the sub
zone. You can, however, use the features available with your sub zone amplifier.
31
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting your equipment
03
Basic MULTI-ZONE setup (ZONE 2)
Secondary MULTI-ZONE setup (ZONE 3)
• Connect a separate amplifier to the AUDIO ZONE 3
•
Connect a separate amplifier to the AUDIO ZONE 2
OUT jacks and a TV monitor to the VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT
jack, both on this receiver.
You should have a pair of speakers attached to the sub
zone amplifier as shown in the following illustration.
OUT jacks on this receiver.
You should have a pair of speakers attached to the sub
zone amplifier as shown in the following illustration.
Main zone
Sub zone (ZONE 3)
Main zone
Sub zone (ZONE 2)
BD IN
IN
1
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
1
3
BD IN
IN
1
HDMI
COMPONENT
VIDEO
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
1
3
IN
1
IN
2
COMPONENT
VIDEO
ASSIGNABLE
(
)
L
DVD
(
)
DVR
VIDEO IN
Y
IN
1
IN
2
(
)
L
DVD
(
)
R
R
Y
PB
R
ZONE2 ZONE3
PB
OUT
OUT
P
R
PR
MONITOR
OUT
ZONE2 ZONE3
OUT
OUT
PR
PR
MONITOR
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
Y
VIDEO
MONITOR
OUT
Y
VIDEO
PB
AUDIO IN
R
S-VIDEO
PB
PR
L
AUDIO IN
S-VIDEO
PR
CONTROL
IN
R
L
OUT
RS-232C
CONTROL
IN
OUT
RS-232C
MULTI-ZONE setup using speaker terminals (ZONE 2)
You must select ZONE 2 in Surround back speaker setting
on page 85 to use this setup. Note that the sound in the
sub zone will be temporarily interrupted when controlling
the main zone (for example, changing the input function
or starting playback).
•
Connect a TV monitor to the VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT
jacks on this receiver.
You should have a pair of speakers attached to the
surround back speaker terminals as shown below.
Main zone
Sub zone (ZONE 2)
BD IN
IN
1
IN
OPTICAL
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
OUT
1
3
ANTE
COMPONENT
VIDEO
ASSIGNABLE
IN
1
CENTER
IN
2
AUDIO
(
)
L
DVD
(
)
DVR
L
(
)
Single
Y
Y
VIDEO IN
R
R
PB
PB
SUBWOOFER
OUT
R
I
OUND SURROUND
BACK
ZONE2 ZONE3 SUR
DV
OUT
PR
PR
MONPITORRE OUT
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
Y
VIDEO
D
SURROUND BACK /
B
(
)
Single
L
R
L
PB
S-VIDEO
L
R
PR
CONTROL
IN
OUT
RS-232C
32
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting your equipment
Connecting an IR receiver
03
Operating other Pioneer components
with this unit’s sensor
If you keep your stereo components in a closed cabinet or
shelving unit, or you wish to use the sub zone remote
control in another zone, you can use an optional IR
receiver (such as a Niles or Xantech unit) to control your
system instead of the remote sensor on the front panel of
Many Pioneer components have SR CONTROL jacks
which can be used to link components together so that
you can use just the remote sensor of one component.
When you use a remote control, the control signal is
1
this receiver.
2
passed along the chain to the appropriate component.
1
Connect the IR receiver sensor to the IR IN jack on
the rear of this receiver.
Important
Closet or shelving unit
• Note that if you use this feature, make sure that you
also have at least one set of analog audio, video or
HDMI jacks connected to another component for
grounding purposes.
Non-Pioneer
component
Pioneer
component
1
Decide which component you want to use the
CONTROL
IR
IN
remote sensor of.
IN
OUT
When you want to control any component in the chain,
this is the remote sensor at which you’ll point the
corresponding remote control.
BD IN
IN
1
IN
2
IN
3
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
1
3
COMPONENT
VIDEO
2
Connect the CONTROL OUT jack of that component
ASSIGNABLE
IN
1
IN
2
(
)
L
DVD
(
)
DVR
to the CONTROL IN jack of another Pioneer component.
Use a cable with a mono mini-plug on each end for the
connection.
Y
Y
R
PB
PB
ZONE2 ZONE3
DVD
IN
TV/SAT VIDEO
OUT
OUT
IN
IN
PR
PR
MONITOR
OUT
(
)
DVD
(
)
DVR
Y
Y
MONITOR
OUT
Y
VIDEO
R
PB
PB
PB
ZONE2 ZONE3
DVD
IN
TV/SAT VIDEO
OUT
OUT
IN
IN
S-VIDEO
P
R
P
R
MONITOR
OUT
PR
1
T
MONITOR
OUT
Y
VIDEO
CONTROL
IN
IR
IN
1
2
IN
OUT
OUT
RS-232C
PB
S-VIDEO
PR
1
(
T
CONTROL
IN
IR
IN
1
2
IN
OUT
OUT
RS-232C
IR receiver
2
Connect the IR IN jack of another component to the
IR OUT jack on the rear of this receiver to link it to the
IR receiver.
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
CONTROL
CONTROL
Please see the manual supplied with your IR receiver for
the type of cable necessary for the connection.
• If you want to link a Pioneer component to the IR
receiver, see Operating other Pioneer components
with this unit’s sensor below to connect to the
CONTROL jacks instead of the IR OUT jack.
Continue the chain in the same way for as many
components as you have.
Note
1 • Remote operation may not be possible if direct light from a strong fluorescent lamp is shining on the IR receiver remote sensor window.
• Note that other manufacturers may not use the IR terminology. Refer to the manual that came with your component to check for IR
compatibility.
• If using two remote controls (at the same time), the IR receiver’s remote sensor takes priority over the remote sensor on the front panel.
2 • If you want to control all your components using this receiver’s remote control, see Setting the remote to control other components on
page 67.
• If you have connected a remote control to the CONTROL IN jack (using a mini-plug cable), you won’t be able to control this unit using the
remote sensor.
33
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting your equipment
03
Switching components on and off using
the 12 volt trigger
Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC
output
You can connect components in your system (such as a
screen or projector) to this receiver so that they switch on
or off using 12 volt triggers when you select an input
function. However, you must specify which input
functions switch on the trigger using the The Input Setup
menu on page 40. Note that this will only work with
When using Auto MCACC (page 72) or Acoustic
Calibration EQ Professional (page 77) to calibrate the
reverb characteristics of your listening room, the 3D
graphs of the reverb characteristics in your listening
room (before and after calibration) can be checked on a
computer screen by connecting the receiver to the
computer and using a special application to transfer the
data. The various MCACC parameters can also be
checked on the computer.
1
components that have a standby mode.
(
BD IN
IN
1
IN
2
IN
3
OUT 1 KURO
OUT
HDMI
)
LINK
ASSIGNABLE
1
3
COMPONENT
VIDEO
Use a commercially-available RS-232C cable to connect
the RS-232C jack on your computer to the 9-pin RS-232C
jack on the back panel of this receiver (the cable must be
cross type, female–female).
ASSIGNABLE
IN
1
IN
2
(
)
L
DVD
(
)
DVR
Y
Y
R
PB
PB
ZONE2 ZONE3
DVD
IN
TV/SAT VIDEO
DVR
OUT IN
OUT
OUT
IN
IN
PR
PR
MONITOR
OUT
The software to output the results is available from the
support area of the Pioneer website (http://
MONITOR
OUT
Y
VIDEO
www.pioneer.eu). Instructions for using the software are
also available here. If you have any questions about the
software, please contact the Pioneer Service Center
specified on your warranty card.
P
B
S-VIDEO
PR
12 V TRIGGER
(OUTPUT 12 V
CONTROL
IN
IR
IN
TOTAL 50 mA MAX)
1
2
IN
OUT
OUT
RS-232C
1
2
Please make sure your system meets the following
requirements:
12 V TRIGGER
INPUT
• The computer must be a PC functioning with one of
the following operating systems: Microsoft®
Windows® Vista Home Basic/Home Premium/
Ultimate SP1, Windows® XP Professional/Home
Edition SP3 or Windows® 2000 Professional SP4.
•
Connect the 12 V TRIGGER jack of this receiver to
the 12 V trigger of another component.
Use a cable with a mono mini-plug on each end for the
connection.
• The monitor must have a display resolution of 800 x
600 dots (SVGA) or greater.
• The computer must be equipped with at least one RS-
• The trigger maximum power is DC OUT 12 V/50 mA.
2
232C port.
After you’ve specified the input functions that will switch
on the trigger, you’ll be able to switch the component on
or off just by pressing the input function(s) you’ve set on
page 40.
• System must have internet access.
®
®
®
®
Microsoft , Windows Vista, Windows XP and Windows 2000 are
either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in
the United States and/or other countries.
Note
1 Triggered connections with up to two devices compatible with 12-volt triggers can be made with this receiver.
2 Laptops and other computers not equipped with an RS-232C port can be connected via USB port using a commercially available USB to
RS-232C converter cable (USB to serial converter cable). For instructions on COM port connections and settings, contact the manufacturer
of your computer.
34
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting your equipment
03
•
Connect your computer to the RS-232C jack on the
rear panel of the receiver.
Make sure that the receiver and all connected
components are switched off and disconnected from the
Connecting an HDMI-equipped
component to the front panel input
1
There is an HDMI input terminal on the front panel. High
quality pictures can be viewed via the receiver simply by
connecting an HDMI-equipped video camera with a
single HDMI cable. HDMI-equipped components other
than video cameras can also be connected to this
terminal.
power outlet when you do this.
Use a commercially-available cable to connect the RS-
232C jack on your computer to the 9-pin RS-232C jack on
this receiver. See the documentation provided with the
Advanced MCACC application for more information.
• Push down on the PUSH OPEN tab to access the
front panel input.
(
BD IN
IN
1
IN
2
IN
3
OUT 1 KURO
OUT
HDMI
)
LINK
ASSIGNABLE
1
3
COMPONENT
VIDEO
ASSIGNABLE
• Select this input using INPUT SELECT (remote) or the
INPUT SELECTOR dial (front panel) to select HDMI 4.
IN
1
IN
2
(
)
L
DVD
(
)
DVR
Y
Y
R
PB
PB
ZONE2 ZONE3
DVD
IN
TV/SAT VIDEO
DVR
OUT IN
OUT
OUT
IN
IN
MASTER
VOLUME
PR
PR
MONITOR
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
Y
VIDEO
PB
S-VIDEO
PR
VIDEO CAMERA
12 V TRIGGER
iPod
iPhone
(OUTPUT 12 V
CONTROL
IN
IR
IN
MCACC SETUP MIC
USB
HDMI
4
TOTAL 50 mA MAX)
1
2
IN
OUT
OUT
RS-232C
1
2
This receiver
RS-232C
Personal computer
Video camera, etc.
Note
1 The various parameters and the reverb characteristics data used for display on the computer are not cleared when the power is turned off (see
Output PC on page 81).
35
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting your equipment
Connecting an iPod
03
Connecting a USB device
This receiver has a dedicated iPod terminal that will allow
you to control playback of audio content from your iPod
using the controls of this receiver.
It is possible to playback files using the USB interface on
the front of this receiver.
•
Switch the receiver into standby then connect your
•
Switch the receiver into standby then use the
USB device to the USB terminal on the front panel of
supplied iPod cable to connect your iPod to the iPod/
iPhone/USB terminal on the front panel of this receiver.
• Push down on the PUSH OPEN tab to access the
iPod/iPhone/USB terminal.
this receiver.
• Push down on the PUSH OPEN tab to access the USB
terminal.
• For instructions on playing the USB device, see
• It is also possible to connect using the cable included
with the iPod, but in this case it is not possible to view
pictures via the receiver.
Playing a USB device on page 45.
MASTER
VOLUME
• For the cable connection, refer to also the operating
instructions for iPod.
• For instructions on playing the iPod, see Playing an
iPod on page 43.
VIDEO CAMERA
iPod
iPhone
MCACC SETUP MIC
USB
HDMI
4
MASTER
VOLUME
This receiver
USB mass
storage device
VIDEO CAMERA
iPod
iPhone
MCACC SETUP MIC
USB
HDMI
4
This receiver
iPod cable
(supplied)
MENU
iPod
36
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting your equipment
Plugging in the receiver
03
Only plug in after you have connected all your
components to this receiver, including the speakers.
1
Plug the supplied power cord into the AC IN socket
on the back of the receiver.
2
Plug the other end into a power outlet.1
CAUTION
• Handle the power cord by the plug part. Do not pull
out the plug by tugging the cord, and never touch the
power cord when your hands are wet, as this could
cause a short circuit or electric shock. Do not place
the unit, a piece of furniture, or other object on the
power cord or pinch the cord in any other way. Never
make a knot in the cord or tie it with other cables. The
power cords should be routed so that they are not
likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord can
cause a fire or give you an electric shock. Check the
power cord once in a while. If you find it damaged,
ask your nearest Pioneer authorized independent
service company for a replacement.
• Do not use any power cord other than the one
supplied with this unit.
• Do not use the supplied power cord for any purpose
other than that described below.
• The receiver should be disconnected by removing the
mains plug from the wall socket when not in regular
use, e.g., when on vacation.
• Make sure the blue STANDBY/ON light has gone
out before unplugging.
• If you have connected speakers with a 6 Ω
impedance, change the impedance setting before
turning on the power.
Note
1 After this receiver is connected to an AC outlet, a 2 second to 10 second HDMI initialization process begins. You cannot carry out any
operations during this process. The HDMI indicator in the front panel display blinks during this process, and you can turn on this receiver
once it has stopped blinking. When you set the KURO LINK mode to OFF, you can skip this process. For details about the KURO LINK feature,
see KURO LINK on page 57.
37
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Setup
04
Chapter 4:
Basic Setup
1
Switch on the receiver and your TV.
Use RECEIVER to switch on.
Switching the speaker impedance
RECEIVER
on the remote control, then press
We recommend using speakers of 8 Ω with this system,
but it is possible to switch the impedance setting if you
plan to use speakers with a 6 Ω impedance rating.
2
Press
HOME MENU
.
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your
TV. Use /// and ENTER to navigate through the
screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit
the current menu.
STANDBY/ON
3
Select ‘System Setup’ from the HOME MENU
.
ENTER
PHASE
CONTROL
ADVANC
PQMLCACC
BAND
TUNE
TUNE
S
HDMI
PRESET
PRESET
TUNER EDIT
4
Select ‘OSD Language’ from the System Setup
menu.
INPUT
SELECTOR
AUTO SURR/ALC/
STREAM DIRECT SPEA
MULTI-ZONE
S
K
T
E
E
R
R
S
EO
CONTROL
ON/OFF
4.SystemSetup
A/V RECEIVER
4c.OSD Language
A/V RECEIVER
a.Manual SP Setup
Language
:
English
b. Input Setup
c. OSD Language
d. Other Setup
PHONES
VIDEO CAMERA
iPod
iPhone
MCACC SETUP MIC
USB
HDMI
4
OK
Exit
Return
Exit
Return
1
2
Switch the receiver into standby.
While holding down ENTER on the front panel,
5
Select the desired language.
• English
press STANDBY/ON
The display shows RESET NO .
.
• French
• German
• Italian
• Spanish
• Dutch
Use TUNE +/– (or / on the remote control) to select
SPEAKER 8Ω , and then use PRESET +/– (or /
on the remote control) to select SPEAKER 8Ω or
SPEAKER 6Ω.
• SPEAKER 8Ω – Use this setting if your speakers are
rated at 8 Ω or more.
• Russian
6
Select ‘OK’ to change the language.
• SPEAKER 6Ω – Use this setting if your speakers are
rated at 6 Ω.
4c.OSD Language
A/V RECEIVER
Language
:
English
Changing the OSD display language
(OSD Language)
OK
The language used on the Graphical User Interface
Exit
Return
screen can be changed.
• The explanations in these operating instructions are
for when English is selected for the GUI screen.
The setting is completed and the System Setup menu
reappears automatically.
AUDIO
VIDEO
TV/DTV
AUDIO
MPX
PQLS
PARAMETER
PARAMETER
RECEIVER
SOURCE
LIST
TUNE TOOLS
INFO
DISP
CH
TOP MENU
BAND
T.EDIT
GUIDE
DVD
TV
BD
CD
DVR
HDMI
RECEIVER
TV CTRL
PRESET
ENTER
TUNE
PRESET
RETURN
CD-R
VIDEO
REMOTE
SETUP
PTY
SEARCH
iPod USB TUNER INPUT SELECT
HOME
MENU
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
MAIN
iPod CTRL
38
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Setup
04
Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers
and the microphone.
Automatically setting up for surround
sound (Auto MCACC)
MASTER
VOLUME
The Auto MCACC Setup measures the acoustic
characteristics of your listening area, taking into account
ambient noise, speaker connection and speaker size, and
tests for both channel delay and channel level. After you
have set up the microphone provided with your system,
the receiver uses the information from a series of test
tones to optimize the speaker settings and equalization
for your particular room.
VIDEO CAMERA
iPod
iPhone
MCACC SETUP MIC
USB
HDMI
4
Make sure you do this before moving on to Playing a
source on page 42.
If you have a tripod, use it to place the microphone so that
it’s about ear level at your normal listening position. If you
do not have a tripod, use some other object to install the
Important
• Make sure the microphone and speakers are not
moved during the Auto MCACC Setup.
1
microphone.
• Using the Auto MCACC Setup will overwrite any
existing settings for the MCACC preset you select.
The Full Auto MCACC display appears once the
microphone is connected.
2
• Before using the Auto MCACC Setup, the
headphones should be disconnected and the iPod/
USB function should not be selected as an input
function.
1a.Full Auto MCACC
A/V RECEIVER
Surr Back System
:
Normal
Save SYMMETRY to : M1.MEMORY 1
START
CAUTION
Exit
Return
• The test tones used in the Auto MCACC Setup are
output at high volume.
3
Select Surr Back System setting,3 select an MCACC
preset4, press and then select START 5
AUDIO
PARAMETER
VIDEO
TV/DTV
AUDIO
MPX
PQLS
.
RECEIVER
PARAMETER
RECEIVER
SOURCE
LIST
TUNE TOOLS
Select Normal (Surround back), Speaker B, Front Bi-
Amp or ZONE 2 for the Surr Back System setting
according to connections to the surround back speaker
terminals.
INFO
DISP
CH
TOP MENU
BAND
T.EDIT
GUIDE
DVD
TV
BD
CD
DVR
HDMI
RECEIVER
TV CTRL
PRESET
ENTER
TUNE
PRESET
RETURN
CD-R
VIDEO
REMOTE
SETUP
PTY
SEARCH
iPod USB TUNER INPUT SELECT
HOME
MENU
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
MAIN
iPod CTRL
4
Follow the instructions on-screen.
Make sure the microphone is connected, and if you’re
using a subwoofer, make sure it is switched on and set to
a comfortable volume level.
1
Switch on the receiver and your TV.
Use RECEIVER to switch on.
2
Connect the microphone to the MCACC SETUP MIC
jack on the front panel.
• Push down on the PUSH OPEN tab to access the
MCACC SETUP MIC jack.
Note
1 It may not be possible to measure correctly if the microphone is placed on a table, sofa, etc.
2 • You can’t use the HOME MENU when the iPod/USB input function is selected (in either the main or sub zone). When you set ZONE 2, ZONE
3 or ZONE 2&3 to ON (page 63), you can’t use the HOME MENU.
• If you leave the GUI screen for over five minutes, the screen saver will appear.
3 • If you are planning on bi-amping your front speakers, or setting up a separate speaker system in another room, read through Surround back
speaker setting on page 85 and make sure to connect your speakers as necessary before continuing to step 4.
• If you have THX-certified speakers, select Return, then select Auto MCACC for the THX Speaker setting. See Automatic MCACC (Expert) on
page 72 for more on this.
4 The six MCACC presets are used for storing surround sound settings for different listening positions. Simply choose an unused preset for now
(you can rename it later in Data Management on page 82).
5 Note that correction curves are saved only when set to SYMMETRY. Select Return, then select Auto MCACC to save other correction curves
(such as ALL CH ADJ and FRONT ALIGN). See Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 72 for more on this.
39
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Setup
04
5
Wait for the test tones to finish, then confirm the
6
Make sure ‘OK’ is selected, then press ENTER.
speaker configuration in the GUI screen.
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the
receiver outputs test tones to determine the speakers
present in your setup. Try to be as quiet as possible while
receiver outputs more test tones to determine the
optimum receiver settings for Channel Level, Speaker
Distance, Standing Wave and Acoustic Cal EQ.
1
it’s doing this.
Again, try to be as quiet as possible while this is
If no operations are performed for 10 seconds while the
speaker configuration check screen is being displayed,
the Auto MCACC Setup will resume automatically. In this
case, you don’t need to select ‘OK’ and press ENTER in
step 6.
happening. It may take 3 to 10 minutes.
7
The Auto MCACC Setup procedure is completed and
the Home Menu menu reappears automatically.3
Be sure to disconnect the microphone from this receiver
upon completion of the Auto MCACC Setup.
• With error messages (such as Too much ambient
noise! or Check microphone.) select RETRY after
checking for ambient noise (see Problems when
using the Auto MCACC Setup below) and verifying the
mic connection. If there doesn’t seem to be a
problem, you can simply select GO NEXT and
continue.
The settings made in the Auto MCACC Setup should give
you excellent surround sound from your system, but it is
also possible to adjust these settings manually using The
Advanced MCACC menu on page 71 or The system and
4
the other setup on page 84.
Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup
If the room environment is not optimal for the Auto
MCACC Setup (too much background noise, echo off the
walls, obstacles blocking the speakers from the
microphone) the final settings may be incorrect. Check
for household appliances (air conditioner, fridge, fan,
etc.), that may be affecting the environment and switch
them off if necessary. If there are any instructions
showing in the front panel display, please follow them.
1a.Full Auto MCACC
1a.Full Auto MCACC
A/V RECEIVER
A/V RECEIVER
Now Analyzing...
2/10
L
C
R
SR
SBR
SBL
SL
SW
10
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
Environment Check
Ambient Noise
Microphone
:
:
:
OK
Speaker YES/NO
OK
RETRY
Exit
Cancel
Exit
Cancel
The configuration shown on-screen should reflect the
actual speakers you have.
• Some older TVs may interfere with the operation of
the microphone. If this seems to be happening,
switch off the TV when doing the Auto MCACC Setup.
• If you see an ERR message (or the speaker
configuration displayed isn’t correct), there may be a
problem with the speaker connection.
If selecting RETRY doesn’t work, turn off the power
and check the speaker connections. If there doesn’t
seem to be a problem, you can simply use / to
select the speaker and / to change the setting
and continue.
The Input Setup menu
You only need to make settings in the Input Setup menu
if you didn’t hook up your digital equipment according to
the default settings (see Input function default and
possible settings on page 41). In this case, you need to
tell the receiver what equipment is hooked up to which
terminal so the buttons on the remote control
• If Reverse Phase is displayed, the speaker’s wiring
(+ and –) may be inverted. Check the speaker
2
connections.
correspond to the components you’ve connected.
– If the connections were wrong, turn off the power,
disconnect the power cord, then reconnect properly.
After this, perform the Full Auto MCACC procedure
again.
– If the connections were right, select GO NEXT and
continue.
AUDIO
PARAMETER
VIDEO
TV/DTV
AUDIO
MPX
PQLS
PARAMETER
RECEIVER
SOURCE
LIST
TUNE TOOLS
INFO
DISP
CH
TOP MENU
BAND
T.EDIT
GUIDE
DVD
TV
BD
CD
DVR
HDMI
RECEIVER
TV CTRL
PRESET
ENTER
TUNE
PRESET
RETURN
CD-R
VIDEO
REMOTE
SETUP
PTY
SEARCH
iPod USB TUNER INPUT SELECT
HOME
MENU
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
MAIN
iPod CTRL
Note
1 Do not adjust the volume during the test tones. This may result in incorrect speaker settings.
2 If the speaker is not pointed to the microphone (listening position) or when using speakers that affect the phase (dipole speakers, reflective
speakers, etc.), Reverse Phase may be displayed even if the speakers are properly connected.
3 You can also choose to view the settings from the MCACC Data Check screen. See Checking MCACC Data on page 80 for more on this.
4 • Depending on the characteristics of your room, sometimes identical speakers with cone sizes of around 12 cm will end up with different size
settings. You can correct the setting manually using the Manual speaker setup on page 84.
• The subwoofer distance setting may be farther than the actual distance from the listening position. This setting should be accurate (taking
delay and room characteristics into account) and generally does not need to be changed.
• If Auto MCACC Setup measurement results are incorrect due to the interaction of the speakers and viewing environment, we recommend
adjusting the settings manually.
40
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Setup
04
1
Switch on the receiver and your TV.
• 12V Trigger1/2 – After connecting a component to
one of the 12 volt triggers (see Switching components
on and off using the 12 volt trigger on page 34), select
MAIN, ZONE 2, ZONE 3 or OFF for the corresponding
trigger setting to switch it on automatically along
with the (main or sub) zone specified.
Use RECEIVER to switch on.
RECEIVER
on the remote control, then press
2
Press
HOME MENU
.
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your
TV. Use /// and ENTER to navigate through the
screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to
confirm and exit the current menu.
4b.Input Setup
A/V RECEIVER
INPUT
Input Name
Input Skip
:
:
:
DVD
Rename
OFF
3
4
Select ‘System Setup’ from the HOME MENU
.
Digital In
:
:
:
:
:
COAX-1
---
Comp-1
OFF
HDMI Input
Component In
12V Trigger1
12V Trigger2
Select ‘Input Setup’ from the System Setup menu.
OFF
4.SystemSetup
A/V RECEIVER
4b.Input Setup
A/V RECEIVER
Exit
Finish
a.Manual SP Setup
INPUT
Input Name
Input Skip
:
:
:
DVD
Rename
OFF
b. Input Setup
c. OSD Language
d. Other Setup
8
When you’re finished, press RETURN.
Digital In
:
:
:
:
:
COAX-1
---
Comp-1
OFF
HDMI Input
Component In
12V Trigger1
12V Trigger2
You will return to the System Setup menu.
OFF
Input function default and possible settings
The terminals on the receiver generally correspond to the
name of one of the input functions. If you have connected
components to this receiver differently from (or in
addition to) the defaults below, see The Input Setup menu
on page 40 to tell the receiver how you’ve connected up.
The dots () indicate possible assignments.
Exit
Return
Exit
Finish
5
Select the input function that you want to set up.
The default names correspond with the names next to the
terminals on the rear panel (such as DVD or VIDEO)
which, in turn, correspond with the names on the remote
control.
Input Terminals
Input
6
Select the input(s) to which you’ve connected your
component.
function
Digital
HDMI
Component
IN 1
a
DVD
COAX-1
For example, if your DVD player only has an optical
output, you will need to change the DVD input function’s
Digital In setting from COAX-1 (default) to the optical
input you’ve connected it to. The numbering (OPT-1 to 3)
corresponds with the numbers beside the inputs on the
back of the receiver.
b
BD
(BD)
a
TV/SAT
DVR
OPT-1
OPT-2
OPT-3
IN 2
a
a
VIDEO
HDMI 1
HDMI 2
HDMI 3
HDMI 4
• If your component is connected via a component
video cable to an input terminal other than the
default, you must tell the receiver which input
terminal your component is connected to, or else you
may see the S-Video or composite video signals
(HDMI-1)
(HDMI-2)
(HDMI-3)
b
(HDMI-4)
1
instead of the component video signals.
iPod/USB
CD
7
When you’re finished, proceed to the settings for
other inputs.
There are three optional settings in addition to the
assignment of the input jacks:
COAX-2
CD-R/TAPE
TUNER
a
• Input Name – You can choose to rename the input
function for easier identification. Select Rename to
do so, or Default to return to the system default.
MULTI CH IN
a.With KURO LINK set to ON, assignments cannot be made (see
KURO LINK on page 57).
b.This assignment is fixed and cannot be changed.
• Input Skip – When set to ON, that input is skipped
when selecting the input using INPUT SELECT. (DVD
and other inputs can be still be selected directly with
the input function buttons.)
Note
1 For high-definition video (using component video connections), or when digital video conversion is switched off (in Setting the Video options
on page 61), you must connect your TV to this receiver using the same type of video cable as you used to connect your video component.
41
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic playback
05
Chapter 5:
Basic playback
When using a surround back speaker, 2D+PLIIx
MOVIE is displayed when playing Dolby Digital signals,
and DTS+Neo:6 is displayed when playing DTS 5.1-
channel signals.
Playing a source
Here are the basic instructions for playing a source (such
as a DVD disc) with your home theater system.
When not using a surround back speaker, DOLBY
DIGITAL is displayed when playing Dolby Digital signals.
AUTO/ALC/
DIRECT
MENU
STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR
RECEIVER
SOURCE
HDD
DVD
If the display does not correspond to the input signal and
THX
PHASE CTRL
STATUS
listening mode, check the connections and settings.
DVD
TV
BD
CD
DVR
HDMI
TV/DTV
AUDIO
MPX
PQLS
CD-R
VIDEO
4
Use the volume control to adjust the volume level.
INFO
DISP
CH
Turn down the volume of your TV so that all sound is
coming from the speakers connected to this receiver.
iPod USB TUNER INPUT SELECT
RECEIVER
TV CTRL
HDMI OUT
REMOTE
SETUP
Playing a source with HDMI connection
1
Switch on your system components and receiver.
Start by switching on the playback component (for
example a DVD player), your TV and subwoofer (if you
•
Use INPUT SELECT to select the HDMI input you’ve
1
connected to (for example, HDMI 1).
have one), then the receiver (press RECEIVER).
You can also perform the same operation by using the
INPUT SELECTOR dial on the front panel or by pressing
HDMI on the remote control repeatedly.
• Make sure the setup microphone is disconnected.
2
Select the input function you want to play.
• Set the HDMI parameter in Setting the Audio options
on page 60 to THROUGH if you want to hear HDMI
audio output from your TV or flat screen TV (no sound
will be heard from this receiver).
You can use the input function buttons on the remote
control, INPUT SELECT, or the front panel INPUT
2
SELECTOR dial.
3
Press RECEIVER , then press AUTO/ALC/DIRECT
• If the video signal does not appear on your TV or flat
screen TV, try adjusting the resolution settings on
your component or display. Note that some
components (such as video game units) have
resolutions that may not be converted. In this case,
use an analog video connection.
(
AUTO SURR/ALC/STREAM DIRECT) to select ‘AUTO
SURROUND’ and start playback of the source.3
If you’re playing a Dolby Digital or DTS surround sound
DVD disc, you should hear surround sound. If you are
playing a stereo source, you will only hear sound from the
front left/right speakers in the default listening mode.
• You can’t hear HDMI audio through this receiver’s
digital out jack.
• See also Listening to your system on page 50 for
information on different ways of listening to sources.
It is possible to check on the front panel display whether
or not multi-channel playback is being performed
properly.
Note
1 Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this receiver (for example, if you connected this receiver to the VIDEO jacks on your TV, make sure
that the VIDEO input is now selected).
2 If you need to manually switch the input signal type press SIGNAL SEL (page 55).
3 • You may need to check the digital audio output settings on your DVD player or digital satellite receiver. It should be set to output Dolby
Digital, DTS and 88.2 kHz / 96 kHz PCM (2 channel) audio, and if there is an MPEG audio option, set this to convert the MPEG audio to PCM.
• Depending on your DVD player or source discs, you may only get digital 2 channel stereo and analog sound. In this case, the receiver must be
set to a multichannel listening mode (see Listening in surround sound on page 50 if you need to do this) if you want multichannel surround
sound.
42
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic playback
05
• Main Zone:
Selecting the multichannel analog inputs
If you have connected a decoder or a DVD player as
above, you must select the analog multichannel inputs
iPod
A/V RECEIVER
Playlists
Artists
Albums
Songs
1
for surround sound playback.
Podcasts
Genres
Composers
Audiobooks
1 / 9
1
Make sure you have set the playback source to the
proper output setting.
For example, you might need to set your DVD player to
output multichannel analog audio.
iPod CTRL
• Sub Zone:
2
Use INPUT SELECT to select MULTI CH IN.
You can also use the INPUT SELECTOR dial on the front
iPod
panel.
[
[
Playlists
Artists
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
• Depending on the DVD player you’re using, the
analog output level of the subwoofer channel may be
too low. In this case, the output level of the subwoofer
can be increased by 10 dB in the Multi Ch In Setup
in Other Setup. For details, see Multi Channel Input
Setup on page 89.
[ Albums
[
[
[
[
[
Songs
Podcasts
Genres
Composers
Audiobooks
1/9
Playing back audio files stored on an iPod
To navigate songs on your iPod, you can take advantage
of the GUI screen of your TV connected to this receiver.
You can also control all operations for music in the front
4
Playing an iPod
panel display of this receiver.
This receiver has a dedicated iPod terminal that will allow
you to control playback of audio content from your iPod
using the controls of this receiver.
Finding what you want to play
2
When your iPod is connected to this receiver, you can
browse songs stored on your iPod by playlist, artist name,
album name, song name, genre or composer, similar to
using your iPod directly.
1
Switch on the receiver and your TV.
See Connecting an iPod on page 36.
• It is also possible to operate the iPod on the iPod
itself, without using the TV screen. For details, see
Switching the iPod controls on page 44.
1
Use / to select a category, then press ENTER to
browse that category.
• To return to the previous level any time, press
RETURN.
2
Press iPod USB on the remote control to switch the
receiver to the iPod/USB
.
Loading appears in the GUI screen while the receiver
verifies the connection and retrieves data from the iPod.
2
Use / to browse the selected category (e.g.,
albums).
When the display shows iPod top menu you’re ready to
play music from the iPod.
• Use / to move to previous/next levels.
3
Note
1 • When playback from the multichannel inputs is selected, only the volume and channel levels can be set.
• You can’t listen to your speaker B system during playback from the multichannel inputs.
• With MULTI CH IN inputs, it is possible to play pictures simultaneously. For details, see Multi Channel Input Setup on page 89.
2 • This system is compatible with the audio and video of the iPod nano, iPod fifth generation (audio only), iPod classic, iPod touch and iPhone.
However, some of the functions may be restricted for some models. The system is not compatible with the iPod shuffle.
•
Compatibility may vary depending on the software version of your iPod and iPhone. Please be sure to use the latest available software
version.
• iPod and iPhone are licensed for reproduction of non-copyrighted materials or materials the user is legally permitted to reproduce.
• Features such as the equalizer cannot be controlled using this receiver, and we recommend switching the equalizer off before connecting.
• Pioneer cannot under any circumstances accept responsibility for any direct or indirect loss arising from any inconvenience or loss of
recorded material resulting from the iPod failure.
• When listening to a track on the iPod in the main zone, it is possible to control the sub zone, but not to listen to a different track in the sub
zone from the one playing in the main zone.
3 The controls of your iPod will be inoperable when connected to this receiver.
4 • Note that characters that cannot be displayed on this receiver are displayed as #.
• This feature is not available for photos or video clips on your iPod. To display video clips, switch iPod operation to the iPod (see Switching
the iPod controls on page 44).
43
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic playback
05
3
Continue browsing until you arrive at what you
Basic playback controls
want to play, then press
to start playback.1
The following table shows the basic playback controls for
your iPod. Press iPod USB to switch the remote control
to the iPod/USB operation mode.
• Main Zone:
Track number
Track title
Button
What it does
Track Title
Top Menu
PLAY
3:02
-2:02
Play mode
Artist name
Press to start playback.
Shuffle On
Artist Name
Album Title
xxxx/xxxx
If you start playback when something other than a
song is selected, all the songs that fall into that
category will play.
Album title
iPod
Now Playing
Genre : xxxxxxxxxxx
Chapter Number : xxx/xxx
Playing time
File information
List
Pauses/unpauses playback.
/
/
Press and hold during playback to start scanning.
Press to skip to previous/next track.
iPod CTRL
• Sub Zone:
Press repeatedly to switch between Repeat One
,
Repeat All and Repeat Off
.
Track number
Play
xxxx/xxxx
Chapxxx/xxx
File information
Track title
Press repeatedly to switch between Shuffle
Songs, Shuffle Albums and Shuffle Off.
Track Title
Shuffle On
-2:02
Play mode
Playing time
DISP
Press repeatedly to change the song playback
information displayed in the front panel display.
3:02
Artist Name
Album Title
Artist name
Album title
ENTER
When browsing, press to move to next levels.
During playback, press to set the play and pause
modes.
Navigation through categories on your iPod looks like this:
RETURN
When browsing, press to move to previous levels.
Playlists Songs
Artists Albums Songs
Albums Songs
/
When browsing, press to move to previous/next
levels.
Songs
/
During Audiobook playback, press to switch the
playback speed: Faster Normal Slower
Podcasts
Genres Artists Albums Songs
Composers Albums Songs
Audiobooks
TOP MENU
Press to return to the iPod top menu screen.
2
Shuffle Songs
Switching the iPod controls
You can switch over the iPod controls between the iPod
and the receiver.
Tip
1
Press iPod CTRL to switch the iPod controls.3
• You can play all of the songs in a particular category
by selecting the All item at the top of each category
list. For example, you can play all the songs by a
particular artist.
This enables operation and display on your iPod, and this
receiver’s remote control and GUI screen become
inactive.
2
Press iPod CTRL again to switch back to the receiver
controls.
Note
1 If you’re in the song category, you can also press ENTER to start playback.
2 You cannot use this function, when an iPod of fifth generation or iPod nano of first generation is connected.
3 When this function is set, iPod images cannot be played on this receiver. However, when video clips recorded on the iPod are played, the
playback picture is displayed.
44
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic playback
05
Playing back audio files stored on a USB
memory device
Playing a USB device
1
The maximum number of levels that you can select in
Step 2 (below) is 8. Also, you can display and play back
up to 30 000 folders and files within a USB memory
It is possible to playback files using the USB interface on
the front of this receiver.
4
1
Switch on the receiver and your TV.
device.
2
See Connecting a USB device on page 36.
1
Use / to select ‘Music’ from the USB Top menu.
2
Press iPod USB on the remote control to switch the
USB Top
A/V RECEIVER
Music
A/V RECEIVER
Top Menu
receiver to the iPod/USB
.
Music
Photos
Slideshow Setup
Folder1
Loading appears in the GUI screen as this receiver starts
recognizing the USB device connected. When the
display shows USB Top menu you’re ready to playback
from the USB device.
Folder2
Folder3
Music1
Music2
Music3
Music4
Music5
1 / 9
3
1 / 3
• Main Zone:
Return
USB Top
A/V RECEIVER
2
Use / to select a folder, then press ENTER to
Music
Photos
browse that folder.
Slideshow Setup
• To return to the previous level any time, press
RETURN.
1 / 3
3
Continue browsing until you arrive at what you
want to play, then press
to start playback.
• Main Zone:
• Sub Zone:
Track number
USB Top
[ Music
[ Photos
[ Slideshow Setup
]
]
]
Track title or File name
Playing time
Track Title
Top Menu
PLAY
Play mode
3:02
-2:02
Random On
xxxx/xxxx
Artist Name
Album Title
Artist name
1/3
Album title or Folder
name
USB
Important
Now Playing
Genre : xxxxxxxxxxx
Format : xxxxxxxxxxx
Bit Rate : xxxxxxxxxxx
If an Over Current message lights in the display, the
power requirements of the USB device are too high for
this receiver. Try following the points below:
File information
Return
• Switch the receiver off, then on again.
• Reconnect the USB device with the receiver switched
off.
• Use a dedicated AC adapter (supplied with the
device) for USB power.
If this doesn’t remedy the problem, it is likely your USB
device is incompatible.
Note
1 • Compatible USB devices include external magnetic hard drives, portable flash memory (particularly keydrives) and digital audio players
(MP3 players) of format FAT16/32. It is not possible to connect this unit to a personal computer for USB playback.
• Pioneer cannot guarantee compatibility (operation and/or bus power) with all USB mass storage devices and assumes no responsibility for
any loss of data that may occur when connected to this receiver.
2 Make sure the receiver is in standby when disconnecting the USB device.
3 • If the file selected cannot be played back, this receiver automatically skips to the next file playable.
• When the file currently being played back has no title assigned to it, the file name is displayed in the GUI screen instead; when neither the
album name nor the artist name is present, the row is displayed as a blank space.
• Note that non-roman characters in the playlist are displayed as #.
• If this error occurs, playback is interrupted and the next playable file is played automatically.
• This error may occur if the title information is changed on a computer, etc.
4 • Playback stops when the last song in a USB memory device is played back to the end.
• When a USB memory device with a large capacity is connected, it may take some time to read all the contents.
• This receiver does not support a USB hub.
• Copyrighted audio files cannot be played back on this receiver.
• DRM-protected audio files cannot be played back on this receiver.
45
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic playback
05
• Sub Zone:
2
Use / to select a folder, then press ENTER to
browse that folder.
Track title or File name
• To return to the previous level any time, press RETURN.
Play
3:02
xxxx/xxxx
Track number
3
Continue browsing until you arrive at what you
want to play, then press
The selected content is displayed in full screen and starts
a slideshow.
to start playback.2
Track Title
Play mode
Random On
-2:02
Playing time
Artist name
Artist Name
Album Title
After a slideshow launches, pressing ENTER toggles
between play and pause.
Album title or Folder
name
Basic playback controls
Basic playback controls
Button(s) Function
The following table shows the basic playback controls for
your USB memory device. Press iPod USB to switch the
remote control to the iPod/USB operation mode.
ENTER, Starts displaying a photo and playing a slideshow.
RETURN
,
Stops the Player and returns to the previous menu.
Displays the previous photo content
Display the next photo content
Button
What it does
Press to start playback.
Pauses/unpauses the slideshow
Pauses/unpauses playback.
Press and hold during playback to start scanning.
Press to skip to previous/next track.
/
/
Slideshow Setup
Make the various settings for playing slideshows of photo
files here.
Press repeatedly to switch between Repeat One
Repeat Folder Repeat All and Repeat Off
,
,
.
1
Use / to select ‘Slideshow Setup’ from the USB
Press repeatedly to switch between Random On
and Random Off.
Top menu.
USB Top
Slideshow Setup
A/V RECEIVER
Top Menu
DISP
Press repeatedly to change the song playback
information displayed in the front panel display.
A/V RECEIVER
Music
Photos
Theme
Interval
BGM
Music Select
Folder1
:
:
:
:
Normal(OFF)
5 sec
ON
Select
Slideshow Setup
ENTER
When browsing, press to move to next levels.
During playback, press to set the play and pause
modes.
1 / 3
RETURN
When browsing, press to move to previous levels.
Return
Return
/
When browsing, press to move to previous/next
levels.
2
Select the setting you want.
• Theme – Add various effects to the slideshow.
TOP MENU Press to return to the USB Top menu.
• Interval – Set the interval for switching the photos.
This may not be available depending on the Theme
setting.
Playing back photo files stored on a USB
memory device
1
• BGM – Play music files stored on the USB device
while displaying photos.
1
Use / to select ‘Photos’ from the USB Top
menu.
• Music Select – Select the folder containing the
music files to be played when BGM is set to ON.
USB Top
A/V RECEIVER
Music
Photos
Slideshow Setup
3
When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the USB Top menu.
1 / 3
Note
1 Photo files cannot be played in the sub zone.
2 If the slideshow is left in the pause mode for five minutes, the list screen reappears.
46
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic playback
05
About playable file formats
The USB function of this receiver supports the following file formats. Note that some file formats are not available for playback
although they are listed as playable file formats.
Music files
Category Extension Stream
a
.mp3
MPEG-1, 2, 2.5 Audio Layer-3
Sampling frequency
Quantization bitrate
Channel
8 kHz to 48 kHz
16 bit
MP3
2 ch
Bitrate
8 kbps to 320 kbps
Supported/Supported
32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz
8 bit, 16 bit
VBR/CBR
WAV
.wav
LPCM
Sampling frequency
Quantization bitrate
Channel
2 ch, Monaural
8 kHz to 48 kHz
16 bit
b
WMA
.wma
Sampling frequency
Quantization bitrate
Channel
WMA8/9
2 ch
Bitrate
8 kbps to 320 kbps
Supported/Supported
VBR/CBR
a.“MPEG Layer-3 audio decoding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson multimedia.”
b.Files encoded using Windows Media Codec 9 may be playable but some parts of the specification are not supported; specifically, Pro, Lossless,
Voice.
Photo files
Category Extension
JPEG
.jpg
.jpeg
.jpe
.jif
Format
Meeting the following conditions:
• Baseline JPEG format (including files recorded in Exif/DCF format)
• Y:Cb:Cr - 4:4:4, 4:2:2 or 4:2:0
Resolution
30 to 8192 pixels vertical, 40 to 8192 pixels horizontal
.jfif
47
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic playback
05
1
2
Press TUNER to select the tuner.
Listening to the radio
Use BAND to change the band (FM or AM), if
The following steps show you how to tune in to FM and
AM radio broadcasts using the automatic (search) and
manual (step) tuning functions. If you already know the
frequency of the station you want, see Tuning directly to a
station below. Once you are tuned to a station you can
memorize the frequency for recall later—see Saving
station presets below for more on how to do this.
necessary.
Each press switches the band between FM and AM.
3
Press D.ACCESS (Direct Access).
4
Use the number buttons to enter the frequency of
the radio station.
For example, to tune to 106.00 (FM), press 1, 0, 6, 0, 0.
AUDIO
VIDEO
AUTO/ALC/
DIRECT
MENU
iPod USB TUNER INPUT SELECT
If you make a mistake halfway through, press D.ACCESS
twice to cancel the frequency and start over.
PARAMETER
PARAMETER
STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR
LIST
TUNE TOOLS
HDD
DVD
HDMI OUT
TOP MENU
BAND
T.EDIT
GUIDE
THX
PHASE CTRL
STATUS
1
2
3
SIGNAL SEL MCACC
SLEEP
TV/DTV
AUDIO
MPX
PQLS
PRESET
ENTER
TUNE
PRESET
RETURN
Saving station presets
4
5
6
PTY
SEARCH
SBch
A.ATT
DIMMER
INFO
DISP
CH
If you often listen to a particular radio station, it’s
convenient to have the receiver store the frequency for
easy recall whenever you want to listen to that station.
This saves the effort of manually tuning in each time. This
receiver can memorize up to 63 stations, stored in seven
banks, or classes (A to G) of 9 stations each. When saving
an FM frequency, the MPX setting (see above) is also
stored.
7
8
9
HOME
MENU
D.ACCESS CH LEVEL
CLASS
RECEIVER
TV CTRL
iPod CTRL
ENTER
0
1
2
Press TUNER to select the tuner.
Use BAND to change the band (FM or AM), if
necessary.
Each press switches the band between FM and AM.
3
Tune to a station.
1
Tune to a station you want to memorize.
There are three ways to do this:
See Listening to the radio above for more on this.
Automatic tuning – To search for stations in the
currently selected band, press and hold TUNE /
for about a second. The receiver will start searching
for the next station, stopping when it has found one.
Repeat to search for other stations.
2
Press T.EDIT TUNER EDIT).
(
The display shows PRESET MEMORY, then a blinking
memory class.
3
Press CLASS to select one of the seven classes, then
press PRESET / to select the station preset you
want.
You can also use the number buttons to select a station
preset.
Manual tuning – To change the frequency one step
at a time, press TUNE /.
High speed tuning – Press and hold TUNE / for
high speed tuning. Release the button at the
frequency you want.
4
Press ENTER.
After pressing ENTER, the preset class and number stop
blinking and the receiver stores the station.
Improving FM sound
If the TUNED or STEREO indicator doesn’t light when
tuning to an FM station because the signal is weak, press
MPX to switch the receiver into mono reception mode.
This should improve the sound quality and allow you to
enjoy the broadcast.
Naming station presets
For easier identification, you can name your station
presets.
1
Choose the station preset you want to name.
Using Neural THX
See Listening to station presets below for how to do this.
®
This feature uses Neural Surround™, THX technologies
2
Press T.EDIT TUNER EDIT).
(
to achieve optimal surround sound from FM radio.
The display shows PRESET NAME, then a blinking cursor
at the first character position.
• While listening to FM radio, press AUTO/ALC/
DIRECT for Neural THX listening.
3
Input the name you want.
See About Neural – THX Surround on page 103 for more
on this.
Choose from the following characters for a name up to
eight characters long.
The Neural THX mode can be selected also with
STANDARD.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
0123456789
Tuning directly to a station
Sometimes, you’ll already know the frequency of the
station you want to listen to. In this case, you can simply
enter the frequency directly using the number buttons on
the remote control.
!”#$%&’()∗+,–./:;<=>?@[ \ ]^_{|} ˜ [space]
Use / to select a character, / to set the position,
and ENTER to confirm your selection.
48
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic playback
05
TRAVEL – Holiday-type travel
rather than traffic
NATION M – Popular music in a
language other than English
Tip
announcements
LEISURE – Leisure interests and ’50s and ’60s
hobbies
JAZZ – Jazz
OLDIES – Popular music from the
• To erase a station name, simply repeat steps 1 to 3
and input eight spaces instead of a name.
FOLK M – Folk music
DOCUMENT – Documentary
• Once you have named a station preset, you can press
DISP when listening to a station to switch the display
between name and frequency.
COUNTRY – Country music
Searching for RDS programs
One of the most useful features of RDS is the ability to
search for a particular kind of radio program. You can
search for any of the program types listed above.
Listening to station presets
You will need to have some presets stored to do this. See
Saving station presets on page 48 if you haven’t done this
already.
1
Press TUNER to select the FM band.2
1
Press TUNER to select the tuner.
2
Press PTY SEARCH
.
PTY SEARCH shows in the display.
2
Press CLASS to select the class in which the station
is stored.
3
Press PRESET / to select the program type you
Press repeatedly to cycle through classes A to G.
want to hear.
3
Press PRESET / to select the station preset you
want.
• You can also use the number buttons on the remote
4
Press ENTER to search for the program type.
The system starts searching through all frequency for a
match. When it finds one, the search stops and the
station plays for five seconds.
control to recall the station preset.
5
If you want to keep listening to the station, press
An introduction to RDS
ENTER within the five seconds.
If you don’t press ENTER, searching resumes.
Radio Data System (RDS) is a system used by most FM
radio stations to provide listeners with various kinds of
information—the name of the station and the kind of
show they’re broadcasting, for example.
If NO PTY is displayed it means the tuner couldn’t find
that program type at the time of the search.
3
One feature of RDS is that you can search by type of
program. For example, you can search for a station that’s
broadcasting a show with the program type, JAZZ.
Displaying RDS information
Use the DISP button to display the different types of RDS
4
information available.
1
You can search the following program types:
•
Press DISP for RDS information.
NEWS – News
EASY M – Easy listening
LIGHT M – ‘Light’ classical music
CLASSICS – ‘Serious’ classical
music
Each press changes the display as follows:
AFFAIRS – Current Affairs
INFO – General Information
SPORT – Sport
• Radio Text (RT) – Messages sent by the radio station.
For example, a talk radio station may provide a phone
number as RT.
EDUCATE – Educational
DRAMA – Radio plays, etc.
OTHER M – Music not fitting
above categories
• Program Service Name (PS) – The name of the radio
CULTURE – National or regional WEATHER – Weather reports
culture, theater, etc.
SCIENCE – Science and
technology
FINANCE – Stock market reports,
commerce, trading, etc.
CHILDREN – Programs for
children
station.
• Program Type (PTY) – This indicates the kind of
program currently being broadcast.
VARIED – Usually talk-based
material, such as quiz shows or SOCIAL – Social affairs
• Current tuner frequency.
interviews.
POP M – Pop music
ROCK M – Rock music
RELIGION – Programs
concerning religion
PHONE IN – Public expressing
their views by phone
Note
1 In addition, there are two other program types, TEST and NONE. You can’t search for these.
2 RDS is only possible in the FM band.
3 RDS searches all frequency. If the program type could not be found among all frequency, NO PTY is displayed.
4 • If any noise is picked up while displaying the RT scroll, some characters may be displayed incorrectly.
• If you see NO RT DATA in the RT display, it means no RT data is sent from the broadcast station.
• If you see NO PS DATA in the PS display, it means no PS data can be received.
• If you see NO PTY DATA in the PTY display, it means no PTY data can be received.
49
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to your system
06
Chapter 6:
Listening to your system
Important
Listening in surround sound
• The listening modes and many features described in
this section may not be available depending on the
current source, settings and status of the receiver.
Using this receiver, you can listen to any source in
surround sound. However, the options available will
depend on your speaker setup and the type of source
you’re listening to.
If you connected surround back speakers, see also Using
surround back channel processing on page 53.
Auto playback
There are many ways to listen back to sources using this
receiver, but for the simplest, most direct listening option
is the Auto Surround feature. The receiver automatically
detects what kind of source you’re playing and selects
Standard surround sound
The following modes provide basic surround sound for
3
1
stereo and multichannel sources.
multichannel or stereo playback as necessary.
AUTO/ALC/
DIRECT
MENU
STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR
AUTO/ALC/
DIRECT
MENU
STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR
HDD
DVD
HDD
DVD
THX
PHASE CTRL
STATUS
THX
PHASE CTRL
STATUS
TV/DTV
AUDIO
MPX
PQLS
TV/DTV
AUDIO
MPX
PQLS
INFO
DISP
CH
INFO
DISP
CH
RECEIVER
TV CTRL
RECEIVER
TV CTRL
REMOTE
SETUP
REMOTE
SETUP
•
While listening to a source, press RECEIVER , then
press STANDARD STANDARD SURROUND).
•
While listening to a source, press
, then
RECEIVER
AUTO SURR ALC STREAM
DIRECT)2 for auto playback of a source.
(
press AUTO/ALC/DIRECT
(
/
/
If necessary, press repeatedly to select a listening mode.
• If the source is Dolby Digital, DTS, or Dolby Surround
AUTO SURROUND shows briefly in the display before
showing the decoding or playback format. Check the
digital format indicators in the front panel display to see
how the source is being processed.
encoded, the proper decoding format will
automatically be selected and shows in the display.
4
With two channel sources, you can select from:
• When listening to the FM radio, the Neural THX
feature is selected automatically (see Using Neural
THX on page 48 for more on this).
• 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE – Up to 7.1 channel sound,
especially suited to movie sources
• 2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC – Up to 7.1 channel sound,
5
In the Auto level control (ALC) mode, this receiver
especially suited to music sources
equalizes playback sound levels.
• 2 Pro Logic IIx GAME – Up to 7.1 channel sound,
especially suited to video games
Tip
• 2 PRO LOGIC – 4.1 channel surround sound (sound
from the surround speakers is mono)
• When an ALC is selected, the effect level can be
adjusted using the EFFECT parameter in Setting the
Audio options on page 60.
• Neo:6 CINEMA – 7.1 channel sound, especially
suited to movie sources
Note
1 • Stereo surround (matrix) formats are decoded accordingly using Neo:6 CINEMA or 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE (see Listening in surround
sound above for more on these decoding formats).
• The Auto Surround feature is canceled if you connect headphones.
2 For more options using this button, see Using Stream Direct on page 53.
3 In modes that give 6.1 channel sound, the same signal is heard from both surround back speakers.
4 If surround back channel processing (page 53) is switched OFF, or the surround back speakers are set to NO (this happens automatically if
the Surround back speaker setting on page 85 is set to anything but Normal), 2 Pro Logic IIx becomes 2 Pro Logic II (5.1 channel sound).
5 When listening to 2-channel sources in Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music mode, there are three further parameters you can adjust: C.WIDTH,
DIMENSION and PANORAMA. See Setting the Audio options on page 60 to adjust them.
50
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to your system
06
• Neo:6 MUSIC – 7.1 channel sound, especially suited
to music sources
• 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX CINEMA
• 2 PRO LOGIC+THX CINEMA
1
• Neural THX – Up to 7.1 channel sound, especially
suited to music sources
• Neo:6 CINEMA+THX CINEMA
• 2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC+THX MUSIC
• Neo:6 MUSIC+THX MUSIC
2
With multichannel sources, if you have connected
surround back speaker(s) and have selected SBch ON, you
can select (according to format):
• 2 Pro Logic IIx GAME+THX GAMES
4
• 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE – See above (only available
when you’re using two surround back speakers)
• THX SELECT2 GAMES
With multichannel sources, press THX
(HOME THX
)
5
• 2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC – See above
repeatedly to select from:
• Dolby Digital EX – Creates surround back channel
sound for 5.1 channel sources and provides pure decoding
for 6.1 channel sources (like Dolby Digital Surround EX)
• THX Surround EX – Allows you to hear 6.1 or 7.1
channel playback with 5.1 channel sources
6
4
• 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX CINEMA
• DTS-ES – Allows you to hear 6.1 channel playback
with DTS-ES encoded sources
4
• THX SELECT2 CINEMA – Allows you to hear 7.1
channel playback with 5.1 channel sources
• DTS Neo:6 – Allows you to hear 6.1 channel playback
with DTS encoded sources
• 2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC+THX MUSIC
4
•
THX SELECT2 MUSIC – This mode is suited not only
for sources recorded in Dolby Digital and DTS, but also
to all multi-channel music sources (DVD-Audio, etc.).
4
Using the Home THX modes
THX and Home THX are technical standards created by
THX Ltd. for cinema and home theater sound. Home THX
is designed to make home theater audio sound more like
what you hear in a cinema.
• THX SELECT2 GAMES – This mode is suited to
playing the sound of games.
Using the Advanced surround effects
Different THX options will be available depending on the
source and the setting for surround back channel
processing (see Using surround back channel processing
on page 53 for more on this).
The Advanced surround effects can be used for a variety of
additional surround sound effects. Most Advanced Surround
modes are designed to be used with film soundtracks, but
some modes are also suited for music sources. Try different
settings with various soundtracks to see which you like.
AUTO/ALC/
DIRECT
MENU
STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR
HDD
DVD
AUTO/ALC/
DIRECT
MENU
THX
PHASE CTRL
STATUS
STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR
HDD
DVD
TV/DTV
AUDIO
MPX
PQLS
THX
PHASE CTRL
STATUS
INFO
DISP
CH
TV/DTV
AUDIO
MPX
PQLS
RECEIVER
TV CTRL
INFO
DISP
CH
REMOTE
SETUP
RECEIVER
TV CTRL
REMOTE
SETUP
•
Press RECEIVER , then press THX
(HOME THX) to
select a listening mode.3
•
Press RECEIVER , then press ADV SURR
ADVANCED SURROUND) repeatedly to select a
With two channel sources, press THX repeatedly to select
a matrix-decoding process for the THX CINEMA mode
(see Using surround back channel processing on page 53
for an explanation of each process):
(
listening mode.7
• ACTION – Designed for action movies with dynamic
soundtracks
Note
1 When listening to 2-channel sources in Neo:6 Cinema or Neo:6 Music mode, you can also adjust the center image effect (see Setting the Audio
options on page 60).
2 Neural THX can be selected for 2-channel signals for which the input signal is PCM (48 kHz or less), Dolby Digital, DTS or analog 2-channel
sources.
3 • When the function is set to TUNER or iPod/USB, it is not possible to select 2 Pro Logic IIx GAME+THX GAMES or THX SELECT2 GAME.
• When playing an SACD, 2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC+THX MUSIC, Neo:6 MUSIC+THX MUSIC and THX SELECT2 MUSIC can be selected.
4 Unavailable with only one surround back speaker connected.
5 THX CINEMA, THX MUSIC and THX GAMES can be selected when surround back processing is set to SBch OFF, when there is no surround
back speaker, or when playing 6.1- and 7.1-channel sources.
6 When playing DTS-encoded sources, Neo:6 CINEMA+THX CINEMA can be selected, not THX Surround EX.
7 • Depending on the source and the sound mode you have selected, you may not get sound from the surround back speakers in your setup.
For more on this, refer to Using surround back channel processing on page 53.
• If you press ADV SURR when the headphones are connected, the PHONES SURR mode will automatically be selected.
51
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to your system
06
• DRAMA – Designed for movies with lots of dialog
• STEREO – The audio is heard with your surround
settings and you can still use the Midnight,
Loudness, and Tone functions.
• SCI-FI – Designed for science fiction with lots of
special effects
• F.S.SURR FOCUS – See Using Front Stage Surround
Advance below for more on this.
• MONO FILM – Creates surround sound from mono
soundtracks
• F.S.SURR WIDE – See Using Front Stage Surround
Advance below for more on this.
• ENT.SHOW – Suitable for musical sources
1
• EXPANDED – Creates an extra wide stereo field
• TV SURROUND – Provides surround sound for both
mono and stereo TV sources
Using Front Stage Surround Advance
• ADVANCED GAME – Suitable for video games
• SPORTS – Suitable for sports programs
The Front Stage Surround Advance function allows you to
create natural surround sound effects using just the front
speakers and the subwoofer.
• CLASSICAL – Gives a large concert hall-type sound
AUTO/ALC/
DIRECT
MENU
• ROCK/POP – Creates a live concert sound for rock
and/or pop music
STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR
HDD
DVD
THX
PHASE CTRL
STATUS
• UNPLUGGED – Suitable for acoustic music sources
TV/DTV
AUDIO
MPX
PQLS
• EXT.STEREO – Gives multichannel sound to a stereo
source, using all of your speakers
INFO
DISP
CH
• PHONES SURR – When listening through
headphones, you can still get the effect of overall
surround.
RECEIVER
TV CTRL
REMOTE
SETUP
RECEIVER
, then
•
While listening to a source, press
press STEREO to select Front Stage Surround Advance
modes.
Tip
• STEREO – See Listening in stereo above for more on
this.
• When an Advanced Surround listening mode is
selected, the effect level can be adjusted using the
EFFECT parameter in Setting the Audio options on
page 60.
• F.S.SURR FOCUS – Use to provide a rich surround
sound effect directed to the center of where the front
left and right speakers sound projection area
converges.
Listening in stereo
• F.S.SURR WIDE – Use to provide a surround sound
2
When you select STEREO, you will hear the source
through just the front left and right speakers (and
possibly your subwoofer depending on your speaker
settings). Dolby Digital, DTS and WMA9 Pro
effect to a wider area than FOCUS mode.
FOCUS position
(Recommended)
WIDE position
Frontright Front left
speaker speaker
Frontright
speaker
Front left
speaker
multichannel sources are downmixed to stereo.
AUTO/ALC/
DIRECT
MENU
STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR
HDD
DVD
THX
PHASE CTRL
STATUS
TV/DTV
AUDIO
MPX
PQLS
INFO
DISP
CH
RECEIVER
TV CTRL
REMOTE
SETUP
•
While listening to a source, press RECEIVER , then
press STEREO for stereo playback.
Press repeatedly to switch between:
Note
1 Use with Dolby Pro Logic for a stereo surround effect (stereo field is wider than Standard modes with Dolby Digital sources).
2 When using F.S.SURR WIDE, a better effect can be obtained if the Full Auto MCACC procedure under Advanced MCACC is performed. For
more on this, refer to Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC) on page 39.
52
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to your system
Using Stream Direct
06
• With a 7.1-channel surround system, audio signals
that have undergone matrix decoding processing
through surround back channel processing to which
the Up Mix function is added are output from the
surround back speakers.
Use the Stream Direct modes when you want to hear the
truest possible reproduction of a source. All unnecessary
signal processing is bypassed, and you’re left with the
pure analog or digital sound source.
HDMI OUT
THX
TV/DTV
AUDIO
PHASE CTRL
STATUS
1
2
3
SIGNAL SEL MCACC
SLEEP
MPX
PQLS
AUTO/ALC/
DIRECT
MENU
4
5
6
STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR
SBch
A.ATT
DIMMER
HDD
DVD
INFO
DISP
CH
7
8
9
THX
PHASE CTRL
STATUS
D.ACCESS CH LEVEL
CLASS
RECEIVER
TV CTRL
ENTER
0
INPUT
TV/DTV
AUDIO
MPX
PQLS
MASTER
VOLUME
REMOTE
SETUP
INFO
DISP
CH
RECEIVER
, then press SBch repeatedly to
•
Press
RECEIVER
TV CTRL
cycle the surround back channel options.
Each press cycles through the options as follows:
REMOTE
SETUP
•
While listening to a source, press
, then
RECEIVER
AUTO SURR ALC STREAM
DIRECT) to select the mode you want.
• SBch ON – Matrix decoding processing for
generating the surround back component from the
surround component is turned on.
press AUTO/ALC/DIRECT
(
/
/
Check the digital format indicators in the front panel
display to see how the source is being processed.
• SBch AUTO – Matrix decoding processing for
generating the surround back component from the
surround component is switched automatically.
Matrix decoding processing is only performed when
surround back channel signals are detected in the
input signals.
• AUTO SURROUND – See Auto playback on page 50.
• ALC – Listening in Auto level control mode (page 50).
• DIRECT – Sources are heard according to the
settings made in the Surround Setup (speaker
setting, channel level, speaker distance, acoustic
calibration EQ, and X-curve), as well as with dual
mono, the input attenuator, and any sound delay
settings. You will hear sources according to the
number of channels in the signal.
• SBch OFF – Matrix decoding processing for
generating the surround back component from the
surround component is turned off.
Using the Virtual Surround Back mode
• Default setting: OFF
• PURE DIRECT – Analog sources are heard without
any digital processing. No sound is output from the
Speaker B in this mode.
When you’re not using surround back speakers,
selecting this mode allows you to hear a virtual surround
back channel through your surround speakers. You can
choose to listen to sources with no surround back
channel information, or if the material sounds better in
the format (for example, 5.1) for which it was originally
encoded, you can have the receiver only apply this effect
Using surround back channel
processing
1
• Default setting: SBch ON
to 6.1 encoded sources like Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES.
You can have the receiver automatically use 6.1 or 7.1
decoding for 6.1 encoded sources (for example, Dolby
Digital EX or DTS-ES), or you can choose to always use
6.1 or 7.1 decoding (for example, with 5.1 encoded
material). With 5.1 encoded sources, a surround back
channel will be generated, but the material may sound
better in the 5.1 format for which it was originally
encoded (in which case, you can simply switch surround
back channel processing off).
•
Press SBch repeatedly to cycle the virtual surround
back channel options.
Each press cycles through the options as follows:
• VirtualSB ON – Virtual Surround Back is always used
(for example, on 5.1 encoded material)
• VirtualSB AUTO – Virtual Surround Back is
automatically applied to 6.1 encoded sources (for
example, Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES)
• VirtualSB OFF – Virtual Surround Back mode is
switched off
Note
1 • You can’t use the Virtual Surround Back mode when the headphones are connected to this receiver or when any of the stereo, Front Stage
Surround Advance or Stream Direct mode is selected.
•
You can only use the Virtual Surround Back mode if the surround speakers are on and the SB setting is set to NO or if Front Bi-Amp, Speaker B
or ZONE 2 is selected at Surr Back System.
• The Virtual Surround Back mode cannot be applied to sources that do not have surround channel information.
53
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to your system
Setting the Up Mix function
06
1
2
Switch the receiver into standby.
While holding down ENTER on the front panel,
In a 7.1-channel surround system with surround
speakers placed directly at the sides of the listening
position, the surround sound of 5.1-channel sources is
heard from the side. The Up Mix function mixes the
sound of the surround speakers with the surround back
speakers so that the surround sound is heard from
press STANDBY/ON
The display shows RESET NO .
.
Use TUNE +/– (or / on the remote control) to select
UP MIX ON , and then use PRESET +/– (or / on
the remote control) to select ON or OFF.
1
3
Press ENTER to confirm.
• When set to ON, the UP MIX indicator on the front
panel lights.
diagonally to the rear as it should be.
• Using the Up Mix function is effective when the
speakers in the 7.1-channel surround system are set
up as recommended in the example on page 17.
• Depending on the positions of the speakers and the
sound source, in some cases it may not be possible
to achieve good results. In this case, set the setting to
OFF.
Selecting MCACC presets
• Default setting: MEMORY 1
If you have calibrated your system for different listening
2
positions , you can switch between settings to suit the
Up Mix OFF
Up Mix ON
kind of source you’re listening to and where you’re sitting
(for example, watching movies from a sofa, or playing a
video game close to the TV).
SW
C
SW
C
L
R
L
R
THX
TV/DTV
AUDIO
PHASE CTRL
STATUS
HDMI OUT
1
2
3
SL
SR
SL
SR
MPX
PQLS
SIGNAL SEL MCACC
SLEEP
?
4
5
6
INFO
DISP
CH
SBch
A.ATT
DIMMER
SBL
SBR
SBL
SBR
7
8
9
RECEIVER
TV CTRL
D.ACCESS CH LEVEL
CLASS
ENTER
0
REMOTE
SETUP
•
While listening to a source, press
, then
RECEIVER
STANDBY/ON
press MCACC
.
3
Press repeatedly to select one of the six MCACC presets .
See Data Management on page 82 to check and manage
your current settings.
ENTER
PHASE
CONTROL
ADVANC
ACC
BAND
TUNE
TUNE
PQMLCS
HDMI
PRESET
PRESET
TUNER EDIT
INPUT
SELECTOR
AUTO SURR/ALC/
STREAM DIRECT SPEA
MULTI-ZONE
CONTROL ON/OFF
S
K
T
E
E
R
REO
S
PHONES
VIDEO CAMERA
iPod
iPhone
MCACC SETUP MIC
USB
HDMI
4
Note
1 • Set to ON regardless of this setting when playing DTS-HD signals.
• May automatically be set to OFF even when set to ON, depending on the input signal and listening mode.
2 Different presets might also have separate calibration settings for the same listening position, depending on how you’re using your system.
These presets can be set in Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC) on page 39 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 72,
either of which you should have already completed.
3 • These settings have no effect when headphones are connected.
• You can also press / to select the MCACC preset.
54
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to your system
06
Choosing the input signal
Better sound using Phase Control
On this receiver, it is possible to switch the input signals
This receiver’s Phase Control feature uses phase
correction measures to make sure your sound source
arrives at the listening position in phase, preventing
unwanted distortion and/or coloring of the sound.
1
for the different inputs as described below.
THX
TV/DTV
AUDIO
PHASE CTRL
STATUS
HDMI OUT
1
2
3
MPX
PQLS
SIGNAL SEL MCACC
SLEEP
During multichannel playback, LFE (Low-Frequency
Effects) signals as well as low-frequency signals in each
channel are assigned to the subwoofer or other the
subwoofer and the most appropriate speaker. At least in
theory, however, this type of processing involves a group
delay that varies with frequency, resulting in phase
distortion where the low-frequency sound is delayed or
muffled by the conflict with other channels. With the
Phase Control mode switched on, this receiver can
reproduce powerful bass sound without deteriorating the
quality of the original sound (see illustration below).
4
5
6
INFO
DISP
CH
SBch
A.ATT
DIMMER
7
8
9
RECEIVER
TV CTRL
D.ACCESS CH LEVEL
CLASS
ENTER
0
REMOTE
SETUP
•
Press RECEIVER , then press SIGNAL SEL to select
the input signal corresponding to the source
component.
Each press cycles through the options as follows:
• AUTO – The receiver selects the first available signal
in the following order: HDMI; DIGITAL; ANALOG.
• ANALOG – Selects an analog signal.
Phase Control OFF
• DIGITAL – Selects an optical or coaxial digital signal.
Front speaker
Listening
position
2
• HDMI – Selects an HDMI signal.
3
• PCM – For PCM input signals. The receiver selects
the first available signal in the following order: HDMI;
DIGITAL.
Sound
source
Sound muffled due
to a delay in time
When set to DIGITAL or AUTO, the indicators light
according to the signal being decoded, as follows:
Subwoofer
– 2 DIGITAL lights with Dolby Digital decoding.
• Rhythms blurred and difficult to hear
• Bass sound with loss of depth
– 2 DIGITAL PLUS lights with Dolby Digital Plus
decoding.
• Sound of musical instruments with no reality
– 2 TrueHD lights with Dolby TrueHD decoding.
– DTS lights with DTS decoding.
Phase Control ON
– DTS HD lights with DTS-HD decoding.
– MSTR lights with DTS-HD Master Audio decoding.
– 96/24 lights with DTS 96/24 decoding.
Front speaker
Listening
position
– WMA9 Pro lights to indicate that a WMA9 Pro signal
is being decoded.
Sound
Original sound
preserved with no
loss of clarity
• HDMI is not assigned by default. To select an HDMI
signal, conduct the input setup procedure (see The
Input Setup menu on page 40).
source
Subwoofer
• Rhythms with crystal-like clarity
• Bass sound with no loss of depth
• Sound of musical instruments with superb reality
Note
1 • This receiver can only play back Dolby Digital, PCM (32 kHz to 192 kHz), DTS (including DTS 96/24) and WMA9 Pro digital signal formats.
The compatible signals via the HDMI terminals are: Dolby Digital, DTS, WMA9 Pro, PCM (32 kHz to 192 kHz), Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus,
DTS-EXPRESS, DTS-HD Master Audio, SACD and DVD Audio (including 192 kHz). With other digital signal formats, set to ANALOG (the
MULTI CH IN and TUNER).
• You may get digital noise when a LD or CD player compatible with DTS is playing an analog signal. To prevent noise, make the proper digital
connections (page 28) and set the signal input to DIGITAL.
• Some DVD players don’t output DTS signals. For more details, refer to the instruction manual supplied with your DVD player.
2 When the HDMI audio output parameter is set to THROUGH, the sound will be heard through your TV, not from this receiver.
3 • This is useful if you find there is a slight delay before AUTO recognizes the PCM signal on a CD, for instance.
• When PCM is selected, noise may be output during playback of non-PCM sources. Please select another input signal if this is a problem.
55
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to your system
06
Phase Control technology provides coherent sound
1
reproduction through the use of phase matching for an
optimal sound image. The default setting is on and we
recommend leaving Phase Control switched on for all
sound sources.
AUTO/ALC/
DIRECT
MENU
STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR
HDD
DVD
THX
PHASE CTRL
STATUS
TV/DTV
AUDIO
MPX
PQLS
INFO
DISP
CH
RECEIVER
TV CTRL
REMOTE
SETUP
RECEIVER
•
Press
, then press PHASE CTRL (PHASE
CONTROL) to switch on phase correction.
The PHASE CONTROL indicator on the front panel lights.
Note
1 • Phase matching is a very important factor in achieving proper sound reproduction. If two waveforms are ‘in phase’, they crest and trough
together, resulting in increased amplitude, clarity and presence of the sound signal. If a crest of a wave meets a trough, then the sound will
be ‘out of phase’ and an unreliable sound image will be produced.
• The PHASE CONTROL feature is available even when the headphones are plugged in.
• If your subwoofer has a phase control switch, set it to the plus (+) sign (or 0°). However, the effect you can actually feel when PHASE
CONTROL is set to ON on this receiver depends on the type of your subwoofer. Set your subwoofer to maximize the effect. It is also
recommended you try changing the orientation or the place of your subwoofer.
• Set the built-in lowpass filter switch of your subwoofer to off. If this cannot be done on your subwoofer, set the cutoff frequency to a higher
value.
• If the speaker distance is not properly set, you may not have a maximized PHASE CONTROL effect.
• The PHASE CONTROL mode cannot be set to ON in the following cases:
– When the PURE DIRECT mode is switched on.
– When the MULTI CH IN input is selected.
– When the HDMI audio output parameter is set to THROUGH in Setting the Audio options on page 60.
56
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
KURO LINK
07
Chapter 7:
KURO LINK
Synchronized operation with a KURO LINK-compatible
Pioneer flat screen TV or Blu-ray disc player or with a
component of another make that supports the KURO
LINK function is possible when the component is
connected to the receiver using an HDMI cable.
• To use the KURO LINK function, connect this
receiver and flat screen TV using the HDMI OUT 1
terminal. Connecting the KURO LINK compatible
component using the HDMI OUT 2 terminal may
result in malfunction. If this happens, turn off the
KURO LINK compatible component’s KURO LINK
setting.
For details about concrete operations, settings, etc., refer
to also the operating instructions for each component.
• While the receiver is equipped with four HDMI inputs,
the KURO LINK function can only be used with up to
three DVD or Blu-ray disc players or up to three DVD
or Blu-ray disc recorders.
• You cannot use this function with components that
do not support KURO LINK.
• We do not guarantee this receiver will work with
Pioneer KURO LINK-compatible components or
components of other makes that support the KURO
LINK function. We do not guarantee that all
synchronized operations will work with components
of other makes that support the KURO LINK function.
Cautions on the KURO LINK function
• Connect the TV directly to this receiver. Interrupting a
direct connection with other amps or an AV converter
(such as an HDMI switch) can cause operational
errors.
• Use a High Speed HDMI™ cable when you want to
use the KURO LINK function. The KURO LINK
function may not work properly if a different type of
HDMI cable is used.
• Only connect components (Blu-ray disc player, etc.)
you intend to use as a source to the HDMI input of
this receiver. Interrupting a direct connection with
other amps or an AV converter (such as an HDMI
switch) can cause operational errors.
Making the KURO LINK connections
• When KURO LINK is set to ON, HDMI Input is
automatically set to OFF.
You can use synchronized operation for a connected flat
screen TV and up to four other components.
• If a listening mode other than AUTO SURROUND,
ALC, DIRECT, PURE DIRECT or STEREO is selected
while the PQLS effect is enabled, the PQLS effect is
disabled.
Be sure to connect the flat screen TV’s audio cable to the
audio input of this unit.
For details, see Connecting your TV and playback
components on page 23.
• When this receiver is connected by HDMI cable to a
Pioneer player that is compatible with the PQLS
function via HDMI connection and HDMI
Important
reauthentication is performed (the HDMI indicator
blinks), the PQLS effect is enabled and the listening
mode is set to AUTO SURROUND if a listening mode
other than AUTO SURROUND, ALC, DIRECT, PURE
DIRECT or STEREO is selected.
• When connecting this system or changing
connections, be sure to switch the power off and
disconnect the power cord from the wall socket.
After completing all connections, connect the power
cords to the wall socket.
• When the receiver’s KURO LINK is turned ON, even
if the receiver’s power is in the standby mode, it is
possible to output the audio and video signals from a
player via HDMI to the TV without producing sound
from the receiver, but only when a KURO LINK-
compatible component (Blu-ray disc player, etc.) and
compatible TV are connected. In this case, the
receiver’s power turns on and the power and HDMI
indicators light.
• After this receiver is connected to an AC outlet, a 2
second to 10 second HDMI initialization process
begins. You cannot carry out any operations during
initialization. The HDMI indicator on the display unit
blinks during initialization, and you can turn this
receiver on once it has stopped blinking.
• To get the most out of this function, we recommend
that you connect your HDMI component not to a flat
screen TV but rather directly to the HDMI terminal on
this receiver.
57
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
KURO LINK
07
About connections with a product of a
different brand that supports the KURO LINK
function
The synchronized operations below can be used when
the receiver’s KURO LINK function is connected to a TV
of a brand other than Pioneer that supports the KURO
LINK function. (Depending on the TV, however, some of
the KURO LINK functions may not work.)
KURO LINK Setup
You must adjust the settings of this receiver as well as
KURO LINK-compatible connected components in order to
make use of the KURO LINK function. For more information
see the operating instructions for each component.
TV/DTV
MPX
PQLS
AUDIO
PARAMETER
VIDEO
PARAMETER
LIST
TUNE TOOLS
AUDIO
INFO
DISP
CH
TOP MENU
BAND
T.EDIT
GUIDE
• You can set whether to output the sound over the
speakers connected to the receiver or over the TV’s
speakers using the TV’s menu screen.
RECEIVER
TV CTRL
PRESET
ENTER
TUNE
PRESET
RETURN
REMOTE
SETUP
PTY
SEARCH
• You can adjust the receiver’s volume or mute the
sound using the TV’s remote control.
HOME
MENU
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
MAIN
iPod CTRL
• When the TV’s power is set to standby, the receiver’s
power is also set to standby. (Only when the input for
a component connected to the receiver by HDMI
connection is selected or when watching the TV.)
1
2
3
Press RECEIVER , then press Home Menu
Select ‘System Setup’, then press ENTER
Select ‘Other Setup’, then press ENTER
.
.
.
• The sound of TV programs or an external input
connected to the TV can also be output from the
speakers connected to the receiver. (This requires
connection of an optical digital cable, etc., in addition
to the HDMI cable.)
4d.Other Setup
4d1.KURO LINK Setup
A/V RECEIVER
A/V RECEIVER
1. KURO LINK Setup
2. Multi Ch In Setup
3. ZONE Audio Setup
4. Power ON Level Setup
5. Volume Limit Setup
6. Remote Control Mode Setup
7. Flicker Reduction Setup
KURO LINK
:
:
ON
Display Power Off
YES
The synchronized operations below can be used when
the receiver’s KURO LINK function is connected to a
player or recorder of a brand other than Pioneer that
supports the KURO LINK function.
Exit
Return
Exit
Finish
4
Select the ‘KURO LINK’ setting you want.
• When playback starts on the player or recorder, the
receiver’s input switches to the HDMI input to which
that component is connected.
Choose whether to set this unit’s KURO LINK function
ON or OFF. You will need to set it to ON to use the KURO
LINK function.
See the Pioneer website for the latest information on the
models of non-Pioneer brands and products that support
the KURO LINK function.
When using a component that does not support the
KURO LINK function, set this to OFF.
• ON – Enables the KURO LINK function. When this
unit’s power is turned off and you have a supported
source begin playback while using the KURO LINK
function, the audio and video output from the HDMI
connection are output from the flat screen TV.
• OFF – The KURO LINK is disabled. Synchronized
operations cannot be used. When this unit’s power is
turned off, audio and video of sources connected via
HDMI are not output.
5
Select the ‘Display Power Off’ setting you want.
If the TV’s power is turned off while using the KURO LINK
function, the receiver’s power is also turned off (all power
off function). This function can be disabled.
•
YES – The all power off function is enabled. The
receiver’s power turns off together with the TV’s power.
This function only works when the input for a
component connected to the receiver by HDMI
connection is selected or when watching the TV.
• NO – The all power off function is disabled. The
receiver’s power is not affected when the TV’s power
is turned off.
6
When you’re finished, press HOME MENU
.
You will finish to HOME MENU.
58
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
KURO LINK
07
Setting the PQLS function
Synchronized amp mode
PQLS (Precision Quartz Lock System) is a digital audio
signal transfer control technology using the KURO LINK
function. It offers higher-quality audio playback by
controlling audio signals from the receiver to a PQLS
compatible player, etc. This enables removing jitter that
has a negative effect on the quality of the sound and is
generated upon transmission.
The synchronized amp mode can be set from the KURO
LINK-compatible TV’s remote control. See the
explanation below for operations in the synchronized
amp mode.
These functions are set from the TV’s menu screen. For
more information, refer to the operating instructions of
the KURO LINK-compatible TV.
• On players compatible with PQLS Multi Surround,
PQLS works for all sources. Set the player’s audio
output to Linear PCM.
Synchronized amp mode operations
When using the synchronized amp mode, the KURO
LINK-compatible component connected to the receiver
operates in sync as described below.
• On players compatible with PQLS 2 ch Audio, PQLS
only works when playing CDs.
• The receiver’s volume can be set and the sound can
be muted using the TV’s remote control.
To use the PQLS function, set PQLS in the player’s Setup
Navigator to AUTO.
• When the TV’s power is set to standby, the receiver’s
power is also set to standby. (Only when the input for
a component connected to the receiver by HDMI
connection is selected or when watching the TV.)
Please refer to the operating instructions supplied with
your player for more information.
This function is activated when KURO LINK is set to ON.
THX
TV/DTV
AUDIO
PHASE CTRL
STATUS
• The receiver’s input switches automatically when the
KURO LINK-compatible component is played.
MPX
PQLS
INFO
DISP
CH
• The receiver’s input switches automatically when the
TV’s channel is switched.
RECEIVER
TV CTRL
• The synchronized amp mode remains in effect even if
the receiver’s input is switched to a component other
than one connected by HDMI.
REMOTE
SETUP
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
MAIN
The operations below can also be used on Pioneer KURO
LINK-compatible flat screen TVs.
•
Press
, then press PQLS to select PQLS
RECEIVER
setting.
• When the receiver’s volume is adjusted or the sound
is muted, the volume status is displayed on the flat
screen TV’s screen.
The setting is displayed on the front panel display.
• PQLS AUTO – PQLS is enabled. A precision quartz
controller in this receiver eliminates distortion
caused by timing errors (jitter), giving you the best
possible digital-to-analog conversion when you use
the HDMI interface. This is valid as an HDMI function
for PQLS-compatible players.
• When the OSD language is switched on the flat
screen TV, the receiver’s language setting also
switches accordingly.
Canceling synchronized amp mode
• When the synchronized amp mode is canceled, the
receiver’s power turns off if you were viewing an
HDMI input or a TV program on the TV.
• PQLS OFF – PQLS is disabled.
Before using synchronization
• When in the synchronized amp mode, the
synchronized amp mode is canceled when the
receiver’s power is turned off. To turn the
synchronized amp mode back on, select the
synchronized amp mode using the TV’s remote
control.
Once you have finished all connections and settings, you
must:
1
Put all components into standby mode.
2
Turn the power on for all components, with the
power for the flat screen TV being turned on last.
• When in the synchronized amp mode, the
synchronized amp mode is canceled if an operation
that produces sound from the TV is performed from
the TV’s menu screen, if the receiver’s HDMI output
setting is changed, etc.
3
Choose the HDMI input to which the TV is
connected to this receiver, and see if video output from
connected components displays properly on the screen
or not.
4
Check whether the components connected to all
HDMI inputs are properly displayed.
59
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using other functions
08
Chapter 8:
Using other functions
Setting
What it does
Option(s)
BYPASS
ON
b
Setting the Audio options
Applies the treble and bass tone
controls to a source, or bypasses
them completely.
TONE
(Tone
Control)
There are a number of additional sound settings you can
make using the AUDIO PARAMETER menu. The
defaults, if not stated, are listed in bold.
c
Adjusts the amount of bass.
–6 to +6 (dB)
Default: 0 (dB)
–6 to +6 (dB)
Default: 0 (dB)
BASS
c
Adjusts the amount of treble.
Important
TREBLE
• Note that if a setting doesn’t appear in the AUDIO
PARAMETER menu, it is unavailable due to the
current source, settings and status of the receiver.
d
S.RTRV
(Sound
With the Sound Retriever
function, DSP processing is used
OFF
ON
Retriever) to compensate for the loss of
audio data upon compression,
improving the sound’s sense of
density and modulation.
RECEIVER
, then press AUDIO PARAMETER.
1
2
Press
Use / to select the setting you want to adjust.
Depending on the current status/mode of the receiver,
certain options may not be able to be selected. Check the
table below for notes on this.
DNR
(Digital
Noise
May improve the quality of sound
in a noisy source (for example,
video tape with lots of background
OFF
ON
Reduction) noise) when switched on.
3
Use / to set it as necessary.
DIALOG E. Localizes dialog in the center
OFF
See the table below for the options available for each
setting.
(Dialog
channel to make it stand out from
ON
Enhancem other background sounds in a TV
ent)
or movie soundtrack.
4
Press RETURN to confirm and exit the menu.
DUAL
(Dual
Mono)
Specifies how dual mono
encoded Dolby Digital
soundtracks should be played.
Dual mono is not widely used, but
is sometimes necessary when
two languages need to be sent to
separate channels.
CH1–Channel
1 is heard only
Setting
What it does
Option(s)
MCACC
(MCACC
preset)
Selects your favorite MCACC
preset memory when multiple
preset memoriesare saved. When M6. MEMORY 6
an MCACC preset memory has
been renamed, the given name is
displayed.
M1. MEMORY 1
CH2–Channel
2 is heard only
to
CH1 CH2 –
Both channels
heard from
Default:
M1. MEMORY 1
front speakers
EQ
Switches on/off the effects of EQ
Pro.
ON
e
(Acoustic
Calibration
EQ)
DRC
Adjusts the level of dynamic
a
AUTO
OFF
(Dynamic range for movie soundtracks
Range
Control)
MAX
MID
OFF
optimized for Dolby Digital, DTS,
Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD,
DTS-HD and DTS-HD Master
Audio (you may need to use this
feature when listening to
S-WAVE
Switches on/off the effects of
ON
(Standing Standing Wave Control.
Wave)
OFF
DELAY
(Sound
Delay)
Some monitors have a slight
delay when showing video, so the
soundtrack will be slightly out of
sync with the picture. By adding a
bit of delay, you can adjust the
sound to match the presentation
of the video.
0.0 to 10.0
(frames)
surround sound at low volumes).
LFE
(LFE
Some Dolby Digital and DTS
audio sources include ultra-low
0dB/ –5dB/
–10dB/ –15dB/
–20dB
1 second = 25
frames (PAL)
Attenuate) bass tones. Set the LFE attenuator
as necessary to prevent the ultra-
low bass tones from distorting the
sound from the speakers.
Default: 0.0
OFF
MIDNIGHT Allows you to hear effective
surround sound of movies at low
volumes.
MIDNIGHT/
LOUDNESS
OFF
The LFE is not limited when set to
0 dB, which is the recommended
value. When set to –5 dB, –10 dB,
–15 dB or –20 dB, the LFE is
limited by the respective degree.
When OFF is selected, no sound
is output from the LFE channel.
MIDNIGHT ON
LOUDNESS Used to get good bass and treble
from music sources at low
volumes.
LOUDNESS
ON
60
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using other functions
08
f. You shouldn’t have any problems using this with most SACD
discs, but if the sound distorts, it is best to switch the gain setting
back to 0 dB.
g.• HDMI Audio setting cannot be switched while performing
synchronized amp mode operations.
• The synchronized amp mode must be turned on in order to play
the receiver’s HDMI audio and video input signals from the TV with
the receiver’s power in the standby mode. See Synchronized amp
mode on page 59.
h.This feature is only available when the connected display supports
the automatic audio/video synchronizing capability (‘lipsync’) for
HDMI. If you find the automatically set delay time unsuitable, set A.
DELAY to OFF and adjust the delay time manually. For more details
about the lipsync feature of your display, contact the manufacturer
directly.
Setting
SACD
What it does
Option(s)
0dB
Brings out detail in SACDs by
maximizing the dynamic range
(during digital processing).
f
GAIN
+6 dB
g
Specifies the routing of the HDMI
audio signal out of this receiver
(amp) or through to a TV or flat
screen TV. When THROUGH is
selected, no sound is output from
this receiver.
AMPLIFIER
HDMI
(HDMI
Audio)
THROUGH
A. DELAY This feature automatically
(Auto
delay)
OFF
corrects the audio-to-video delay
between components connected
with an HDMI cable. The audio
delay time is set depending on the
operational status of the display
connected with an HDMI cable.
The video delay time is
ON
i. Only when listening to 2-channel sources in Dolby Pro Logic IIx
Music/Dolby Pro Logic II Music mode.
j. Only when listening to 2-channel sources in Neo:6 MUSIC/CINEMA
mode.
automatically adjusted according
Setting the Video options
h
to the audio delay time.
There are a number of additional picture settings you can
make using the VIDEO PARAMETER menu. The defaults,
if not stated, are listed in bold.
i
Provides a better blend of the
front speakers by spreading the
center channel between the front
right and left speakers, making it
sound wider (higher settings) or
narrower (lower settings).
0 to 7
C. WIDTH
(Center
Width)
Default: 3
(Applicable
only when
using a
center
speaker)
Important
• Note that if an option cannot be selected on the
VIDEO PARAMETER menu, it is unavailable due to
the current source, setting and status of the receiver.
DIMENSIONi
Adjusts the depth of the surround
sound balance from front to back,
making the sound more distant
(minus settings), or more forward
(positive settings).
–3 to +3
• The VIDEO PARAMETER menu cannot be used
when the input function is set to iPod/USB, CD, CD-
R, TUNER, BD or HDMI 1 to 4.
Default: 0
RECEIVER
, then press VIDEO PARAMETER.
1
2
Press
i
Extends the front stereo image to
include the surround speakers for
a ‘wraparound’ effect.
OFF
PANORAMA
Use / to select the setting you want to adjust.
ON
Depending on the current status/mode of the receiver,
certain options may not be able to be selected. Check the
table below for notes on this.
j
Adjusts the center image to
create a wider stereo effect with
vocals. Adjust the effect from 0
(all center channel sent to front
right and left speakers) to 10
(center channel sent to the center
speaker only).
0 to 10
C. IMAGE
(Center
Image)
(Applicable
only when
using a
Defaults:
Neo:6 MUSIC:
3
Neo:6
CINEMA: 10
3
Use / to set it as necessary.
See the table below for the options available for each
1
setting.
center
4
Press RETURN to confirm and exit the menu.
speaker)
Setting
V. CONV
What it does
Option(s)
EFFECT
Sets the effect level for the
currently selected Advanced
Surround or ALC mode (each
mode can be set separately).
10 to 90
Converts video signals for output
ON
(DigitalVideo from the MONITOR OUT jacks
Conversion) (including HDMI OUT connector)
for all video types (see page 22).
OFF
a.When EQ OFF is selected, the MCACC indicator does not light.
b.This setting is only displayed when the listening mode is Stereo,
Auto surround (STEREO) or ALC (STEREO).
c.The adjustment can be made only when TONE is set to ON.
d.With the iPod/USB input function, by default S.RTRV is set to ON.
e.The initially set AUTO is only available for Dolby TrueHD signals.
Select MAX or MID for signals other than Dolby TrueHD.
a
Specifies the output resolution of
the video signal (when analog
video input signals are output at
the HDMI OUT connector, select
this according to the resolution of
your monitor and the images you
wish to watch).
AUTO
PURE
RES
(Resolution)
480p/576p
720p
1080i
1080p
Note
1 • All of the setting items can be set for each input function.
• Setting items other than V. CONV can only be selected when V. CONV is set to ON.
61
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using other functions
08
c.This setting is only displayed when 480i or 576i video signals are
being input.
d.If the picture does not display properly when PAL is selected, select
AUTO or OFF.
e.This setting is only valid for component outputs.
f. This setting is not valid for HDMI outputs.
g.This setting is not displayed for component inputs.
Setting
What it does
Option(s)
THROUGH
NORMAL
b
Specifies the aspect ratio when
analog video input signals are
output at the HDMI output. Make
your desired settings while
checking each setting on your
display (if the image doesn’t match
your monitor type, cropping or
black bands appear).
ASP
(Aspect)
c,d,e
This setting optimizes the picture
for film material when the video
output is set to progressive.
Usually set to AUTO; but try
switching to OFF if the picture
appears unnatural.
AUTO
PAL
PCINEMA
(PureCinema)
OFF
Additionally, certain PAL movie
video (576i, 25 frames/second STB
video output or DVD disc playback,
etc.) that contain film progressive
material cannot be recognized as
such by this receiver. In such
instances, if you choose PAL,
PureCinema mode is activated.
c,e
Adjusts the motion and still picture
quality when video output is set to
progressive.
–4 to +4
P.MOTION
(Progressive
Default: 0
Motion)
c
Adjusts the amount of noise
reduction (NR) applied to the Y
(brightness) component.
0 to +8
YNR
Default: 0
c
Adjusts how sharp edges appear.
–4 to +4
Default: 0
–4 to +4
Default: 0
DETAIL
c,f
Adjusts the sharpness of the high-
frequency (detailed) elements in
the picture.
SHARP
(Sharpness)
c
Adjusts the overall brightness.
–6 to +6
Default: 0
–6 to +6
Default: 0
–6 to +6
Default: 0
–6 to +6
Default: 0
BRIGHT
(Brightness)
c
Adjusts the contrast between light
and dark.
CONTRAST
c,g
Adjusts the red/green balance.
HUE
c
Adjusts saturation from dull to
bright.
CHROMA
(Chroma
Level)
a.• When set to a resolution with which the TV (monitor) is not
compatible, no picture is output. Also, in some cases no picture will
be output due to copyright protection signals. In this case, change
the setting.
• When AUTO is selected, the resolution is selected automatically
according to the capacity of the TV (monitor) connected by HDMI.
When PURE is selected, the signals are output with the same
resolution as when input (At this time, video signals are only output
from the same type of terminals to which they were input).
• When a display is connected by HDMI, if this is set to something
other than PURE and 480i/576i analog signals are input, 480p/576p
signals are output from the component output terminals.
b.• If the image doesn’t match your monitor type, adjust the aspect
ratio on the source component or on the monitor.
• NORMAL setting is only displayed when 480i/p or 576i/p video
signals are being input.
62
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using other functions
08
Switching the speaker system
Using the MULTI-ZONE controls
If you selected Speaker B in Surround back speaker
setting on page 85, three speaker system settings are
possible using SPEAKERS. If you selected Normal, Front
Bi-Amp or ZONE 2, the button will simply switch your
main speaker system on or off. The options below are for
The following steps use the front panel controls to adjust
the sub zone volume and select sources. See MULTI-
ZONE remote controls on page 64.
VSX-LX52
1
the Speaker B setting only.
STANDBY/ON
ENTER
VSX-LX52
BAND
TUNEPQLS
HDMI
PRESET
PRESET
TUNER EDIT
MULTI-ZONE
MASTER
VOLUME
INPUT
SELECTOR
SPEAKERS
CONTROL
ON/OFF
ENTER
PQLS
HDMI
PRESET
PRESET
TUNER EDIT
VANCED
RROUND
STANDARD
SURROUND
MULTI-ZONE
MASTER
VOLUME
HOME THX
SPEAKERS
CONTROL
ON/OFF
PHONES
VIDEO CAMERA
iPod
iPhone
MCACC SETUP MIC
USB
HDMI
4
VIDEO CAMERA
iPod
iPhone
MCACC SETUP MIC
USB
HDMI
4
1
Press MULTI-ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel.
Each press selects a MULTI-ZONE option:
• ZONE 2 ON – Selects your primary (ZONE 2) sub
zone
•
Use SPEAKERS on the front panel to select a
speaker system setting.
• ZONE 2&3 ON – Select both sub zones
As mentioned above, if you have selected Normal, the
button will simply switch your main speaker system (A)
on or off.
• ZONE 3 ON – Selects your secondary (ZONE 3) sub
zone
Press repeatedly to choose a speaker system option:
• MULTI ZONE OFF – Switches the MULTI-ZONE
feature off
• SPA – Sound is output from speaker system A and
the same signal is output from the pre-out terminals.
The MULTI-ZONE indicator lights when the MULTI-ZONE
control has been switched ON.
• SPB – Sound is output from the two speakers
connected to speaker system B. Multichannel
sources will not be heard. The same signal is output
from the surround back channel pre-out terminals.
2
Press MULTI-ZONE CONTROL on the front panel to
select the sub zone(s) you want.
If you selected ZONE 2&3 ON above, you can toggle
between ZONE 2 and ZONE 3.
• SPAB – Sound is output from speaker system A (up
to 5 channels, depending on the source), the two
speakers in speaker system B, and the subwoofer.
The sound from speaker system B will be the same as
the sound from speaker system A (multichannel
sources will be downmixed to 2 channels).
2
• When the receiver is on, make sure that any
operations for the sub zone are done while ZONE and
your selected sub zone(s) show in the display. If this
is not showing, the front panel controls affect the
main zone only.
• SP(off) – No sound is output from the speakers. The
same sound is output from the pre-out terminals
(including from your subwoofer, if connected) as
when selecting speaker system A (above).
3
Use the INPUT SELECTOR dial to select the source
for the zone you have selected.
For example, ZONE 2 CD-R sends the source connected
to the CD-R inputs to the primary (ZONE 2) sub room.
• If you select TUNER, you can use the tuner controls
to select a preset station (see Saving station presets
3
on page 48 if you’re unsure how to do this).
Note
1 • The subwoofer output depends on the settings you made in Manual speaker setup on page 84. However, if SPB is selected above, no sound
is heard from the subwoofer (the LFE channel is not downmixed).
• Depending on the settings in Surround back speaker setting on page 85 output from the surround back pre-out terminals may change.
• All speaker systems (except Speaker B connections) are switched off when headphones are connected.
2 If the receiver is in standby, the display is dimmed, and ZONE and your selected sub zone(s) continue to show in the display.
3 The tuner cannot be tuned to more than one station at a time. Therefore, changing the station in one zone also changes the station in the other
zone. Please be careful not to change stations when recording a radio broadcast.
63
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using other functions
08
4
Use the MASTER VOLUME dial to adjust the
For more information about video connections, see
Connecting an HDD/DVD recorder, VCR and other video
sources on page 27.
volume for the zone you have selected.
This is only possible if you selected the Variable volume
control in ZONE Audio Setup on page 89.
1
DVD
BD
DVR
HDMI
TV/DTV
MPX
PQLS
5
When you’re finished, press MULTI-ZONE
TV
CD
CD-R
VIDEO
AUDIO
INFO
DISP
CH
CONTROL again to return to the main zone controls.
You can also press MULTI-ZONE ON/OFF on the front
panel to switch off all output to the sub zone(s).
iPod USB TUNER INPUT SELECT
RECEIVER
TV CTRL
2
REMOTE
SETUP
HDMI OUT
1
2
3
SIGNAL SEL MCACC
SLEEP
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
MULTI-ZONE remote controls
MAIN
4
5
6
Set the MULTI-ZONE operation switch to ZONE 2 or ZONE
3 to operate the corresponding zone.
1
Select the source you want to record.
Use the input function buttons (or INPUT SELECT).
RECEIVER
The following table shows the possible MULTI-ZONE
remote controls:
• If necessary, press
, then press SIGNAL
SEL to select the input signal corresponding to the
source component (see Choosing the input signal on
page 55 for more on this).
Button
What it does
Switches on/off power in the sub zone.
INPUT SELECT Use to select the input function in the sub
2
Prepare the source you want to record.
zone.
Tune to the radio station, load the CD, video, DVD etc.
Input function Use to select the input function directly (this
3
Prepare the recorder.
buttons
may not work for some functions) in the sub
Insert a blank tape, MD, video etc. into the recording
zone.
device and set the recording levels.
MASTER
VOLUME +/–
Use to set the listening volume in the sub
zone.
Refer to the instructions that came with the recorder if
you are unsure how to do this. Most video recorders set
the audio recording level automatically—check the
component’s instruction manual if you’re unsure.
Making an audio or a video recording
You can make an audio or a video recording from the
4
Start recording, then start playback of the source
built-in tuner, or from an audio or video source
connected to the receiver (such as a CD player or TV).
component.
3
Keep in mind you can’t make a digital recording from an
analog source or vice-versa, so make sure the
components you are recording to/from are hooked up in
the same way (see Connecting your equipment on
page 14 for more on connections).
Reducing the level of an analog signal
The input attenuator lowers the input level of an analog
signal when it’s too strong. You can use this if you find
that the OVER indicator lights often or you can hear
4
distortion in the sound.
Since the video converter is not available when making
recordings (from the video OUT jacks) make sure to use
the same type of video cable for connecting your recorder
as you used to connect your video source (the one you
want to record) to this receiver. For example, you must
connect your recorder using Component video if your
source has also been connected using Component video.
HDMI OUT
AUDIO
INFO
DISP
CH
1
2
3
SIGNAL SEL MCACC
SLEEP
RECEIVER
TV CTRL
4
5
6
REMOTE
SETUP
SBch
A.ATT
DIMMER
7
8
9
D.ACCESS CH LEVEL
CLASS
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
MAIN
ENTER
0
RECEIVER
, then press A.ATT to switch the
•
Press
input attenuator on or off.
Note
1 The volume levels of the main and sub zones are independent.
2 • You won’t be able to switch the main zone off completely unless you’ve switched off the MULTI-ZONE control first.
• If you don’t plan to use the MULTI-ZONE feature for a while, turn off the power in both the sub and main rooms so that this receiver is in
standby.
3 • The receiver’s volume, Audio parameters (the tone controls, for example), and surround effects have no effect on the recorded signal.
• Some digital sources are copy-protected, and can only be recorded in analog.
• Some video sources are copy-protected. These cannot be recorded.
4 The attenuator isn’t available with digital sources, or when using the Stream Direct (ANALOG DIRECT) modes.
64
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using other functions
Using the sleep timer
08
Switching the HDMI output
The sleep timer switches the receiver into standby after a
specified amount of time so you can fall asleep without
worrying about the receiver being left on all night. Use
the remote control to set the sleep timer.
Set which terminal to use when outputting video and
audio signals from the HDMI output terminals (HDMI
OUT ALL, HDMI OUT 1 or HDMI OUT 2).
The HDMI OUT1 terminal is compatible with the KURO
LINK function.
HDMI OUT
AUDIO
INFO
DISP
CH
1
2
3
HDMI OUT
SIGNAL SEL MCACC
SLEEP
AUDIO
INFO
DISP
CH
RECEIVER
TV CTRL
1
2
3
4
5
6
REMOTE
SETUP
SIGNAL SEL MCACC
SLEEP
RECEIVER
SBch
A.ATT
DIMMER
TV CTRL
4
5
6
7
8
9
REMOTE
SETUP
SBch
A.ATT
DIMMER
D.ACCESS CH LEVEL
CLASS
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
MAIN
ENTER
7
8
9
0
D.ACCESS CH LEVEL
CLASS
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
MAIN
ENTER
0
RECEIVER
, then press SLEEP repeatedly to set
•
Press
the sleep time.
•
Press RECEIVER , then press HDMI OUT
Please wait a while when Please wait ... is displayed.
The output switches among HDMI OUT ALL HDMI OUT 1
.
30 min
Off
60 min
90 min
,
2
and HDMI OUT 2 each time the button is pressed.
• You can check the remaining sleep time at any time
by pressing SLEEP once. Pressing repeatedly will
cycle through the sleep options again.
Checking your system settings
1
Use the status display screen to check your current
settings for features such as surround back channel
processing and your current MCACC preset.
Dimming the display
THX
TV/DTV
AUDIO
PHASE CTRL
STATUS
You can choose between four brightness levels for the
front panel display. Note that when selecting sources, the
display automatically brightens for a few seconds.
MPX
PQLS
INFO
DISP
CH
HDMI OUT
AUDIO
INFO
DISP
CH
RECEIVER
TV CTRL
1
2
3
SIGNAL SEL MCACC
SLEEP
RECEIVER
TV CTRL
4
5
6
REMOTE
SETUP
SBch
A.ATT
DIMMER
RECEIVER
system settings.
These appear on the front panel display.
1
Press
, then press STATUS to check the
7
8
9
D.ACCESS CH LEVEL
CLASS
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
3
MAIN
ENTER
0
The front panel display shows each of the following
settings for three seconds each:
Input function
RECEIVER
, then press DIMMER repeatedly to
change the brightness of the front panel display.
•
Press
↓
Sampling Frequency
↓
Surround Back channel Processing
↓
MCACC preset
↓
ZONE 2 input
↓
ZONE 3 input
↓
KURO LINK
↓
HDMI OUT
2
When you’re finished, press STATUS again to
switch off the display.
Note
1 • You can also switch off the sleep timer simply by switching off the receiver.
• The sleep timer is valid for all zones. If any zone is on, the sleep timer continues functioning.
2 • Synchronized amp mode on page 59 is canceled when the HDMI output is switched. If you wish to use the synchronized amp mode, switch
to HDMI OUT 1, then select the synchronized amp mode on the flat screen TV using the flat screen TV’s remote control.
• When the power is turned off then back on after switching the HDMI output, the input is set to a setting between HDMI1 and HDMI3, or BD.
3 If the Pure Direct mode is switched on, some settings above will show OFF, even though they are on.
65
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using other functions
Resetting the system
08
Setting
Default
DSP
Surround back channel Processing
ON
Use this procedure to reset all the receiver’s settings to
the factory default. Use the front panel controls to do this.
Set MULTI-ZONE to OFF.
Phase Control
ON
iPod/USB function
Sound Retriever
ON
• Disconnect the iPod and USB memory device from
Other functions
OFF
the receiver beforehand.
Sound Delay
Dual Mono
DRC
0.0 frame
CH1
1
2
Switch the receiver into standby.
AUTO
While holding down ENTER on the front panel,
SACD Gain
LFE Attenuate
Auto delay
Up Mix
0 dB
press STANDBY/ON
.
0 dB
The display shows RESET NO .
OFF
3
Select ‘RESET’ using PRESET +/–, then press ENTER
on the front panel.
The display shows RESET? OK.
ON
Digital Safety
Effect Level
OFF
ExtendedStereo
Other modes
Center Width
Dimension
90
4
Press ENTER to confirm.
OK appears in the display to indicate that the receiver
has been reset to the factory default settings.
50
2 PL II Music
Options
3
0
• Note that all settings will be saved, even if the
receiver is unplugged.
Panorama
OFF
Neo:6 Options
Center Image
Neo:6 MUSIC: 3
Neo:6 CINEMA: 10
Default system settings
Setting
All Inputs
Listening Mode
(2 ch)
AUTO
SURROUND
Default
ON
Digital Video Conversion
SPEAKERS
Listening Mode
(x ch)
AUTO
SURROUND
A
Surround Back System
Normal
SMALL
SMALL
SMALL
SMALLx2
YES
Listening Mode (HP) STEREO
Speaker System
Front
See also Setting the Audio options on page 60 for other default
DSP settings.
Center
Surr
SB
MCACC
MCACC Position Memory
Channel Level (M1 to M6)
Speaker Distance (M1 to M6)
M1: MEMORY 1
0.0 dB
SW
3.00 m
Crossover
X-Curve
80 Hz
Standing Wave
(M1 to M6)
ATT of all channels/ 0.0 dB
filters
OFF
THX Audio Setting
DIMMER
1.2 m<
Medium bright
SWch Wide Trim
0.0 dB
EQ Data (M1 to M6)
All channels/bands 0.0 dB
EQ Wide Trim 0.0 dB
Inputs
See Input function default and possible settings on page 41.
MULTI-ZONE
ZONE 2/3 Volume Level
ZONE 2/3 Volume
HDMI
Variable
–60 dB
HDMI Audio
Amp
HDMI output
KURO LINK
HDMI OUT ALL
ON
66
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling the rest of your system
09
Chapter 9:
Controlling the rest of your system
Operating multiple receivers
Setting the remote to control other
components
The remote control included with this receiver can be
used to operate up to three other receivers (of the same
model as this receiver) in addition to this receiver. The
receiver to be operated is switched by inputting the
preset code to set the remote control setting.
Most components can be assigned to one of the input
function buttons (such as DVD or CD) using the
component’s manufacturer preset code stored in the
remote.
• Set the remote modes on the receivers before using
this function (see Remote Control Mode Setup on
page 90).
However, there are cases where only certain functions
may be controllable after assigning the proper preset
code, or the codes for the manufacturer in the remote
control will not work for the model that you are using.
HDMI OUT
AUDIO
INFO
DISP
CH
1
2
3
SIGNAL SEL MCACC
SLEEP
RECEIVER
TV CTRL
4
5
6
Note
REMOTE
SETUP
SBch
A.ATT
DIMMER
7
8
9
• You can cancel or exit any of the steps by pressing
D.ACCESS CH LEVEL
CLASS
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
MAIN
. To go back a step, press RETURN.
RECEIVER
ENTER
0
• After one minute of inactivity, the remote
automatically exits the operation.
1
2
3
Check the operation selector switch to MAIN
RECEIVER
.
Press
.
Press and hold REMOTE SETUP, then release it after
Selecting preset codes directly
the LED flashes twice.
1
Press the input function button for the component
4
Use the number buttons to enter the 5-digit preset
you want to control.1
code (see below).
When assigning preset codes to TV CONTROL, press TV
CTRL here.
• Receiver 1: 6 1 9 3 5 (Default)
• Receiver 2: 6 2 6 3 0
• Receiver 3: 6 2 6 3 1
• Receiver 4: 6 2 6 3 2
2
Press and hold REMOTE SETUP, then release it after
the LED flashes twice.
3
Use the number buttons to enter the 5-digit preset
When the preset code is fully input, the LED flashes once
to indicate that the setting is completed.
code.
See Preset code list on page 105.
To operate another receiver, start over from step 1 to
input its preset code.
When the preset code is fully input, the LED flashes once
to indicate that the setting is completed.
4
Repeat steps 1 through 3 for the other components
you want to control.
To try out the remote control, switch the component on or
off (into standby) by pressing SOURCE. If it doesn’t
seem to work, select the next code from the list (if there
is one).
Note
1 You can’t assign RECEIVER , TUNER or iPod/USB.
67
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling the rest of your system
Resetting the remote control presets
09
Controls the components
This will erase all preset remote control preset codes and
This remote control can control components after
entering the proper codes (see Setting the remote to
control other components on page 67 for more on this).
Use the input function buttons to select the component.
programmed buttons.
1
2
3
Check the operation selector switch to MAIN
Press RECEIVER
Press and hold REMOTE SETUP, then release it after
.
.
• The TV CONTROL buttons on the remote control are
dedicated to control the TV assigned to the TV CTRL
button. If you have two TVs, assign the main TV to the
TV CTRL button.
the LED flashes twice.
4
Use the number buttons to enter 9, 8, 1.
The LED flashes four times to indicate that the resetting
RECEIVER
SOURCE
is completed.
DVD
TV
BD
CD
DVR
HDMI
Default preset codes
Input function button Preset code
CD-R
VIDEO
DVD
BD
3 1 5 7 1
3 2 4 4 2
2 2 3 0 6
3 2 4 4 2
1 3 0 0 0
7 0 4 6 8
7 1 0 8 7
2 0 0 5 8
1 3 0 0 0
6 1 9 3 5
iPod USB TUNER INPUT SELECT
HDMI OUT
DVR
HDMI
TV
1
2
3
SIGNAL SEL MCACC
SLEEP
4
5
6
SBch
A.ATT
DIMMER
7
8
9
CD
D.ACCESS CH LEVEL
CLASS
ENTER
0
INPUT
CD-R
VIDEO
TV CTRL
MASTER
VOLUME
TV CONTROL
CH
VOL
RECEIVER
MUTE
AUDIO
PARAMETER
VIDEO
PARAMETER
LIST
TUNE TOOLS
TOP MENU
BAND
T.EDIT
GUIDE
PRESET
ENTER
PRESET
RETURN
PTY
SEARCH
HOME
MENU
TUNE
iPod CTRL
AUTO/ALC/
DIRECT
MENU
STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR
DVD
HDD
THX
PHASE CTRL
STATUS
TV/DTV
AUDIO
MPX
PQLS
INFO
DISP
CH
RECEIVER
TV CTRL
REMOTE
SETUP
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
MAIN
RECEIVER
68
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling the rest of your system
09
Button(s)
TV
TV (Monitor)
BD/DVD
HDD/DVR
VCR
SAT/CATV
SOURCE
POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF
Number buttons numerics
numerics
numerics
CLEAR
numerics
+
numerics
numerics
• (dot)
• (dot)
KURO LINK
CH ENTER
-
-
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
(CLASS)
EXIT/INFO
EXIT
TOP MENU
TOOLS
TOP MENU
GUIDE
-
-
LIST
TOOLS/GUIDE/
EPG
USER MENU
GUIDE
///
///
ENTER
///
ENTER
///
ENTER
///
ENTER
-
-
-
///
ENTER
ENTER
HOME MENU
HOME MENU
HOME MENU
HOME MENU
HOME / MENU
RETURN
RETURN
RETURN
RETURN
-
RETURN
HDD (Red)
DVD (Green)
(Yellow)
(Blue)
Red
Red
-
HDD
DVD
VCR
MENU
-
Red
Green
Green
-
-
Green
Yellow
Blue
Yellow
Yellow
-
-
Blue
Blue
MENU
-
-
-
-
AUTO SETUP
-
FREEZE
-
-
AUDIO
DISPLAY
-
AUDIO
DISPLAY
CH+/
-
-
-
TV/DTV
-
AV SELECTION
SCREEN SIZE
AUDIO
-
-
AUDIO
DISP
AUDIO
DISPLAY
CH+/
-
AUDIO
AUDIO
DISPLAY/INFO
CH+/
RECORD
DISPLAY
CH+/
-
CH +/–
+
CH+/
-
-
-
69
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling the rest of your system
09
Button(s)
LD
CD/CD-R/SACD
MD/DAT
TAPE
Button(s)
TV (Projector)
POWER ON
MOVIE
SOURCE
POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF
SOURCE
Number buttons numerics
numerics
numerics
-
1
b
• (dot)
+10
>10/CLEAR
DISK/ENTER
CLEAR
CLEAR
ENTER
2
STANDARD
DYNAMIC
USER1
b
ENTER
(CLASS)
ENTER
OPEN/CLOSE
3
4
TOP MENU
-
-
-
-
MS
5
USER2
6
USER3
a
MS
LEGATO LINK
7
COLOR+
SHARP+
GAMMA
COLOR
///
///
-
-
-
-
///
8
ENTER
ENTER
-
-
-
9
a
SACD SETUP
-
0
• (dot)
SHARP
RETURN
-
-
-
ENTER (CLASS) COLOR TEMP
EXIT
INFO
AUDIO
DISP
-
-
///
///
ENTER
ENTER
TEST
a
HIDE
AUDIO
DISPLAY/INFO
PURE AUDIO
a
TIME
-
-
MENU
a. Controls for SACD.
b. Controls for MD.
HDMI1
HDMI2
COMP.
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
BRIGHT
BRIGHT+
POWER OFF
ASPECT
CONTRAST+/
AUDIO
DISP
CH +/–
70
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Advanced MCACC menu
10
Chapter 10:
The Advanced MCACC menu
3
Select ‘Advanced MCACC’ from the HOME MENU,
then press ENTER
.
Making receiver settings from the
Advanced MCACC menu
HOME MENU
A/V RECEIVER
1. Advanced MCACC
2. MCACC Data Check
3. Data Management
4. System Setup
The Advanced MCACC (Multi Channel ACoustic
Calibration) system was developed in Pioneer’s
laboratories with the aim of making it possible for home
users to perform adjustments of the same level as in a
studio easily and with high precision. The acoustic
characteristics of the listening environment are
measured and the frequency response is calibrated
accordingly to allow high precision, automatic analysis
and optimal calibration of the sound field to bring it
closer to a studio environment than ever before.
Furthermore, while it was previously difficult to eliminate
standing waves, this receiver is equipped with a standing
wave control function using a unique process to perform
acoustic analysis and reduce their influence.
Exit
Return
4
Select the setting you want to adjust.
1.Advanced MCACC
A/V RECEIVER
a. Full Auto MCACC
b. Auto MCACC
c. Manual MCACC
d. Demo
Exit
Return
This section describes how to calibrate the sound field
automatically and fine-adjust the sound field data
manually.
• Full Auto MCACC – See Automatically setting up for
surround sound (Auto MCACC) on page 39 for a quick
and effective automatic surround setup.
AUDIO
PARAMETER
VIDEO
PARAMETER
TV/DTV
MPX
PQLS
RECEIVER
SOURCE
LIST
TUNE TOOLS
AUDIO
INFO
DISP
CH
• Auto MCACC – See Automatic MCACC (Expert) on
TOP MENU
BAND
T.EDIT
GUIDE
DVD
TV
BD
CD
DVR
HDMI
page 72 for a more detailed MCACC setup.
RECEIVER
TV CTRL
PRESET
ENTER
TUNE
PRESET
RETURN
CD-R
VIDEO
REMOTE
SETUP
• Manual MCACC – Fine-tunes your speaker settings
and customize the Acoustic Calibration EQ (see
Manual MCACC setup on page 74).
PTY
SEARCH
iPod USB TUNER INPUT SELECT
HOME
MENU
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
MAIN
iPod CTRL
• Demo – No settings are saved and no errors occur.
When the speakers are connected to this receiver,
the test tone is output repeatedly. Press RETURN to
cancel the test tone.
1
Switch on the receiver and your TV.
1
Use RECEIVER to switch on.
• If headphones are connected to the receiver,
disconnect them.
2
Press
on the remote control, then press
RECEIVER
HOME MENU 2
.
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your
TV. Use /// and ENTER to navigate through the
screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to
confirm and exit the current menu.
• Press HOME MENU at any time to exit the HOME
MENU.
Note
1 Make sure not to switch off the power when using the HOME MENU.
2 You can’t use the HOME MENU when the iPod/USB input function is selected (in either the main or sub zone). When you set ZONE 2, ZONE
3 or ZONE 2&3 to ON (page 63), you can’t use the HOME MENU.
71
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Advanced MCACC menu
Automatic MCACC (Expert)
10
2
Select the parameters you want to set.
Use / to select the item, then use / to set.
If your setup requires more detailed settings than those
provided in Automatically setting up for surround sound
(Auto MCACC) on page 39, you can customize your setup
options below. You can calibrate your system differently
1b.Auto MCACC
A/V RECEIVER
1b.Auto MCACC
A/V RECEIVER
ALL
Speaker Setting
ALL
Speaker Setting
Channel Level
Speaker Distance
EQ Pro & S-Wave
Channel Level
SYMMETRY
ALL CH ADJ
:
:
M1.MEMORY 1
M2.MEMORY 2
Speaker Distance
EQ Pro & S-Wave
SYMMETRY
ALL CH ADJ
:
:
M1.MEMORY 1
M2.MEMORY 2
FRONT ALIGH: M3.MEMORY 3
FRONT ALIGH: M3.MEMORY 3
THX Speaker
:
NO
THX Speaker
:
NO
1
for up to six different MCACC presets , which are useful
START
START
if you have different listening positions depending on the
Exit
Return
Exit
Return
type of source (for example, watching movies from a sofa,
2
or playing a video game close to the TV).
• Auto MCACC – The default is ALL (recommended),
but you can limit the system calibration to only one
Important
4
setting (to save time) if you want. The available
5
options are ALL, Keep SP System, Speaker
• Make sure the microphone/speakers are not moved
Setting, Channel Level, Speaker Distance and EQ
Pro & S-Wave.
during the Auto MCACC Setup.
• Using the Auto MCACC Setup will overwrite any
existing settings for the MCACC preset you select.
3
• EQ Type (only available when the Auto MCACC
Menu above is EQ Pro & S-Wave) – This determines
how the frequency balance is adjusted.
• The screen saver will automatically appear after five
minutes of inactivity.
After a single calibration is performed, each of the
following three correction curves can be stored
CAUTION
separately in the MCACC memory. SYMMETRY (default)
implements symmetric correction for each pair of left
and right speakers to flatten the frequency-amplitude
characteristics. ALL CH ADJ is a ‘flat’ setting where all
the speakers are set individually so no special weighting
• The test tones used in the Auto MCACC Setup are
output at high volume.
®
THX
6
is given to any one channel. FRONT ALIGN sets all
THX is a trademark of THX Ltd., which may be registered
in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved.
speakers in accordance with the front speaker settings
(no equalization is applied to the front left and right
channels).
1
Select ‘Auto MCACC’ from the Advanced MCACC
• THX Speaker (only available when the Auto MCACC
Menu above is ALL or Speaker Setting) – Select YES
if you are using THX speakers (set all speakers to
SMALL), otherwise leave it set to NO.
menu, then press ENTER
.
If the Advanced MCACC screen is not displayed, refer to
Making receiver settings from the Advanced MCACC menu
on page 71.
• STAND.WAVE Multi-Point (only available when the
Auto MCACC Menu above is EQ Pro & S-Wave) – In
addition to measurements at the listening position,
you can use two more reference points for which test
tones will be analyzed for standing waves. This is
useful if you want to get a balanced ‘flat’ calibration
1.Advanced MCACC
1b.Auto MCACC
A/V RECEIVER
A/V RECEIVER
a. Full Auto MCACC
ALL
Speaker Setting
b. Auto MCACC
c. Manual MCACC
d. Demo
Channel Level
Speaker Distance
EQ Pro & S-Wave
SYMMETRY
ALL CH ADJ
:
:
M1.MEMORY 1
M2.MEMORY 2
FRONT ALIGH: M3.MEMORY 3
THX Speaker
:
NO
START
7
for several seating positions in your listening area.
Exit
Return
Exit
Return
Place the microphone at the reference point
indicated on-screen and note the last microphone
placement will be at your main listening position:
Note
1 These are stored in memory and referred to as MEMORY1 to MEMORY6 until you rename them in Data Management on page 82.
2 You may also want to have separate calibration settings for the same listening position, depending on how you’re using your system.
3 Except in cases where you are only adjusting one parameter (i.e. channel level) from the Auto MCACC menu (step 2).
4 • The EQ Pro & S-Wave measurement is also taken when Keep SP System or EQ Pro & S-Wave is selected. See Acoustic Calibration EQ
Professional on page 77 for more on this.
• Either effect of Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional and Standing Wave can be switched on and off in the respective MCACC preset. For
details, see Setting the Audio options on page 60.
5 The Keep SP System option allows you to calibrate your system while leaving your current speaker setting (page 85) unchanged.
6 If you selected ALL as your Auto MCACC menu, you can specify the MCACC preset where you want to save the ALL CH ADJ and FRONT
ALIGN settings.
7 Switch the Multi-Point setting NO if you only use one listening position.
72
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Advanced MCACC menu
10
6
Wait for the Auto MCACC Setup to finish
2nd reference
3rd reference
outputting test tones.
point
point
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the
receiver outputs test tones to determine the speakers
present in your setup. Try to be as quiet as possible while
it’s doing this.
1
2
3
Main listening
position
• Do not adjust the volume during the test tones. This
may result in incorrect speaker settings.
• With error messages (such as Too much ambient
noise! or Check microphone) select RETRY after
checking for ambient noise (see Problems when
using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 40) and
verifying the mic connection. If there doesn’t seem to
be a problem, you can simply select GO NEXT and
continue.
3
Connect the microphone to the MCACC SETUP MIC
jack on the front panel.
• Push down on the PUSH OPEN tab to access the
MCACC SETUP MIC jack.
Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers
and the microphone.
MASTER
VOLUME
7
If necessary, confirm the speaker configuration in
the GUI screen.2
The configuration shown on-screen should reflect the
actual speakers you have.
VIDEO CAMERA
If no operations are performed for 10 seconds while the
speaker configuration check screen is being displayed,
the Auto MCACC Setup will resume automatically. In this
case, you don’t need to select ‘OK’ and press ENTER in
step 8.
iPod
iPhone
MCACC SETUP MIC
USB
HDMI
4
1b.Auto MCACC
A/V RECEIVER
1b.Auto MCACC
A/V RECEIVER
Now Analyzing...
2/10
L
C
R
SR
SBR
SBL
SL
SW
10
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
If you have a tripod, use it to place the microphone so that
it’s about ear level at your normal listening position. If you
do not have a tripod, use some other object to install the
Environment Check
Ambient Noise
Microphone
:
:
:
OK
Speaker YES/NO
OK
RETRY
1
microphone.
Exit
Cancel
Exit
Cancel
4
When you’re finished setting the options, select
• If you see an ERR message (or the speaker
configuration displayed isn’t correct), there may be a
problem with the speaker connection.
If selecting RETRY doesn’t work, turn off the power
and check the speaker connections. If there doesn’t
seem to be a problem, you can simply use / to
select the speaker and / to change the setting
and continue.
START then press ENTER
.
5
Follow the instructions on-screen.
• Make sure the microphone is connected.
• If you’re using a subwoofer, it is automatically
detected every time you switch on the system. Make
sure it is on and the volume is turned up.
• See Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on
page 40 for notes regarding high background noise
levels and other possible interference.
• If Reverse Phase is displayed, the speaker’s wiring
(+ and –) may be inverted. Check the speaker
3
connections.
– If the connections were wrong, turn off the power,
disconnect the power cord, then reconnect properly.
After this, perform the Full Auto MCACC procedure
again.
– If the connections were right, select GO NEXT and
continue.
Note
1 It may not be possible to measure correctly if the microphone is placed on a table, sofa, etc.
2 This screen is only shown if you selected ALL or Speaker Setting from the Auto MCACC menu.
3 If the speaker is not pointed to the microphone (listening position) or when using speakers that affect the phase (dipole speakers, reflective
speakers, etc.), Reverse Phase may be displayed even if the speakers are properly connected.
73
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Advanced MCACC menu
10
8
Make sure ‘OK’ is selected, then press ENTER
.
Press RETURN after you have finished checking each
screen. When you’re finished, select RETURN to go back
to the HOME MENU.
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the
receiver outputs more test tones to determine the
optimum receiver settings for channel level, speaker
distance, and Acoustic Calibration EQ.
Be sure to disconnect the microphone from this receiver
upon completion of the Auto MCACC Setup.
1b.Auto MCACC
A/V RECEIVER
1b.Auto MCACC
A/V RECEIVER
Now Analyzing...
Now Analyzing...
5/10
Manual MCACC setup
Surround Analysis
Speaker System
Channel Level
Speaker Distance
Standing Wave
Reverb
Subwoofer Check
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
OK
You can use the settings in the Manual MCACC setup
menu to make detailed adjustments when you’re more
familiar with the system. Before making these settings,
you should have already completed Automatically setting
up for surround sound (Auto MCACC) on page 39.
Aco Cal EQ Pro
Exit
Cancel
Exit
Cancel
Again, try to be as quiet as possible while this is
happening. It may take 3 to 7 minutes.
You only need to make these settings once (unless you
change the placement of your current speaker system or
add new speakers).
• If you selected a STAND.WAVE Multi-Point setup
(in step 2), you will be asked to place the mic at the
2nd and 3rd reference points before finally placing it
at your main listening position.
CAUTION
• The test tones used in the Manual MCACC setup are
output at high volume.
9
The Auto MCACC Setup procedure is completed and
the Advanced MCACC menu reappears automatically.
The settings made in the Auto MCACC Setup should give
you excellent surround sound from your system, but it is
also possible to adjust these settings manually using the
Manual MCACC setup menu (starting below) or Manual
Important
• You will need to first specify the MCACC preset you
want to adjust by pressing MCACC before pressing
HOME MENU (step 2 in Making receiver settings from
the Advanced MCACC menu on page 71).
1
SP Setup menu (starting on page 84).
You can also choose to view the settings by selecting
individual parameters from the MCACC Data Check
screen:
• For some of the settings below, you’ll have to connect
the setup microphone to the front panel and place it
about ear level at your normal listening position.
Press HOME MENU to display the HOME MENU
before you connect the microphone to this receiver. If
the microphone is connected while the HOME
MENU is not being displayed, the display will change
to the Full Auto MCACC under Advanced MCACC.
• Speaker Setting – The size and number of speakers
you’ve connected (see page 85 for more on this)
• Channel Level – The overall balance of your speaker
system (see page 75 or 86 for more on this)
• Speaker Distance – The distance of your speakers
from the listening position (see page 75 or 87 for
2
more on this)
• See Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on
page 40 for notes regarding high background noise
levels and other possible interference.
• Standing Wave – Filter settings to control lower
‘boomy’ frequencies (see page 76 for more on this)
• If you’re using a subwoofer, switch it on and turn up
the volume to the middle position.
• Acoustic Cal EQ – Adjustments to the frequency
balance of your speaker system based on the
acoustic characteristics of your room (see page 77
for more on this)
• Output PC – The data transfer mode with the
connected computer is set. The graphs of the reverb
characteristics before and after calibration and the
various MCACC parameters can be checked (see
Output PC on page 81 for more on this).
Note
1 • Depending on the characteristics of your room, sometimes identical speakers with cone sizes of around 12 cm will end up with different size
settings. You can correct the setting manually using the Manual speaker setup on page 84.
• The subwoofer distance setting may be farther than the actual distance from the listening position. This setting should be accurate (taking
delay and room characteristics into account) and generally does not need to be changed.
• If Auto MCACC Setup measurement results are incorrect due to the interaction of the speakers and viewing environment, we recommend
adjusting the settings manually.
2 Since the distance measurements have been set according to the sound characteristics of your speakers, there are cases where (for optimal
surround sound) the actual distance may differ from the speaker distance setting.
74
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Advanced MCACC menu
10
1
Select ‘Manual MCACC’ from the Advanced
1
Select ‘Fine Channel Level’ from the Manual
MCACC menu.
MCACC setup menu.
See Making receiver settings from the Advanced MCACC
menu on page 71 if you’re not already at this screen.
The volume increases to the 0.0 dB reference level.
1c.Manual MCACC
1c1.Fine Channel Level
A/V RECEIVER
A/V RECEIVER
1.Advanced MCACC
1c.Manual MCACC
1. Fine Channel Level
A/V RECEIVER
A/V RECEIVER
2. Fine SP Distance
3. Standing Wave
4. EQ Adjust
CAUTION
a. Full Auto MCACC
1. Fine Channel Level
Loud test tones will be output.
b. Auto MCACC
c. Manual MCACC
d. Demo
2. Fine SP Distance
3. Standing Wave
4. EQ Adjust
5. EQ Professional
Please wait...**
5. EQ Professional
Exit
Return
Exit
Cancel
Exit
Return
Exit
Return
2
Adjust the level of the left channel.
2
Select the setting you want to adjust.
This will be the reference speaker level, so you may want
to keep the level around 0.0dB so that you’ll have plenty
of room to adjust the other speaker levels.
If you’re doing this for the first time, you might want to
make these settings in order.
• Fine Channel Level – Make fine adjustments to the
overall balance of your speaker system (see Fine
Channel Level below).
1c1.Fine Channel Level
A/V RECEIVER
MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1
Reference Ch
Ref.Ch Level
:
:
L
0.0 dB
• Fine SP Distance – Make precise delay settings for
your speaker system (see Fine Speaker Distance
below).
Exit
Cancel
• Standing Wave – Control overly resonant low
frequencies in your listening room (see Standing
Wave on page 76).
• After pressing ENTER, test tones will be output.
3
Select each channel in turn and adjust the levels (+/
The last two settings are specifically for customizing the
parameters explained in Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust
on page 77:
–10.0 dB) as necessary.
Use / to adjust the volume of the speaker you
selected to match the reference speaker. When it sounds
like both tones are the same volume, press to confirm
and continue to the next channel.
• EQ Adjust – Manually adjust the frequency balance
of your speaker system while listening to test tones
(see Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust on page 77).
1c1.Fine Channel Level
A/V RECEIVER
• EQ Professional – Calibrate your system based on
the direct sound coming from the speakers and make
detailed settings according to your room’s reverb
characteristics (see Acoustic Calibration EQ
Professional on page 77).
R <=>
:
L
L
0.0 dB
R
C
SL
SR
SBL
SBR
SW
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
0.0 dB
0.0 dB
0.0 dB
0.0 dB
0.0 dB
0.0 dB
0.0 dB
Exit
Finish
Fine Channel Level
• Default setting: 0.0dB (all channels)
• For comparison purposes, the reference speaker will
You can achieve better surround sound by properly
adjusting the overall balance of your speaker system. You
can adjust the Channel Level of each speaker in 0.5 dB
increments. The following setting can help you make
detailed adjustments that you may not achieve using the
Manual speaker setup on page 84.
change depending on which speaker you select.
• If you want to go back and adjust a channel, simply
use / to select it.
4
When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.
Fine Speaker Distance
• Default setting: 3.00m (all speakers)
For proper sound depth and separation with your system,
it is necessary to add a slight bit of delay to some
speakers so that all sounds will arrive at the listening
position at the same time. You can adjust the distance of
each speaker in 1 cm increments. The following setting
can help you make detailed adjustments that you may
not achieve using the Manual speaker setup on page 84.
75
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Advanced MCACC menu
10
1
Select ‘Fine SP Distance’ from the Manual MCACC
Standing Wave
2
setup menu.
• Default setting: ON /ATT 0.0dB (all filters)
Acoustic standing waves occur when, under certain
conditions, sound waves from your speaker system
resonate mutually with sound waves reflected off the
walls in your listening area. This can have a negative
effect on the overall sound, especially at certain lower
frequencies. Depending on speaker placement, your
listening position, and ultimately the shape of your room,
it results in an overly resonant (‘boomy’) sound. The
Standing Wave Control uses filters to reduce the effect of
overly resonant sounds in your listening area. During
playback of a source, you can customize the filters used
for Standing Wave Control for each of your MCACC
1c.Manual MCACC
1c2.Fine SP Distance
A/V RECEIVER
A/V RECEIVER
1. Fine Channel Level
MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1
2. Fine SP Distance
3. Standing Wave
4. EQ Adjust
Reference Ch
Ref.Ch Distance
:
:
L
3.61m
5. EQ Professional
Exit
Return
Exit
Cancel
2
Adjust the distance of the left channel from the
listening position.
3
Select each channel in turn and adjust the distance
as necessary.
Use / to adjust the delay of the speaker you selected
to match the reference speaker. The delay is measured in
terms of speaker distance from 0.01m to 9.00m.
3
presets.
1
Select ‘Standing Wave’ from the Manual MCACC
setup menu.
1c2.Fine SP Distance
A/V RECEIVER
1c.Manual MCACC
A/V RECEIVER
1c3.Standing Wave
A/V RECEIVER
R <=>
:
L
Filter 1 Filter 2
Filter 3
Freq ATT Freq ATT Freq ATT TRIM
1. Fine Channel Level
Filter
Q
Q
Q
L
3.61m
2. Fine SP Distance
3. Standing Wave
4. EQ Adjust
Channel
[Hz] [dB] [Hz] [dB] [Hz]
[dB] [dB]
SW
63 5.0 10 120 5.0 10 201 5.0 10 +10.0
R
C
SL
SR
SBL
SBR
SW
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
3.67m
3.69m
2.26m
2.74m
5.13m
5.77m
3.54m
dB
0
5. EQ Professional
MCACC
M1.MEMORY1
5
10
16
32
63
125
250
500
1k Hz
Exit
Finish
Exit
Return
Exit
Finish
Listen to the reference speaker and use it to measure the
target channel. From the listening position, face the two
speakers with your arms outstretched pointing at each
speaker. Try to make the two tones sound as if they are
arriving simultaneously at a position slightly in front of
2
Adjust the parameters for the Standing Wave
Control.
• Filter Channel – Select the channel to which you will
apply the filter(s): MAIN (all except center channel
and subwoofer), Center or SW (subwoofer).
1
you and between your arm span.
• TRIM (only available when the filter channel above is
SW) – Adjust the subwoofer channel level (to
compensate for the difference in output post-filter).
• Freq / Q / ATT – These are the filter parameters where
Freq represents the frequency you will be targeting
and Q is the bandwidth (the higher the Q, the
narrower the bandwidth, or range) of the attenuation
(ATT, the amount of reduction to the targeted
frequency).
When it sounds like the delay settings are matched up,
press to confirm and continue to the next channel.
• For comparison purposes, the reference speaker will
change depending on which speaker you select.
3
When you’re finished, press RETURN
.
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.
• If you want to go back and adjust a channel, simply
use / to select it.
4
When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.
Note
1 • If you can’t seem to achieve this by adjusting the distance setting, you may need to change the angle of your speakers very slightly.
• For better audibility, the subwoofer emits a continuous test tone (oscillating pulses are heard from your other speakers). Note that it may be
difficult to compare this tone with the other speakers in your setup (depending on the low frequency response of the reference speaker).
2 You can switch on or off the Standing Wave and Acoustic Calibration EQ feature in the AUDIO PARAMETER menu. See Setting the Audio
options on page 60 for more on this.
3 • Since they will be overwritten, you may want to save the standing wave settings made with the Auto MCACC Setup to another MCACC preset.
• Standing Wave control filter settings cannot be changed during playback of sources using the HDMI connection.
• When Standing Wave is selected for an MCACC preset memory where STAND.WAVE is set to OFF in the AUDIO PARAMETER,
STAND.WAVE ON is automatically selected.
76
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Advanced MCACC menu
10
Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust
Tip
1
• Default setting: ON /0.0dB (all channels/bands)
• Changing the frequency curve of one channel too
drastically will affect the overall balance. If the speaker
balance seems uneven, you can raise or lower channel
levels using test tones with the TRIM feature. Use /
Acoustic Calibration Equalization is a kind of room
equalizer for your speakers (excluding the subwoofer). It
works by measuring the acoustic characteristics of your
room and neutralizing the ambient characteristics that
can color the original source material (providing a ‘flat’
equalization setting). If you’re not satisfied with the
adjustment provided in Automatically setting up for
surround sound (Auto MCACC) on page 39 or Automatic
MCACC (Expert) on page 72, you can also adjust these
settings manually to get a frequency balance that suits
your tastes.
to select TRIM, then use / to raise or lower the
channel level for the current speaker.
3
When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.
Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional
This setup minimizes the unwanted effects of room
reverberation by allowing you to calibrate your system
based on the direct sound coming from the speakers. It
can also provide you with a graphical output of the
1
Select ‘EQ Adjust’ from the Manual MCACC setup
menu.
1c.Manual MCACC
A/V RECEIVER
2
frequency response of your room.
1. Fine Channel Level
2. Fine SP Distance
3. Standing Wave
4. EQ Adjust
How to use Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional
If you find that lower frequencies seem overly reverberant
in your listening room (i.e. it sounds ‘boomy’), or that
different channels seem to exhibit different reverb
characteristics, select EQ Pro. & S-Wave (or ALL) for the
Auto MCACC setting in Automatic MCACC (Expert) on
page 72 to calibrate the room automatically. This should
provide a balanced calibration that suits the
5. EQ Professional
Exit
Return
2
Select the channel(s) you want and adjust to your
liking.
characteristics of your listening room.
1c4.EQ Adjust
A/V RECEIVER
dB
If you still aren’t satisfied with the results, the manual
Advanced EQ Setup (below) provides a more
customized calibration of your system using the direct
sound of the speakers. This is done with the help of a
graphical output that can be displayed on-screen, or
using a computer (with software available from Pioneer
— see Output PC on page 81).
Ch :
L
0.0 -8.0 -6.0 0.0 +3.0 +8.5 +8.5 +3.0 0.0 0.0
MCACC
M1.MEMORY1
63 125 250 500 1k 8k 16k TRIM
2k
4k
[Hz] [Hz] [Hz] [Hz] [Hz] [Hz] [Hz] [Hz] [Hz]
Exit
Finish
Use / to select the channel.
How to interpret the graphical output
Use / to select the frequency and / to boost or
cut the EQ. When you’re finished, go back to the top of
the screen and press to return to Ch, then use / to
select the channel.
The graph shows decibels on the vertical axis and time (in
milliseconds) on the horizontal axis. A straight line
indicates a flat-response room (no reverb), whereas a
sloping line indicates the presence of reverberation when
outputting test tones. The sloping line will eventually
flatten out when the reverberant sound stabilizes (this
usually takes about 100 ms or so).
• The OVER! indicator shows in the display if the
frequency adjustment is too drastic and might
distort. If this happens, bring the level down until
OVER! disappears from the display.
By analyzing the graph, you should be able to see how
your room is responding to certain frequencies.
Differences in channel level and speaker distance are
taken into account automatically (compensation is
provided for comparison purposes), and the frequency
measurements can be examined both with and without
3
the equalization performed by this receiver.
Note
1 When EQ Adjust is selected for an MCACC preset memory where EQ is set to OFF in the AUDIO PARAMETER, EQ ON is automatically
selected.
2 This system allows you to customize your system calibration with the help of a graphical output that can be displayed on-screen, or using a
computer (with software available from Pioneer—see Output PC on page 81 for more on this).
3 Note that due to an effect known as ‘group delay’, lower frequencies will take longer to be generated than higher frequencies (this is most
obvious when comparing the frequencies at 0 ms). This initial slope is not a problem (i.e. excessive reverb) with your listening room.
77
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Advanced MCACC menu
10
channel frequencies/sounds.
Setting Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional
according to your room characteristics
Using the manual setup, you can set the time period at
which the frequency response is analyzed, pinpointing
the time that is best for system calibration with your
particular room characteristics.
Front L
Level
Front R
Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro.
calibration range
ConventionalMCACC
EQ calibration range
The graph below shows the difference between
conventional acoustic calibration and professional
calibration (the gray circle indicates the point where the
microphone captures sound during frequency analysis).
Time
0
80
160
(in msec)
If your room isn’t affected by the factors above, it is often
not necessary to make a 30~50ms setting. Later time
settings may provide a more detailed sound experience
with your speaker system. It is best to try and see what
works best for your particular room.
Level
Test tone
Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro.
calibration range
ConventionalMCACC
EQ calibration range
Note that changing the room (for example, moving
furniture or paintings) will affect the calibration results.
In such cases, you should recalibrate your system.
Time
(in msec)
0
80
160
As soon as audio is output from your speaker system, it
is influenced by room characteristics, such as walls,
furniture, and the dimensions of the room. The sooner
the frequency analysis, the less it is influenced by the
room. We recommend an earlier time setting of
30~50ms to compensate for two major factors that will
influence the sound of most rooms:
Using Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional
1
Select ‘EQ Professional’, then press ENTER.
1c.Manual MCACC
A/V RECEIVER
1c5.EQ Professional
A/V RECEIVER
1. Fine Channel Level
a. Reverb Measurement
2. Fine SP Distance
3. Standing Wave
4. EQ Adjust
b. Reverb View
c. Advanced EQ Setup
5. EQ Professional
• Reverberance of high vs. low frequencies –
Depending on your room, you may find that lower
frequencies seem overly reverberant compared to
higher frequencies (i.e. your room sounds ‘boomy’).
This may result in a skewed frequency analysis if the
measurement is done too late.
Exit
Return
Exit
Return
2
Select an option and press ENTER.
• Reverb Measurement – Use this to measure the
reverb characteristics before and after calibration.
(For graphical output using a PC, see Connecting a
PC for Advanced MCACC output on page 34 to
connect an RS-232C cable before selecting this
option.)
Low
frequencies
Level
High
frequencies
Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro.
calibration range
ConventionalMCACC
EQ calibration range
• Reverb View – You can check the reverb
measurements made for specified frequency ranges
in each channel. This can also be used to compare
Time
(in msec)
1
0
80
160
the reverb characteristics before and after
calibration.
• Reverb characteristics for different channels –
Reverb characteristics can be somewhat different for
each channel. Since this difference increases as the
sound is influenced by the various room
2
characteristics, it is often better to capture a
frequency analysis early on for smoother mixing of
Note
1 If the Reverb View procedure is performed after the Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC) on page 39 or Reverb
Measurement operation, depending on the standing wave control setting, differences may appear on the reverb graph. With the Auto MCACC
function, the reverberations are measured with the standing waves controlled, so the reverb characteristics graph shows the characteristics
with the effect of the standing waves eliminated. By contrast, the Reverb Measurement function measures the reverberations without
controlling the standing waves, so the graph indicates the reverb characteristics including the effect of the standing waves. If you wish to
check the reverb characteristics of the room itself (with the standing waves as such), we recommend using the Reverb Measurement
function.
2 The reverb characteristics after calibration can be displayed even after performing the Full Auto MCACC function (Automatically setting up
for surround sound (Auto MCACC) on page 39). In this case, the display shows the predicted reverb characteristics after calibration. If the
measurements are taken using the Reverb Measurement command (page 79) with the equalizer on, the actually measured reverb
characteristics after calibration are displayed.
78
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Advanced MCACC menu
10
• Advanced EQ Setup – Use this to select the time
period that will be used for frequency adjustment and
calibration, based on the reverb measurement of
your listening area. Note that customizing system
calibration using this setup will alter the settings you
made in Automatically setting up for surround sound
(Auto MCACC) on page 39 or Automatic MCACC
(Expert) on page 72 and is not necessary if you’re
satisfied with these settings.
The reverb characteristics are displayed when the Full
Auto MCACC or Reverb Measurement measurements
3
are conducted.
Use / to select the channel, frequency and
calibration setting you want to check. Use / to go
back and forth between the three. The reverb
characteristics graph before and after EQ calibration can
be displayed by selecting Calibration : Before / After.
4
Note that the markers on the vertical axis indicate
decibels in 2 dB steps.
3
If you selected ‘Reverb Measurement’, select EQ
ON or OFF, and then START
.
5
If ‘Advanced EQ Setup’ is selected, select the
MCACC memory to be stored, then enter the desired
1c5a.Reverb Measurement
A/V RECEIVER
time setting for calibration, and then select START
Based on the reverb measurement above, you can
choose the time period that will be used for the final
.
MCACC
:
M1.MEMORY 1
EQ OFF
Reverb Measure with :
frequency adjustment and calibration. Even though you
can make this setting without reverb measurement, it is
best to use the measurement results as a reference for
your time setting. For an optimal system calibration
based on the direct sound coming from the speakers, we
recommend using the 30-50ms setting.
START
Exit
Cancel
The following options determine how the reverb
characteristics of your listening area are displayed in
Reverb View and Output PC (see Connecting a PC for
Advanced MCACC output on page 34):
1c5c.Adv.EQ Setup
A/V RECEIVER
1c5c.Adv.EQ Setup
A/V RECEIVER
MCACC
Time Position
EQ Type
:
:
:
:
M1.MEMORY 1
30-50ms
SYMMETRY
NO
MCACC
Time Position
EQ Type
:
:
:
:
M1.MEMORY 1
30-50ms
SYMMETRY
NO
• EQ OFF – You will see the reverb characteristics of
your listening area without the equalization
performed by this receiver (before calibration).
STAND.WAVE Multi-Point
STAND.WAVE Multi-Point
START
START
• EQ ON – You will see the reverb characteristics of
Exit
Cancel
Exit
Cancel
your listening area with the equalization performed
1
by this receiver (after calibration). Note that the EQ
Use / to select the setting. Use / to switch
between them.
response may not appear entirely flat due to
adjustments necessary for your listening area.
2
Select the setting from the following time periods (in
milliseconds): 0-20ms, 10-30ms, 20-40ms, 30-50ms, 40-
60ms, 50-70ms and 60-80ms. This setting will be applied
to all channels during calibration.
When the reverb measurement is finished, you can select
Reverb View to see the results on-screen. See
Professional Calibration EQ graphical output on page 96
for troubleshooting information.
When you’re finished, select START. It will take about 2
to 4 minutes for the calibration to finish.
4
If you selected ‘Reverb View’, you can check the
reverb characteristics for each channel. Press RETURN
when you’re done.
After the Acoustic Calibration Equalization is set, you are
given the option to check the settings on-screen.
1c5b.Reverb View
A/V RECEIVER
Channel
Frequency
Calibration:
dB
:
:
Front
63Hz
After
M1.MEMORY 1
SYMMETRY
16 kHz
8 kHz
4 kHz
2 kHz
1 kHz
500 Hz
250 Hz
125 Hz
63 Hz
63.0
61.0
59.0
57.0
55.0
53.0
0
40
80
120
160 ms
Exit
Return
Note
1 • The calibration corresponding to the currently selected MCACC preset will be used when EQ ON is selected. To use another MCACC preset,
exit the HOME MENU and press MCACC to select it before pressing HOME MENU.
• The predicted reverb characteristics after calibration can be acquired with the Full Auto MCACC function (Automatically setting up for
surround sound (Auto MCACC) on page 39), but here the actually measured reverb characteristics after calibration can be acquired.
2 After auto calibration with EQ Type : SYMMETRY (Full Auto MCACC, etc.), the graph for the inferred reverb characteristics can be displayed
by selecting Reverb View. To display the actually measured reverb characteristics after EQ calibration, measure with EQ ON.
3 The After display when measurements have been made using the Full Auto MCACC or Auto MCACC (ALL) function shows the graph for the
inferred reverb characteristics after EQ Type : SYMMETRY calibration.
4 The reverb characteristics graph is overwritten each time the reverberations are measured. No Data is displayed if there is no reverb
characteristic data, for example before measurements have been taken.
79
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Advanced MCACC menu
Checking MCACC Data
10
Speaker Setting
Use this to display the speaker size and number of
speakers. See Speaker Setting on page 85 for more on this.
At the procedure of Automatically setting up for surround
sound (Auto MCACC) on page 39, the procedure of
Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 72 or after fine-
adjusting at Manual MCACC setup on page 74, you can
check your calibrated settings using the GUI screen or, if
a computer is connected, on the computer’s screen.
1
Select ‘Speaker Setting’ from the MCACC Data
Check menu.
2a.Speaker Setting
A/V RECEIVER
Front
Center
Surr
SB
:
:
:
:
:
LARGE
SMALL
SMALL
SMALL x 2
YES
RECEIVER
, then press HOME MENU.
SW
1
Press
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your
TV. Use /// and ENTER to navigate through the
screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to
confirm and exit the current menu.
Exit
Return
2
Select the channel you want to check.
2
Select ‘MCACC Data Check’ from the HOME
Use / to select the channel. The corresponding
channel on the layout diagram is highlighted.
MENU
.
HOME MENU
A/V RECEIVER
2.MCACC Data Check
A/V RECEIVER
Channel Level
Use this to display the level of the various channels. See
Channel Level on page 86 for more on this.
1. Advanced MCACC
2. MCACC Data Check
3. Data Management
4. System Setup
a. Speaker Setting
b. Channel Level
c. Speaker Distance
d. Standing Wave
e. Acoustic Cal EQ
f. Output PC
1
Select ‘Channel Level’ from the MCACC Data
Check menu.
Exit
Return
Exit
Return
2b.Channel Level
A/V RECEIVER
3
Select the setting you want to check.
MCACC
:
M1.MEMORY 1
• Speaker Setting – Used to check the settings of the
speaker systems. See Speaker Setting below for more
on this.
L
C
R
SR
SBR
SBL
SL
SW
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
0.0 dB
0.0 dB
0.0 dB
0.0 dB
0.0 dB
0.0 dB
0.0 dB
0.0 dB
• Channel Level – Used to check the output level of the
different speakers. See Channel Level below for more
on this.
Exit
Return
2
When ‘MCACC’ is highlighted, use / to select
• Speaker Distance – Used to check the distance to
the different speakers. See Speaker Distance below
for more on this.
the MCACC preset you want to check.
The level of the various channels set at the selected
MCACC preset is displayed. ‘---’ is displayed for channels
that are not connected.
• Standing Wave – Used to check the standing wave
control filter settings. See Standing Wave on page 81
for more on this.
Speaker Distance
• Acoustic Cal EQ – Used to check the calibration
values of the listening environment’s frequency
response. See Acoustic Cal EQ on page 81 for more on
this.
Use this to display the distance from the different
channels to the listening position. See Speaker Distance
on page 87 for more on this.
1
Select ‘Speaker Distance’ from the MCACC Data
• Output PC – See Output PC on page 81 for more on
this.
Check menu.
2c.Speaker Distance
A/V RECEIVER
4
Press RETURN to go back to MCACC Data Check
MCACC
:
M1.MEMORY 1
menu, repeating steps 2 and 3 to check other settings.
L
C
R
SR
SBR
SBL
SL
SW
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
3.61m
3.69m
3.51m
2.74m
5.77m
5.13m
2.26m
3.54m
5
When you’re finished, press RETURN
.
You will return to the HOME MENU.
Exit
Return
2
When ‘MCACC’ is highlighted, use / to select
the MCACC preset you want to check.
The distance from the various channels set at the
selected MCACC preset is displayed. ‘---’ is displayed for
channels that are not connected.
80
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Advanced MCACC menu
10
Standing Wave
Output PC
Use this to display the standing wave related adjustment
values for the various MCACC memories. See Standing
Wave on page 76 for more on this.
Before continuing, make sure you have completed step 2
in Checking MCACC Data on page 80. The data measured
with the Advanced MCACC function is transmitted to the
1
connected computer. The 3D graphs of the reverb
characteristics before and after calibration and the
MCACC results (parameters) can be checked.
1
Select ‘Standing Wave’ from the MCACC Data
Check menu.
2d.Standing Wave
1
Select ‘Output PC’ from MCACC Data Check menu
A/V RECEIVER
Filter 1 Filter 2
Filter 3
ATT TRIM
[dB] [dB]
Filter
Channel
Freq ATT Freq ATT Freq
Q
Q
Q
and press ENTER
.
[Hz] [dB] [Hz] [dB] [Hz]
SW
63 5.0 10 120 5.0 10 201 5.0 10 +10.0
When the receiver is ready for transmission, Start the
MCACC application on your PC shows on the GUI
screen.
dB
0
MCACC
M1.MEMORY1
5
10
16
32
63
125
250
500
1k Hz
Exit
Return
2f.Output PC
A/V RECEIVER
2
When ‘Filter Channel’ is highlighted, use / to
Start the MCACC application on your PC.
select the channel for which you want to check
standing wave control.
The standing wave related calibration value for the
selected channel stored at the selected MCACC preset
and its graph are displayed.
Exit
Cancel
2
Start the MCACC application on your computer.
3
Press
to highlight ‘MCACC’, then use / to
Follow the instructions provided with the application. It
will take about ten seconds for the transmission to
complete, then you will be able to analyze the output on
your computer. The various parameters and the reverb
characteristics data used for display on the computer are
not cleared when the power is turned off. If the reverb
characteristics are re-measured, however, the data is
select the MCACC preset you want to check.
Acoustic Cal EQ
Use this to display the calibration values for the
frequency response of the various channels set in the
different MCACC presets. See Acoustic Calibration EQ
Adjust on page 77 for more on this.
2
overwritten.
1
Select ‘Acoustic Cal EQ’ from the MCACC Data
3
When you’re finished, press RETURN.
Check menu.
You will return to the MCACC Data Check menu.
Continue with other operations in the MCACC Data
Check menu if necessary. Press RETURN again to exit
the MCACC Data Check menu.
2e.Acoustic Cal EQ
A/V RECEIVER
dB
Ch :
L
0.0 -8.0 -6.0 0.0 +3.0 +8.5 +8.5 +3.0 0.0 0.0
MCACC
M1.MEMORY1
63 125 250 500 1k 8k 16k TRIM
2k
4k
[Hz] [Hz] [Hz] [Hz] [Hz] [Hz] [Hz] [Hz] [Hz]
Exit
Finish
2
When ‘Ch’ is highlighted, use / to select the
channel.
The calibration value for the frequency response of the
selected channel stored at the selected MCACC preset
and its graph are displayed.
3
Press
to highlight ‘MCACC’, then use / to
select the MCACC preset you want to check.
Note
1 To transmit data, the receiver and computer must be connected using an RS-232C cable and a special application must be installed on the
computer. See Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC output on page 34 for more on this.
2 Only one set of reverb characteristics is stored on the receiver. If you wish to compare several different measurement results, transmit the
data to the computer each time reverb measurements are taken.
81
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Advanced MCACC menu
Data Management
10
Renaming MCACC presets
If you have several different MCACC presets that you’re
using, you may want to rename them for easier
identification.
This system allows you to store up to six MCACC presets,
allowing you to calibrate your system for different
listening positions (or frequency adjustments for the
1
Select ‘Memory Rename’ from the Data
1
same listening position). This is useful for alternate
Management setup menu.
settings to match the kind of source you’re listening to
and where you’re sitting (for example, watching movies
from a sofa, or playing a video game close to the TV).
3.Data Management
A/V RECEIVER
3a.Memory Rename
A/V RECEIVER
a. Memory Rename
MCACC Position Rename
b. MCACC Memory Copy
c. MCACC Memory Clear
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
:
:
:
:
:
:
MEMORY 1
MEMORY 2
MEMORY 3
MEMORY 4
MEMORY 5
MEMORY 6
From this menu you can copy from one preset to another,
name presets for easier identification and clear any ones
you don’t need.
Exit
Return
Exit
Finish
1
Press RECEIVER , then press HOME MENU.
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your
TV. Use /// and ENTER to navigate through the
screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to
confirm and exit the current menu.
2
Select the MCACC preset you want to rename, then
select an appropriate preset name.
Use / to select the preset, then / to select a
preset name.
2
Select ‘Data Management’ from the HOME MENU.
3
Repeat for as many MCACC presets as necessary,
then press RETURN when you’re finished.
HOME MENU
A/V RECEIVER
3.Data Management
A/V RECEIVER
You will return to the Data Management setup menu.
1. Advanced MCACC
a. Memory Rename
b. MCACC Memory Copy
c. MCACC Memory Clear
2. MCACC Data Check
3. Data Management
4. System Setup
Copying MCACC preset data
If you want to manually adjust the Acoustic Calibration
EQ (see Manual MCACC setup on page 74), we
recommend copying your current settings to an unused
2
Exit
Return
Exit
Return
MCACC preset. Instead of just a flat EQ curve, this will
give you a reference point from which to start.
3
Select the setting you want to adjust.
• Memory Rename – Name your MCACC presets for
easy identification (see Renaming MCACC presets
below).
1
Select ‘MCACC Memory Copy’ from the Data
Management setup menu.
• MCACC Memory Copy – Copy settings from one
MCACC preset to another (see Copying MCACC
preset data below).
3.Data Management
A/V RECEIVER
3b.MCACC Memory Copy
A/V RECEIVER
a. Memory Rename
b. MCACC Memory Copy
c. MCACC Memory Clear
Copy
From
To
:
:
:
All Data
M1.MEMORY
M1.MEMORY
1
1
• MCACC Memory Clear – Clear any MCACC presets
that you don’t want (see Clearing MCACC presets on
page 83).
OK
Exit
Return
Exit
Cancel
2
3
Select the setting you want to copy.
• All Data – Copies all the settings of the selected
MCACC preset memory.
• Level & Distance – Copies only the channel level and
speaker distance settings of the selected MCACC
preset memory.
Select the MCACC preset you’ll be copying the
settings ‘From’, then specify where you want to copy
them (‘To’).
Make sure you don’t overwrite an MCACC preset you’re
currently using (this can’t be undone).
Note
1 This can be done in Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC) on page 39 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 72, either of
which you should have already completed.
2 The settings made in Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC) on page 39 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 72.
82
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Advanced MCACC menu
10
4
Select ‘OK’ to confirm and copy the settings.
When MCACC Memory Copy? is displayed, select YES.
If NO is selected, the memory is not copied.
Completed! shows in the GUI screen to confirm the
MCACC preset has been copied, then you automatically
return to the Data Management setup menu.
Clearing MCACC presets
If you are no longer using one of the MCACC presets
stored in memory, you can choose to clear the calibration
settings of that preset.
1
Select ‘MCACC Memory Clear’ from the Data
Management setup menu.
3.Data Management
A/V RECEIVER
3c.MCACC Memory Clear
A/V RECEIVER
a. Memory Rename
Clear
:
M1.MEMORY
1
b. MCACC Memory Copy
c. MCACC Memory Clear
OK
Exit
Return
Exit
Cancel
2
Select the MCACC preset you want to clear.
Make sure you don’t clear an MCACC preset you’re
currently using (this can’t be undone).
3
Select ‘OK’ to confirm and clear the preset.
When MCACC Memory Clear? is displayed, select YES.
If NO is selected, the memory is not cleared.
Completed! shows in the GUI screen to confirm the
MCACC preset has been cleared, then you automatically
return to the Data Management setup menu.
83
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The system and the other setup
11
Chapter 11:
The system and the other setup
• Manual SP Setup – Sets the type of connection used
for surround back terminals and the size, number
distance and overall balance of the connected
speakers (see Manual speaker setup below).
Making receiver settings from the
System Setup menu
The following section describes how to change the
speaker-related settings manually and make various
other settings (input selection, OSD language selection,
etc.).
• Input Setup – Specifies what you’ve connected to
the digital, HDMI and component video inputs (see
The Input Setup menu on page 40).
• OSD Language – The GUI screen’s display language
can be changed (see Changing the OSD display
language (OSD Language) on page 38).
AUDIO
PARAMETER
VIDEO
PARAMETER
TV/DTV
MPX
PQLS
RECEIVER
SOURCE
LIST
TUNE TOOLS
AUDIO
INFO
DISP
CH
TOP MENU
BAND
T.EDIT
GUIDE
DVD
TV
BD
CD
DVR
HDMI
RECEIVER
TV CTRL
• Other Setup – Makes customized settings to reflect
how you are using the receiver (see The Other Setup
menu on page 88).
PRESET
ENTER
TUNE
PRESET
RETURN
CD-R
VIDEO
REMOTE
SETUP
PTY
SEARCH
iPod USB TUNER INPUT SELECT
HOME
MENU
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
MAIN
iPod CTRL
1
Switch on the receiver and your TV.
1
Manual speaker setup
Use the RECEIVER button to switch on.
This receiver allows you to make detailed settings to
optimize the surround sound performance. You only need
to make these settings once (unless you change the
placement of your current speaker system or add new
speakers).
• If headphones are connected to the receiver,
disconnect them.
Press RECEIVER , then press HOME MENU.2
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your
TV. Use /// and ENTER to navigate through the
screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to
confirm and exit the current menu.
2
These settings are designed to customize your system,
but if you’re satisfied with the settings made in
Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto
MCACC) on page 39, it isn’t necessary to make all of
these settings.
• Press HOME MENU at any time to exit the HOME
MENU.
3
Select ‘System Setup’ from the HOME MENU, then
press ENTER
.
CAUTION
• The test tones used in the Manual SP Setup are
HOME MENU
A/V RECEIVER
output at high volume.
1. Advanced MCACC
2. MCACC Data Check
3. Data Management
4. System Setup
1
Select ‘Manual SP Setup’, then press ENTER.
See Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu
above if you’re not already at this screen.
Exit
Return
4.System Setup
A/V RECEIVER
4a.Manual SP Setup
A/V RECEIVER
a.Manual SP Setup
1. Surr Back System
b. Input Setup
c. OSD Language
d. Other Setup
2. Speaker Setting
3. Channel Level
4. Speaker Distance
5. X-Curve
4
Select the setting you want to adjust.
6. THX Audio Setting
4.System Setup
A/V RECEIVER
a.Manual SP Setup
b. Input Setup
c. OSD Language
d. Other Setup
Exit
Return
Exit
Return
2
Select the setting you want to adjust.
If you are doing this for the first time, you may want to
Exit
Return
adjust these settings in order:
Note
1 Make sure not to switch off the power when using the System Setup menu.
2 You can’t use the HOME MENU when either the iPod/USB input function is selected or the headphones are connected. When you set ZONE
2, ZONE 3 or ZONE 2&3 to ON (page 63), you can’t use the HOME MENU.
84
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The system and the other setup
11
• Surr Back System – Specifies how you are using your
surround back speakers (see below).
3
When ‘Setting Change?’ is displayed, select Yes.
If No is selected, the setting is not changed.
• Speaker Setting – Specifies the size and number of
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
speakers you’ve connected (see below).
Speaker Setting
• Channel Level – Adjusts the overall balance of your
Use this setting to specify your speaker configuration
speaker system (page 86).
1
(size, number of speakers and crossover frequency) . It is
a good idea to make sure that the settings made in
Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto
MCACC) on page 39 are correct. Note that this setting
applies to all MCACC presets, and cannot be set
independently.
• Speaker Distance – Specifies the distance of your
speakers from the listening position (page 87).
• X-Curve – Adjusts the tonal balance of your speaker
system for movie soundtracks (page 87).
• THX Audio Setting – Specifies whether you are
using a THX speaker setup (page 87).
1
Select ‘Speaker Setting’ from the Manual SP Setup
3
Make the adjustments necessary for each setting,
menu.
pressing RETURN to confirm after each screen.
4a.Manual SP Setup
4a2.Speaker Setting
A/V RECEIVER
A/V RECEIVER
1. Surr Back System
Front
Center
Surr
SB
:
:
:
:
:
LARGE
SMALL
SMALL
SMALL x 2
YES
Surround back speaker setting
• Default setting: Normal
2. Speaker Setting
3. Channel Level
4. Speaker Distance
5. X-Curve
SW
6. THX Audio Setting
X.OVER
:
80Hz
There are several ways you can use the surround back
speaker channels with this system. In addition to a
normal home theater setup where they are used for the
surround back speakers, they can be used for bi-amping
the front speakers or as an independent speaker system
in another room.
Exit
Return
Exit
Return
2
Choose the set of speakers that you want to set,
then select a speaker size.
Use / to select the size (and number) of each of the
1
Select ‘Surr Back System’ from the Manual SP
2
following speakers:
Setup menu.
• Front – Select LARGE if your front speakers
reproduce bass frequencies effectively, or if you
didn’t connect a subwoofer. Select SMALL to send
the bass frequencies to the subwoofer.
See Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu
on page 84 if you’re not already at this screen.
4a.Manual SP Setup
4a1.Surr Back System
A/V RECEIVER
A/V RECEIVER
1. Surr Back System
Normal
2. Speaker Setting
3. Channel Level
4. Speaker Distance
5. X-Curve
• Center – Select LARGE if your center speaker
reproduces bass frequencies effectively, or select
SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other
speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect a center
speaker, choose NO (the center channel is sent to
the front speakers).
Front
Center
Surr
:
:
:
:
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
6. THX Audio Setting
SB
OK
Exit
Return
Exit
Return
• Surr – Select LARGE if your surround speakers
reproduce bass frequencies effectively. Select
SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other
speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect
surround speakers choose NO (the sound of the
surround channels is sent to the front speakers or a
subwoofer).
2
Select the surround back speaker setting.
• Normal – Select for normal home theater use with
surround back speakers in your main (speaker
system A) setup.
• Speaker B – Select to use the (surround back) B
speaker terminals to listen to stereo playback in
another room (see Switching the speaker system on
page 63).
• Front Bi-Amp – Select this setting if you’re bi-
amping your front speakers (see Bi-amping your
speakers on page 20).
• ZONE 2 – Select to use the (surround back) B
speaker terminals for an independent system in
another zone (see Using the MULTI-ZONE controls on
page 63).
Note
1 If you’re using a THX speaker setup, set all speakers to SMALL.
2 If you select SMALL for the front speakers the subwoofer will automatically be fixed to YES. Also, the center, surround and surround back
speakers can’t be set to LARGE if the front speakers are set to SMALL. In this case, all bass frequencies are sent to the subwoofer.
85
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The system and the other setup
11
• SB – Select the number of surround back speakers
you have (one, two or none). Select LARGEx2 or
LARGEx1 if your surround back speakers reproduce
bass frequencies effectively. Select SMALLx2 or
SMALLx1 to send bass frequencies to the other
speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect
surround back speakers choose NO.
2
3
Select a setup option.
1
• MANUAL – Move the test tone manually from
speaker to speaker and adjust individual channel
levels.
• AUTO – Adjust channel levels as the test tone moves
from speaker to speaker automatically.
Confirm your selected setup option.
• SW – LFE signals and bass frequencies of channels
set to SMALL are output from the subwoofer when
YES is selected. Choose the PLUS setting if you want
the subwoofer to output bass sound continuously or
you want deeper bass (the bass frequencies that
would normally come out the front and center
The test tones will start after you press ENTER.
4a3.Channel Level
A/V RECEIVER
CAUTION
Loud test tones will be output.
2
Please wait...**
speakers are also routed to the subwoofer). If you did
not connect a subwoofer choose NO (the bass
frequencies are output from other speakers).
Exit
Cancel
3
Select ‘X. OVER’ and set the crossover frequency.3
4
Adjust the level of each channel using /.
Frequencies below this point will be sent to the
subwoofer (or LARGE speakers).
If you selected MANUAL, use / to switch speakers.
The AUTO setup will output test tones in the order shown
on-screen:
4
When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
4a3.Channel Level
A/V RECEIVER
MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1
Channel Level
L
C
R
SR
SBR
SBL
SL
SW
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
0.00 dB
0.00 dB
0.00 dB
0.00 dB
0.00 dB
0.00 dB
0.00 dB
0.00 dB
Using the channel level settings, you can adjust the
overall balance of your speaker system, an important
factor when setting up a home theater system.
Exit
Finish
1
Select ‘Channel Level’ from the Manual SP Setup
menu.
Adjust the level of each speaker as the test tone is
emitted.
4
4a.Manual SP Setup
4a3.Channel Level
A/V RECEIVER
A/V RECEIVER
1. Surr Back System
MCACC
:
M1.MEMORY 1
5
When you’re finished, press RETURN.
2. Speaker Setting
3. Channel Level
4. Speaker Distance
5. X-Curve
Test Tone
:
AUTO
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
6. THX Audio Setting
Tip
Exit
Return
Exit
Return
• You can change the channel levels at any time by
press RECEIVER , then press CH LEVEL, and then
using / on the remote control.
Note
1 • If you selected Speaker B, ZONE 2 or Front Bi-Amp (in Surround back speaker setting on page 85) you can’t adjust the surround back
settings.
• If the surround speakers are set to NO, the surround back speakers will automatically be set to NO.
• If you select one surround back speaker only, make sure that speaker is hooked up to the left surround back terminal.
2 If you have a subwoofer and like lots of bass, it may seem logical to select LARGE for your front speakers and PLUS for the subwoofer. This
may not, however, yield the best bass results. Depending on the speaker placement of your room you may actually experience a decrease in
the amount of bass due low frequency cancellations. In this case, try changing the position or direction of speakers. If you can’t get good
results, listen to the bass response with it set to PLUS and YES or the front speakers set to LARGE and SMALL alternatively and let your ears
judge which sounds best. If you’re having problems, the easiest option is to route all the bass sounds to the subwoofer by selecting SMALL
for the front speakers.
3 • This setting decides the cutoff between bass sounds playing back from the speakers selected as LARGE, or the subwoofer, and bass sounds
playing back from those selected as SMALL. It also decides where the cutoff will be for bass sounds in the LFE channel.
• If you’re using a THX speaker setup, confirm that the crossover frequency is set to 80Hz.
4 • If you are using a Sound Pressure Level (SPL) meter, take the readings from your main listening position and adjust the level of each speaker
to 75 dB SPL (C-weighting/slow reading).
• The subwoofer test tone is output at low volumes. You may need to adjust the level after testing with an actual soundtrack.
86
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The system and the other setup
11
2
Choose the X-Curve setting you want.
Speaker Distance
Use / to adjust the setting. The X-Curve is expressed
as a downwards slope in decibels per octave, starting at
2 kHz. The sound becomes less bright as the slope
increases (to a maximum of –3.0dB/oct). Use the
following guidelines to set the X-Curve according to your
room size:
For good sound depth and separation from your system,
you need to specify the distance of your speakers from
the listening position. The receiver can then add the
proper delay needed for effective surround sound.
1
Select ‘Speaker Distance’ from the Manual SP
Setup menu.
Room size (m2)
≤36 ≤48 ≤60 ≤72 ≤300 ≤1000
4a.Manual SP Setup
4a4.Speaker Distance
X-Curve
(dB/oct)
A/V RECEIVER
A/V RECEIVER
–0.5 –1.0 –1.5 –2.0 –2.5 –3.0
1. Surr Back System
MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1
2. Speaker Setting
3. Channel Level
4. Speaker Distance
5. X-Curve
L
C
R
SR
SBR
SBL
SL
SW
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
3.61m
3.69m
3.67m
2.74m
5.77m
5.13m
2.26m
3.54m
• If you select OFF, the frequency curve will be flat and
the X-Curve has no effect.
6. THX Audio Setting
3
When you’re finished, press RETURN
.
Exit
Return
Exit
Finish
THX Audio Setting
2
Adjust the distance of each speaker using /.
When the THX Loudness Plus function is used, sound
can be played with the full surround effect even when the
volume is low.
You can adjust the distance of each speaker in 0.01 m
increments.
3
When you’re finished, press RETURN.
For the most effective results when using the THX Select2
Cinema, THX Select2 Music Mode and THX Select2
Games Mode listening modes (see Using the Home THX
modes on page 51) with the Advanced Speaker Array
(ASA) system (see About THX on page 102), it is required
that you make the setting. See Placing the speakers on
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
Tip
• For best surround sound, make sure the surround
back speakers are the same distance from the
listening position.
2
page 17 for more on THX speaker placement.
With some speaker setups, depending on the position of
the subwoofer and the walls in your listening area, you
may experience overly resonant frequencies in the bass.
If you have this problem use the THX Select2 subwoofer
setup to switch on BGC (boundary gain compensation)
X-Curve
Most soundtracks mixed for cinema sound too bright
when played back in large rooms. The X-Curve setting
acts as a kind of re-equalization for home theater
listening, and restores proper tonal balance of movie
3
(see About THX on page 102 for more on this).
1
soundtracks.
1
Select ‘THX Audio Setting’ from the Manual SP
setup menu.
1
Select ‘X-Curve’ from the Manual SP Setup menu.
4a.Manual SP Setup
A/V RECEIVER
4a.Manual SP Setup
A/V RECEIVER
1. Surr Back System
2. Speaker Setting
3. Channel Level
4. Speaker Distance
5. X-Curve
1. Surr Back System
2. Speaker Setting
3. Channel Level
4. Speaker Distance
5. X-Curve
6. THX Audio Setting
6. THX Audio Setting
Exit
Return
Exit
Return
Note
1 Since the principal is the same, X-Curve isn’t applied when you’re using any of the Home THX modes (see Using the Home THX modes on
page 51).
2 If you don’t have surround back speakers, or just have one, you won’t be able to select this setting.
3 • THX Select2 SW can only be selected when SW at Speaker Setting is set to YES or PLUS.
• The BGC setting can only be selected when THX Select2 SW is set to YES.
87
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The system and the other setup
11
2
Select either ON or OFF for THX Loudness Plus
setting.
The Other Setup menu
The Other Setup menu is where you can make
customized settings to reflect how you are using the
receiver.
4a6.THX Audio Setting
A/V RECEIVER
Loudness Plus
SB SP Position
THX Select2 SW
BGC
:
:
:
:
ON
1.2 m<
YES
OFF
1
Press RECEIVER on the remote control, then press
HOME MENU
.
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your
TV. Use /// and ENTER to navigate through the
screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to
confirm and exit the current menu.
Exit
Finish
3
Specify the distance of your surround back speakers
from each other.
2
3
Select ‘System Setup’ from the HOME MENU
.
4a6.THX Audio Setting
A/V RECEIVER
Loudness Plus
:
:
:
:
ON
1.2 m<
YES
SB SP Position
THX Select2 SW
BGC
Select ‘Other Setup’, then press ENTER
.
OFF
4.SystemSetup
A/V RECEIVER
4d.Other Setup
A/V RECEIVER
a.Manual SP Setup
1. KURO LINK Setup
b. Input Setup
c. OSD Language
d. Other Setup
2. Multi Ch In Setup
3. ZONE Audio Setup
4. Power ON Level Setup
5. Volume Limit Setup
6. Remote Control Mode Setup
7. Flicker Reduction Setup
Exit
Finish
• 0–0.3 m – Surround back speakers within 30 cm
apart (best for THX surround sound).
Exit
Return
Exit
Return
• >0.3– 1.2 m – Surround back speakers between 30
cm and 1.2 m apart.
4
Select the setting you want to adjust.
If you are doing this for the first time, you may want to
adjust these settings in order:
• 1.2 m< – Surround back speakers more than 1.2 m
apart (default).
• KURO LINK Setup – Synchronizes this receiver with
your Pioneer component supporting KURO LINK (see
KURO LINK Setup on page 58).
4
Specify whether your subwoofer is THX Select2
certified or not.
4a6.THX Audio Setting
• Multi Ch In Setup – Specifies the optional settings for
A/V RECEIVER
a multi-channel input (page 89)
.
Loudness Plus
SB SP Position
THX Select2 SW
BGC
:
:
:
:
ON
1.2 m<
YES
OFF
• ZONE Audio Setup – Specifies the volume setting
for a MULTI-ZONE setup (page 89).
• Power ON Level Setup – Specifies the volume level
set when the power is turned on (page 90).
Exit
Finish
• Volume Limit Setup – Limits the maximum volume
(page 90).
If your subwoofer isn’t THX Select2 certified, but you still
want to switch boundary gain compensation on, select
YES here, but the effect might not work properly.
• Remote Control Mode Setup – Sets this receiver’s
remote control mode (page 90).
5
Select either ON or OFF for Boundary Gain
• Flicker Reduction – Adjusts the way the GUI screen
looks (page 90).
Compensation setting.
4a6.THX Audio Setting
5
Make the adjustments necessary for each setting,
A/V RECEIVER
Loudness Plus
SB SP Position
THX Select2 SW
BGC
:
ON
1.2 m<
YES
pressing RETURN to confirm after each screen.
:
:
:
OFF
Exit
Finish
6
When you’re finished, press RETURN
.
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
88
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The system and the other setup
11
Multi Channel Input Setup
ZONE Audio Setup
You can adjust the level of the subwoofer for a multi-
channel input. Also, when the multi-channel input is
selected as an input function, you can display the video
images of other input functions. In the Multi Channel
Input Setup, you can assign a video input to the multi-
channel input.
If you’ve made MULTI-ZONE connections (see Using the
MULTI-ZONE controls on page 63), you may need to
specify your volume setting.
1
Select ‘ZONE Audio Setup’ from the Other Setup
menu.
4d.Other Setup
4d3.ZONE Audio Setup
1
Select ‘Multi Ch In Setup’ from the Other Setup
A/V RECEIVER
A/V RECEIVER
1. KURO LINK Setup
ZONE 2 Volume Level : Variable
menu.
2. Multi Ch In Setup
3. ZONE Audio Setup
4. Power ON Level Setup
5. Volume Limit Setup
6. Remote Control Mode Setup
7. Flicker Reduction Setup
ZONE 3 Volume Level : Variable
4d.Other Setup
A/V RECEIVER
1. KURO LINK Setup
2. Multi Ch In Setup
3. ZONE Audio Setup
4. Power ON Level Setup
5. Volume Limit Setup
6. Remote Control Mode Setup
7. Flicker Reduction Setup
Exit
Return
Exit
Finish
2
Select the volume level setting of ZONE 2 and
ZONE 3 1
.
Exit
Return
• Variable – Use this setting if you’ve connected a
power amplifier in the sub room (this receiver is
simply being used as a pre-amp) and you will be
using this receiver’s controls to adjust the volume.
2
Select the ‘SW Input Gain’ setting you want.
• 0dB – Outputs sound of the subwoofer at the level
originally recorded on the source.
• +10dB – Outputs sound of the subwoofer at the level
increased by 10 dB.
• Fixed – Use this setting if you’ve connected a fully
integrated amplifier (such as another Pioneer VSX
receiver) in the sub room and want to use that
receiver’s volume controls.
4d2.Multi Ch In Setup
A/V RECEIVER
SW Input Gain
Video Input
:
:
0dB
DVD
With the Fixed setting, the source is sent from this
receiver at maximum volume, so make sure the volume is
quite low in the sub zone at first, and then experiment to
find the correct level.
Exit
Finish
3
When you’re finished, press RETURN
.
You will return to the Other Setup menu.
3
Select the ‘Video Input’ setting you want.
When the multi-channel input is selected as an input
function, you can display the video images of other input
functions. The video input can be selected from the
following: DVD, TV/SAT, DVR, VIDEO, OFF.
4d2.Multi Ch In Setup
A/V RECEIVER
SW Input Gain
Video Input
:
:
+10dB
DVD
Exit
Finish
4
When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Other Setup menu.
Note
1 If you selected ZONE 2 in the Surround back speaker setting on page 85, you won’t be able to change the volume level.
89
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The system and the other setup
11
Power ON Level Setup
The volume can be set so that it is always set to the same
level when the receiver’s power is turned on.
Remote Control Mode Setup
• Default setting: 1
This sets this receiver’s remote control mode to prevent
erroneous operation when multiple units of the receiver
are being used.
1
Select ‘Power ON Level Setup’ from the Other
1
Setup menu.
1
Select ‘Remote Control Mode Setup’ from the
4d.Other Setup
4d4.Power ON Level Setup
A/V RECEIVER
A/V RECEIVER
Other Setup menu.
Power ON Level
: LAST
1. KURO LINK Setup
2. Multi Ch In Setup
3. ZONE Audio Setup
4. Power ON Level Setup
5. Volume Limit Setup
6. Remote Control Mode Setup
7. Flicker Reduction Setup
4d.Other Setup
A/V RECEIVER
4d6.Remote Control Mode Setup
A/V RECEIVER
Remote Control Mode
:
1
1. KURO LINK Setup
2. Multi Ch In Setup
3. ZONE Audio Setup
4. Power ON Level Setup
5. Volume Limit Setup
6. Remote Control Mode Setup
7. Flicker Reduction Setup
Exit
Return
Exit
Finish
OK
2
Select the Power ON Level setting you want.
Exit
Return
Exit
Cancel
• LAST – When the power is turned on, the volume is
set to the same level as when the power was last
turned off.
2
3
4
Select the Remote Control Mode setting you want.
Select “OK” to change the remote control mode.
• “---” – When the power is turned on, the volume is set
to minimum level.
Follow the instructions on the screen to change the
remote control’s setting.
See Operating multiple receivers on page 67.
• –80.0dB to +12.0dB – Specify the volume to be set
when the power is turned, in steps of 0.5 dB.
It is not possible to set a volume level greater than the
value specified at Volume Limit Setup.
5
When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Other Setup menu.
3
When you’re finished, press RETURN.
Flicker Reduction Setup
• Default setting: 4
You will return to the Other Setup menu.
The GUI screen’s resolution can be increased. If you feel
the GUI screen is hard to see, try changing this setting.
Note that the resolution in this setting only affects the
GUI screen; it has no influence on the video output.
Volume Limit Setup
Use this function to limit the maximum volume. The
volume cannot be increased above the level set here,
even by operating MASTER VOLUME button (or the dial
on the front panel).
1
Select ‘Flicker Reduction Setup’ from the Other
Setup menu.
1
Select ‘Volume Limit Setup’ from the Other Setup
menu.
4d.Other Setup
A/V RECEIVER
4d7.Flicker Reduction Setup
A/V RECEIVER
Flicker Reduction
:
4
1. KURO LINK Setup
2. Multi Ch In Setup
3. ZONE Audio Setup
4. Power ON Level Setup
5. Volume Limit Setup
6. Remote Control Mode Setup
7. Flicker Reduction Setup
4d.Other Setup
4d5.Volume Limit Setup
A/V RECEIVER
A/V RECEIVER
Volume Limit
:
OFF
1. KURO LINK Setup
2. Multi Ch In Setup
3. ZONE Audio Setup
4. Power ON Level Setup
5. Volume Limit Setup
6. Remote Control Mode Setup
7. Flicker Reduction Setup
Exit
Return
Exit
Finish
Exit
Return
Exit
Finish
2
3
Select the Flicker Reduction setting you want.
When you’re finished, press RETURN
2
3
Select the Volume Limit setting you want.
• OFF – The maximum volume is not limited.
.
You will return to the Other Setup menu.
• –20.0dB/–10.0dB/0.0dB – The maximum volume is
limited to the value set here.
When you’re finished, press RETURN
.
You will return to the Other Setup menu.
Note
1 If you change this receiver’s setting, also change the setting on the remote control.
90
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
12
Chapter 12:
Additional information
Step 3: Adjusting the speaker orientation
If the left and right speakers are not pointing in the same
direction, the tone will not be the same on the right and
left, and as a result the sound field will not be reproduced
properly. However, if all the speakers are pointed towards
the listening position, the sound field will seem cramped.
Testing by the Pioneer Multi-channel Research Group
has shown that a good sense of sound positioning can be
achieved by pointing all the speakers towards an area
30 cm to 80 cm behind the listening position (between
the surround speakers and the listening position).
Speaker Setting Guide
In order to achieve an even better surround effect, it is
important to accurately position the speakers and make
their volume and tone characteristics uniform so as to
finely focus the multi-channel sound.
The three major elements in positioning the speakers are
distance, angle and orientation (the direction in which
the speakers are pointing).
Distance: The distance of all the speakers should be
equal.
However, the sense of sound positioning can differ
according to the conditions in the room and the speakers
being used. In smaller environments in particular (when
the front speakers are close to the listening position),
with this method the speakers will be pointed too inward.
We suggest you use this example of installation as
reference when trying out different installation methods.
Angle: The speakers should be horizontally symmetrical.
Orientation: The orientation should be horizontally
symmetrical.
In most homes, however, it is not possible to achieve this
environment. For the distance, on this receiver it is
possible to automatically correct the speaker distance
electrically to a precision of 1 cm using the Auto MCACC
Setup function (page 39).
Step 4: Positioning and adjusting the subwoofer
Placing the subwoofer between the center and front
speakers makes even music sources sound more natural
(If there is only one subwoofer, it doesn’t matter if it is
placed on the left or right side). The low bass sound
output from the subwoofer is not directional and there is
no need to adjust the height. Normally the subwoofer is
placed on the floor. Put it in a position at which it will not
cancel out the bass sound output from the other
speakers. Also note that placing it near a wall may result
in sympathetic vibrations with the building that could
excessively amplify the bass sound.
Step 1: Speaker layout and distance adjustment
Use speaker stands or the like to make sure the speakers
are steady, and leave at least 10 cm from the surrounding
walls. Position the speakers attentively so that the
speakers on the left and right are at equal angles from the
listening position (center of the adjustments). (We
recommend using cords, etc., when adjusting the
layout.) Ideally all the speakers should be equidistant
from the listening position.
If the subwoofer must be installed near a wall, place it at
an angle so that it is not parallel to the wall surface. This
can help reduce any sympathetic vibrations, but
depending on the shape of the room this could result in
standing waves. However, even if standing waves are
generated, their influence on the sound quality can be
prevented using the Auto MCACC’s standing wave
control function (page 81).
Tip
• If the speakers cannot be set at equal distances (on a
circle), use the Auto MCACC Setup speaker distance
correction and Fine Speaker Distance functions to
make them equalize the distance artificially.
Step 2: Adjusting the speaker height
Adjust the heights (angles) of the different speakers.
Step 5: Default settings with the Auto MCACC
Setup (auto sound field correction) function
It is more effective to perform the Auto MCACC Setup
(page 39) procedure once the adjustments described
above have been completed.
Adjust so that the front speaker units reproducing mid-
and high frequencies is roughly at the height of the ears.
If the center speaker cannot be set at the same height as
the front speakers, adjust its angle of elevation to point it
to the listening position.
Set surround speaker 1 so that it is not under the height
of the ears.
Tip
• The distance to the subwoofer may be slightly larger
than the distance actually measured with a tape
measure, etc. This is because this distance is
corrected for electric delay, and is not a problem.
91
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
12
Position of center speaker and monitor
Positional relationship between speakers
and monitor
Since mostly dialogs are output from the center speaker,
keeping the center speaker as close as possible to the
screen makes the overall sound more natural. For TVs
using Braun tubes, however, when installing the center
speaker on the floor, adjust its angle of elevation to point
it towards the listening position.
Position of front speakers and monitor
The front speakers should be as equidistant as possible
to the monitor.
Installation on floor
(Diagram as seen
from the side)
TV
L
R
Monitor
45° to 60°
• If the center speaker is not of the shielded type, install
it away from the TV.
• When installing the center speaker on top of the
monitor, place it facing slightly downwards towards
the listening position.
Troubleshooting
Incorrect operations are often mistaken for trouble and malfunctions. If you think that there is something wrong with
this component, check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the other
components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after exercising the checks
listed below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized independent service company to carry out repair work.
Note
• If the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity disconnect the power plug
from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions.
Power
Symptom
Remedy
The power does not turn on.
• Make sure that the power cord is plugged in to an active power outlet.
• Try disconnecting from the power outlet, then plugging back in.
Power cannot be turned off.
(ZONE 2 ON or ZONE 3 ON is
• Set the remote control’s MULTI-ZONE operation selector switch to ZONE 2 or ZONE 3, then press
RECEIVER to switch the sub zone off.
displayed.)
The receiver suddenly switches • Check that there are no loose strands of speaker wire touching the rear panel or another set of
off or the PHASE CONTROL
wires. If so, re-attach the speaker wires, making sure there are no stray strands.
indicator blinks.
• The receiver may have a serious problem. Disconnect from the power and call a Pioneer authorized
independent service company.
During loud playback the
• Turn down the volume.
power suddenly switches off.
• Lower the 63 Hz and 125 Hz equalizer levels in the Manual MCACC setup on page 74.
• Switch on the digital safety feature. While holding down ENTER on the front panel, press
STANDBY/ON to set this receiver to the standby mode. Use TUNE +/– to select D.SAFETY
OFF, and then use PRESET +/– to select 1 or 2 (select D.SAFETY OFF to deactivate this
feature). If the power switches off even with 2 switched on, turn down the volume. With 1 or 2 on,
some features may be unavailable.
The unit does not respond
• Try switching the receiver off, then back on again.
when the buttons are pressed.
• Try disconnecting the power cord, then connect again.
92
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
12
Symptom
Remedy
AMP ERR blinks in the display, • The receiver may have a serious problem. Do not try switching the receiver on. Contact a Pioneer
then the power automatically authorized independent service company for help.
switches off. The ADVANCED
MCACC blinks and the power
does not turn on.
The ADVANCED MCACC
indicator flashes and power
turns off.
• There is a problem with the receiver’s power unit or fan. Try turning on the power after 1 minute. If
the same thing happens, the receiver is damaged. Unplug the receiver from the wall and call a
Pioneer authorized independent service company. (Other symptoms may appear when the power is
turned on.)
AMP OVERHEAT and the
power indicator flash and the
power turns off.
• Allow the unit to cool down in a well-ventilated place before switching back on.
• Wait at least 1 minute, then try turning the power on again.
The Receiver suddenly power • The power unit is damaged. Unplug the receiver from the wall and call a Pioneer authorized
off or the blue indicator at the independent service company.
center of the receiver flashes.
Display blinks 12V TRG ERR. • An error has arisen in the 12 V trigger jacks. Reconnect accurately then turn the power back on.
No sound
Symptom
Remedy
No sound is output when an
input function is selected.
• Check the volume, mute setting (press MUTE) and speaker setting (press SPEAKERS).
• Make sure the correct input function is selected.
No sound output from the front
speakers.
• Check that the MCACC setup microphone is disconnected.
• Make sure the correct input signal is selected (press SIGNAL SEL). Note that when PCM is
selected, you won’t be able to hear any other signal format.
• Check that the source component is connected properly (see Connecting your equipment on
page 14).
• Check that the speakers are connected properly (see Connecting the speakers on page 18).
No sound from the surround or • Check that the Stereo listening mode or the Front Stage Surround Advance mode isn’t selected;
center speakers.
select one of the surround listening modes (see Listening in surround sound on page 50).
• Check that the surround/center speakers are not set to NO (see Speaker Setting on page 85).
• Check the channel level settings (see Channel Level on page 86).
• Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on page 18).
No sound from surround back • Check that the surround back speakers are set to LARGE or SMALL (see Speaker Setting on
speakers.
page 85).
• Make sure surround back channel processing is set to SBch ON (see Using surround back channel
processing on page 53).
• If the source is Dolby Surround EX or DTS-ES with no flag to indicate 6.1 compatibility, then with
surround back channel processing set to SBch Auto, there will be no sound from the surround back
speakers. In this case, set to SBch ON (see Using surround back channel processing on page 53).
• If the source does not have 6.1 playback channels, make sure that surround back channel
processing is set to SBch ON and a surround mode is selected (see Listening in surround sound on
page 50).
• Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on page 18).
If only one surround back speaker is connected, make sure it’s connected to the left channel speaker
terminal.
No sound from subwoofer.
• Check that the subwoofer is connected properly, switched on and the volume turned up.
• If your subwoofer has a sleep function, make sure it is switched off.
• Make sure that the Subwoofer setting is YES or PLUS (see Speaker Setting on page 85).
• The crossover frequency may be set too low; try setting it higher to match the characteristics of
your other speakers (see Speaker Setting on page 85).
• If there is very little low frequency information in the source material, change your speaker settings
to Front: SMALL / Subwoofer: YES, or Front: LARGE / Subwoofer: PLUS (see Speaker Setting on
page 85).
• Check that the LFE channel is not set to OFF, or a very quiet setting (see Setting the Audio options
on page 60).
• Check the speaker level settings (see Channel Level on page 86).
93
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
12
Symptom
Remedy
No sound from one speaker.
• Check the speaker connection (see Connecting the speakers on page 18).
• Check the speaker level settings (see Channel Level on page 86).
• Check that the speaker hasn’t been set to NO (see Speaker Setting on page 85).
• The channel may not be recorded in the source. By using one of the advanced effect listening
mode, you may be able to create the missing channel (see Listening in surround sound on page 50).
Sound is produced from
analog components, but not
from digital ones (DVD, LD,
CD-ROM, etc.).
• Check that the input signal type is set to DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 55).
• Make sure that the digital input is assigned correctly for the input jack the component is connected
to (see The Input Setup menu on page 40).
• Check the digital output settings on the source component.
• If the source component has a digital volume control, make sure this is not turned down.
• Make sure that the multichannel analog inputs are not selected. Select any other input function.
No sound is output or a noise is • Check that your DVD player is compatible with Dolby Digital/DTS discs.
output when Dolby Digital/DTS
software is played back.
• Check the digital output settings of your DVD player. Make sure that the DTS signal output is set
to On.
• If the source component has a digital volume control, make sure this is not turned down.
No sound when using the
• If the HDMI input function is selected, sound is muted until exiting the HOME MENU.
HOME MENU.
Other audio problems
Symptom
Remedy
Broadcast stations cannot be For FM broadcasts
selected automatically, or
there is considerable noise in
radio broadcasts.
• Fully extend the FM wire antenna, adjust the position for best reception and secure to a wall, etc.
• Use an outdoor antenna for better reception (see page 30).
For AM broadcasts
• Adjust the position and direction of the AM antenna.
• Use an outdoor antenna for better reception (see page 30).
• Noise may be caused by interference from other equipment, such as a fluorescent light, motor,
etc. Switch off or move the other equipment, or move the AM antenna.
A multichannel DVD source
• Make sure that the multichannel analog inputs are selected (see Selecting the multichannel analog
appears to be downmixed to 2 inputs on page 43).
channels during playback.
Noise is output when scanning • This is not a malfunction of the receiver. The scan function of your player alters the digital
a DTS CD.
information, making it unreadable, resulting in noise being output. Lower the volume when
scanning.
When playing a DTS format LD • Make sure that the input signal type is set to DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 55).
there is audible noise on the
soundtrack.
Can’t record audio.
• You can only make a digital recording from a digital source, and an analog recording from an
analog source.
• For digital sources, make sure that what you’re recording isn’t copy protected.
• Check that the OUT jacks are properly connected to the recorders input jacks (see Connecting
other audio components on page 28).
Subwoofer output is very low. • To route more signal to the subwoofer, set it to PLUS or set the front speakers to SMALL (see
Speaker Setting on page 85).
Everything seems to be set up • The speakers may be out of phase. Check that the positive/negative speaker terminals on the
correctly, but the playback
sound is odd.
receiver are matched with the corresponding terminals on the speakers (see Connecting the
speakers on page 18).
The PHASE CONTROL feature • If applicable, check that the lowpass filter switch on your subwoofer is off, or the lowpass cutoff is
doesn’t seem to have an
audible effect.
set to the highest frequency setting. If there is a PHASE setting on your subwoofer, set it to 0º (or
depending on the subwoofer, the setting where you think it has the best overall effect on the sound).
• Make sure the speaker distance setting is correct for all speakers (see Speaker Distance on
page 87).
Noise or hum can be heard
even when there is no sound
being input.
• Check that personal computers or other digital components connected to the same power source
are not causing interference.
94
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
12
Symptom
Remedy
There seems to be a time lag • See Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC) on page 39 to set up your system
between the speakers and the again using MCACC (this will automatically compensate for a delay in the subwoofer output).
output of the subwoofer.
The maximum volume
• Check that the Volume Limit is set to OFF (see Volume Limit Setup on page 90).
available (shown in the front
panel display) is lower than the
+12dB maximum.
Video
Symptom
Remedy
No image is output when an
• Check the video connections of the source component (see page 27).
input is selected.
• For HDMI, or when digital video conversion is set to OFF and a TV and another component are
connected with different cords (in Setting the Video options on page 61), you must connect your TV
to this receiver using the same type of video cable as you used to connect your video component.
• Make sure the input assignment is correct for components connected using component video,
HDMI or S-Video cables (see The Input Setup menu on page 40).
• Check the video output settings of the source component.
• Check that the video input you selected on your TV is correct.
• Some components (such as video game units) have resolutions that may not be converted. If
adjusting this receiver’s Resolution setting (in Setting the Video options on page 61) and/or the
resolution settings on your component or display doesn’t work, try switching Digital Video
Conversion (in Setting the Video options on page 61) OFF.
Can’t record video.
• Check that the source is not copy-protected.
• The video converter is not available when making recordings. Check that the same type of video
cable is used for connecting both the recorder and the video source (the one you want to record) to
this receiver.
Noisy, intermittent, or distorted • Sometimes a video deck may output a noisy video signal (during scanning, for example), or the
picture.
video quality may just be poor (with some video game units, for example). The picture quality may
also depend on the settings, etc. of your display device. Switch off the video converter and reconnect
the source and display device using the same type of connection (component, S-Video or
composite), then start playback again.
Video signals are not output
• When a monitor only compatible with resolutions of 480i is connected to the component terminal
from the component terminal. and another monitor is connected to the HDMI terminal, the video signals may not be output to the
monitor connected to the component terminal. If this happens, do the following:
– Turn off the power of the monitor connected to the HDMI terminal.
– Set RES on the VIDEO PARAMETER menu to PURE (page 61).
Settings
Symptom
Remedy
The Auto MCACC Setup
continually shows an error.
• The ambient noise level may be too high. Keep the noise level in the room as low as possible (see
also Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 40). If the noise level cannot be kept low
enough, you will have to set up the surround sound manually (page 84).
• When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SURROUND BACK L (Single)
terminals.
• To use a 5.1-channel speaker set, use the surround speakers for the surround channel, not the
surround back channel.
• Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers and the microphone.
• If Reverse Phase is displayed, try the following:
– The speaker’s wiring (+ and –) may be inverted. Check the speaker connections.
–
Depending on the type of speakers and their installation conditions, Reverse Phase may be
displayed even if the speakers are properly connected. If this happens, select GO NEXT and continue.
– If the speaker is not pointed to the microphone (listening position) or when using speakers that
affect the phase (dipole speakers, reflective speakers, etc.), it may not be possible to properly identify
the polarity.
95
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
12
Symptom
Remedy
After using the Auto MCACC • There may have been some low frequency noise in the room from an air-conditioner, motor, etc.
Setup, the speaker size setting Switch off all other appliances in the room and use Auto MCACC Setup again.
is incorrect.
• Depending on a number of factors (room size, speaker placement, etc.) this may occur in some
cases. Change the speaker setting manually in Speaker Setting on page 85, and use the ALL (Keep
SP System) option for the Auto MCACC menu in Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 72 if this is a
recurring problem.
Can’t adjust the Fine Speaker • Check that the speakers are all in phase (make sure the positive (+) and negative (–) terminals are
Distance setting (page 75)
matched up properly).
properly.
The display shows KEY LOCK ON • With the receiver in standby, press STANDBY/ON while holding down SPEAKERS to disable the
when you try to make settings. key lock.
Most recent settings have been • The power cord was disconnected from the wall while adjusting this setting.
erased.
• Settings are only stored if all the zones are turned off. Turn off all the zones before unplugging the
power cord.
The various system settings are • Make sure the blue STANDBY/ON light has gone out before unplugging.
not stored.
Professional Calibration EQ graphical output
Symptom
Remedy
The EQ response displayed in • There are cases where the graph does not appear flat (even when selecting ALL CH ADJ in the Auto
the graphical output following MCACC Setup) due to adjustments made to compensate for room characteristics to achieve optimal
calibration does not appear
sound.
entirely flat.
• Areas of the graph may appear identical (before and after) when there is little or no adjustment
needed.
• The graph may appear to have shifted vertically when comparing before and after measurements.
EQ adjustments made using
• Despite level adjustments being made, the filters used for analysis may not display these
the Manual MCACC setup on adjustments in the graphical output. However, these adjustments are taken this into account by the
page 74 do not appear to
filters dedicated to overall system calibration.
change the graphical output.
Lower frequency response
curves do not seem to have
been calibrated for SMALL
speakers.
• Low frequencies used in bass management (the subwoofer channel) will not change for speakers
that have been specified as SMALL in the configuration, or do not output these frequencies.
• Calibration is performed, but due to your speakers’ low frequency limitations, no measurable
sound is output for display.
Display
Symptom
Remedy
The display is dark or off.
• Press DIMMER repeatedly to select a different brightness.
• Press DIMMER repeatedly to select a different brightness.
After making an adjustment
the display goes off.
You can’t get DIGITAL to
display when using SIGNAL
SEL.
• Check the digital connections and make sure that the digital inputs are assigned correctly (see The
Input Setup menu on page 40).
• If the multichannel analog inputs are selected, select a different input function.
2 DIGITAL or DTS does not • These indicators does not light if playback is paused.
light when playing Dolby/DTS
software.
• Check the playback (especially the digital output) settings of the source component.
When playing Dolby Digital or • Check that the player is connected using a digital connection.
DTS sources, the receiver’s
format indicators do not light.
• Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 55).
• Check that the player isn’t set up so that Dolby Digital and DTS sources are converted to PCM.
• Ensure that if there are several audio tracks on the disc, the Dolby Digital or DTS is selected.
When playing certain discs,
none of the receiver’s format
indicators light.
• The disc may not contain 5.1/6.1 channel material. Check the disc packaging for more on what
audio tracks are recorded on the disc.
When playing a disc with the • Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 55).
listening mode set to Auto
Surround or ALC, 2 PL II or
Neo:6 appear on the receiver.
• If a two channel soundtrack is currently playing (including Dolby Surround encoded), then this is
not a malfunction. Check the disc packaging for details about the audio tracks available.
96
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
12
Symptom
During playback of a Surround • The source may be Dolby Surround EX/DTS-ES software, but it has no flag to indicate it is 6.1
EX or DTS-ES source on the compatible. Set to SBch ON (see Using surround back channel processing on page 53), then switch
Remedy
SBch AUTO setting, EX or ES to the THX Surround EX or Standard EX listening mode (see Listening in surround sound on page 50).
does not appear, or the signal
is not properly processed.
During playback of DVD-Audio, • This will occur when playing DVD-Audio material over the HDMI connection. This is not a
the display shows PCM.
malfunction.
The power turns off
• See the Power section (page 92).
automatically and some
indicator flashes, or some
indicator flashes and the power
does not turn on.
Remote control
Symptom
Remedy
Cannot be remote controlled. • Set a 5-digit preset code corresponding to the receiver to be operated in the remote control (see
Operating multiple receivers on page 67).
• Check whether the receiver’s remote control mode is properly set (see Remote Control Mode Setup
on page 90).
• Try replacing the batteries in the remote control (see Loading the batteries on page 8).
• Be sure to operate within 7 m and a 30º angle of the remote sensor on the front panel (see
Operating range of remote control unit on page 8).
• Check that there are no obstacles between the receiver and the remote control.
• Make sure that there is no fluorescent or other strong light shining on to the remote sensor.
• Check the connections of the CONTROL IN jack (see Operating other Pioneer components with this
unit’s sensor on page 33).
Other components can’t be
operated with the system
remote.
• If the battery ran down, the preset codes may have been cleared. Re-enter the preset codes.
• The preset code may be incorrect. Redo the procedure for entering preset codes.
HDMI
Symptom
Remedy
The HDMI indicator blinks
• Check all the points below.
continuously.
No picture or sound.
• This receiver is HDCP-compatible. Check that the components you are connecting are also HDCP-
compatible. If they are not, please connect them using the component, S-Video or composite video
jacks.
• Depending on the connected source component, it’s possible that it will not work with this receiver
(even if it is HDCP-compatible). In this case, connect using the component, S-Video or composite
video jacks between source and receiver.
• If the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI component directly to your monitor,
please consult the component or monitor manual or contact the manufacturer for support.
• If video images do not appear on your TV or flat screen TV, try adjusting the resolution, DeepColor
or other setting for your component.
• While analog video signals are being output over HDMI, use a separate connection for audio
output.
• When this receiver reproduces MULTI CH IN audio sources with the HDMI setting set to
THROUGH, you cannot hear audio output from all channels. In this case, make a digital or analog
audio connection.
• To output signals in DeepColor, use an HDMI cable (High Speed HDMI™ Cable) to connect this
receiver to a component or TV with the DeepColor feature.
No picture.
• Try changing the Resolution setting (in Setting the Video options on page 61).
• Set the HDMI output setting to the connected HDMI OUT terminal (in Switching the HDMI output
on page 65).
97
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
12
Symptom
Remedy
No sound, or sound suddenly • Check that the HDMI AV setting is set to AMP/THROUGH.
ceases.
• If the component is a DVI device, use a separate connection for the audio.
• If analog video is being output over HDMI, please use a separate connection for the audio.
• Check the audio output settings of the source component.
Noisy or distorted picture.
• Sometimes a video deck may output a noisy video signal (during scanning, for example), or the
video quality may just be poor (with some video game units, for example). The picture quality may
also depend on the settings, etc. of your display device. Switch off the video converter and reconnect
the source and display device using the same type of connection (component, S-Video or
composite), then start playback again.
• If the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI component directly to your monitor,
please consult the component or monitor manual or contact the manufacturer for support.
HDCP ERROR shows in the
display.
• Check whether or not the connected component is compatible with HDCP. If it is not compatible
with HDCP, reconnect the source device using a different type of connection (component, S-Video
or composite). Some components that are compatible with HDCP still cause this message to be
displayed, but so long as there is no problem with displaying video, this is not a malfunction.
Amp-linked operation not
possible using KURO LINK
function.
• Check the HDMI connections.
• The cable may be damaged.
• Select ON for the KURO LINK setting (see KURO LINK Setup on page 58).
• Turn the TV’s power on before turning on this receiver’s power.
• Set the TV side KURO LINK setting to ON.
• Connect the TV to the HDMI OUT 1 terminal and set the HDMI output to HDMI OUT 1. Then turn
on first the TV’s power, then this receiver’s power.
Important information regarding the HDMI connection
There are cases where you may not be able to route HDMI signals through this receiver (this depends on the HDMI-
equipped component you are connecting–check with the manufacturer for HDMI compatibility information).
If you aren’t receiving HDMI signals properly through this receiver (from your component), please try one of the
following configurations when connecting up.
Configuration A
Configuration B
Use component video cables to connect the video output
of your HDMI-equipped component to the receiver’s
component video input. The receiver can then convert the
analog component video signal to a digital HDMI signal
for transmission to the display. For this configuration,
use the most convenient connection (digital is
recommended) for sending audio to the receiver. See the
operating instructions for more on audio connections.
Connect your HDMI-equipped component directly to the
display using an HDMI cable. Then use the most
convenient connection (digital is recommended) for
sending audio to the receiver. See the operating
instructions for more on audio connections. Set the
display volume to minimum when using this
configuration.
Note
Note
• If your display only has one HDMI terminal, you can
only receive HDMI video from the connected
component.
• The picture quality will change slightly during
conversion.
• Depending on the component, audio output may be
limited to the number of channels available from the
connected display unit (for example audio output is
reduced to 2 channels for a monitor with stereo audio
limitations).
• If you want to switch the input function, you’ll have to
switch functions on both the receiver and your
display unit.
• Since the sound is muted on the display when using
the HDMI connection, you must adjust the volume on
the display every time you switch input functions.
98
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
12
USB interface
Symptoms
Causes
Remedies
The folders/files stored on a
The folders/files are currently stored in a region Store the folders/files in the FAT region.
USB memory device are not other than the FAT (File Allocation Table) region.
displayed.
The number of levels in a folder is more than 8.
Limit the maximum number of levels in a folder to
8 (page 45).
There are more than 30 000 folders/files stored in Limit the maximum number of folders/files stored
a USB memory device.
in a USB memory device to 30 000 (page 45).
The audio files are copyrighted.
Copyrighted audio files stored on a USB memory
device cannot be played back (page 45).
A USB memory device is not The USB memory device does not support the
Try using a USB memory device compatible with
the mass storage class specifications. Note that
there are cases where even the audio files stored
on a USB memory device compatible with the
mass storage class specifications are not played
back on this receiver (page 45).
recognized.
mass storage class specifications.
Connect the USB memory device and switch on
this receiver (page 36).
A USB hub is currently being used.
This receiver does not support a USB hub
(page 45).
This receiver recognizes the USB memory device Switch off and on again this receiver.
as a fraud.
A USB memory device is
Some formats of a USB memory device, including Check whether the format of your USB memory
connected and displayed, but FAT 12, NTFS, and HFS, cannot be played back on device is either FAT 16 or FAT 32. Note that the FAT
the audio files stored on the this receiver.
USB memory device cannot
be played back.
12, NTFS, and HFS formats cannot be played back
on this receiver (page 45).
The file format cannot be properly played back on See the list of file formats that can be played back
this receiver.
on this receiver (page 47).
If the problem is not solved after the troubleshooting above, if the screen freezes unexpectedly or if the buttons on the
remote control or front panel stop working completely, do the following:
• Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel to turn off the power, then turn the power back on.
• If the power cannot be turned off, press and hold STANDBY/ON on the front panel for over 10 seconds. The
power will turn off. (In this case, the various settings made on the receiver may be cleared.)
99
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
Surround sound formats
12
Dolby Surround is an encoding system which embeds
surround sound information within a stereo soundtrack,
which a Dolby Pro Logic decoder can then use for
enhanced surround listening with greater sound detail.
Below is a brief description of the main surround sound
formats you’ll find on DVDs, satellite, cable and
terrestrial broadcasts, and video cassettes.
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital Plus is the next-generation audio
technology for all high-definition programming and
media. It combines the efficiency to meet future
broadcast demands with the power and flexibility to
realize the full audio potential expected in the upcoming
high-definition era. Built on Dolby Digital, the multi-
channel audio standard for DVD and HD broadcasts
worldwide, Dolby Digital Plus was designed for the next-
generation A/V receivers but remains fully compatible
with all current A/V receivers.
Dolby
The Dolby technologies are explained below. See
www.dolby.com for more detailed information.
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital Plus delivers multi-channel audio programs
of up to 7.1 channels (*) and supports multiple programs
in a single encoded bitstream with the maximum bit rate
potential of up to 6 Mbps and the maximum bit rate
performance of up to 3 Mbps on HD DVD and 1.7 Mbps
on Blu-ray Disc, and it outputs Dolby Digital bitstreams
for playback on existing Dolby Digital systems. Dolby
Digital Plus can accurately reproduce the sound
originally intended by directors and producers.
Dolby Digital is a multichannel digital audio coding
system widely used in cinemas, and in the home for DVD
and digital broadcast soundtracks. It can deliver up to six
discrete audio channels, comprising five full range
channels and a special LFE (low frequency effects)
channel used mainly for deep, rumbling sound effects;
hence the term “5.1-channel” Dolby Digital.
In addition to the format features above, Dolby Digital
decoders offer downmixing for compatibility with mono,
stereo and Dolby Pro Logic audio from a number of bit
rates and channels. Another feature, called Dialog
Normalization, attenuates programs based on the
average level of dialog in a program relative to its peak
level (also known as Dialnorm) in order to achieve
uniform playback level.
It also features multi-channel sound with discrete
channel output, interactive mixing and streaming
capability in advanced systems. Supported by High-
Definition Media Interface (HDMI), a single-cable digital
connection is possible for high-definition audio and video.
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD is the next-generation lossless encoding
technology developed for high-definition optical discs in
the upcoming era. Dolby TrueHD delivers tantalizing
sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master,
unlocking the true high-definition entertainment
experience on high-definition optical discs in the next
generation. When coupled with high-definition video,
Dolby TrueHD offers an unprecedented home theater
experience with stunning sound and high-definition
picture.
Dolby Digital Surround EX
Dolby Digital Surround EX (the EX stands for EXtended)
is an extension of Dolby Digital encoding whereby a
surround back channel is matrixed into the surround left/
right channels for 6.1 channel playback. This allows for
compatibility with Dolby Digital 5.1 channel decoding, as
well as for decoding using Dolby Digital EX.
Dolby Pro Logic IIx and Dolby Surround
Dolby Pro Logic IIx is an improved version of the Dolby
Pro Logic II (and Dolby Pro Logic) decoding system. Using
the innovative “steering logic” circuit, this system
extracts surround sound from sources as follows:
It supports bit rates of up to 18 Mbps and records up to 8
full-range channels (*) individually with 24-bit/96 kHz
audio. It also features extensive metadata including
dialogue normalization and dynamic range control.
Supported by High-Definition Media Interface (HDMI), a
single-cable digital connection is possible for high-
definition audio and video.
• Dolby Pro Logic – 4.1 channel sound (mono
surround) from any stereo source
• Dolby Pro Logic II – 5.1 channel sound (stereo
surround) from any stereo source
HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc standards currently limit their
maximum number of audio channels to eight, whereas
Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby TrueHD support more than
eight audio channels.
• Dolby Pro Logic IIx – 6.1 or 7.1 channel sound
(stereo surround and surround back) from two
channel or 5.1 (and 6.1) channel sources
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby, Pro Logic, Surround EX and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
With two channel sources, the “.1” subwoofer channel is
generated by bass management in the receiver.
100
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
12
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS
DTS-HD Master Audio is a technology that delivers master
audio sources recorded in a professional studio to listeners
without any loss of data, preserving audio quality. DTS-HD
Master Audio adopts variable data transfer rates,
facilitating data transfer to the maximum rate of 24.5 Mbps
in the Blu-ray disc format, 18.0 Mbps in the HD-DVD
format, which by far exceeds that of a standard DVD. These
high data transfer rates enable lossless transmission of 96
kHz/24-bit 7.1-channel audio sources without deteriorating
the quality of the original sound. DTS-HD Master Audio is
an irreplaceable technology that can reproduce sound
faithfully as intended by the creator of music or movies.
The DTS technologies are explained below. See
www.dtstech.com for more detailed information.
DTS Digital Surround
DTS Digital Surround is a 5.1-channel audio coding
system from DTS Inc. now widely used for DVD-Video,
DVD-Audio, 5.1 music discs, digital broadcasts, and
video games. It can deliver up to six discrete audio
channels, comprising five full range channels, including
an LFE channel. Higher sound quality is achieved
through the use of a low compression rate, and high
rates of transmittance during playback.
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s:
5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,226,616;
6,487,535; 7,212,872; 7,333,929; 7,392,195; 7,272,567 &
other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS is
a registered trademark and the DTS logos, Symbol, DTS-HD
and DTS-HD Master Audio are trademarks of DTS, Inc. ©
1996-2008 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
DTS-ES
DTS-ES (the ES stands for Extended Surround) is a
decoder that is capable of decoding both DTS-ES
Discrete 6.1 and DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 encoded sources.
DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 gives ‘true’ 6.1 channel sound, with
a completely separate (discrete) surround back channel.
DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 has a surround back channel matrixed
into the surround left/right channels. Both sources are
also compatible with a conventional DTS 5.1 channel
decoder.
Windows Media Audio 9 Professional
Windows Media Audio 9 Professional (WMA9 Pro) is a
discrete surround format developed by Microsoft
Corporation.
DTS Neo:6
DTS Neo:6 can generate 7.1 channel surround sound
from any matrixed stereo source (such as video or TV)
and from 5.1 channel sources. It uses both the channel
information already encoded into the source, as well as
its own processing to determine channel localization
(with two channel sources, the “.1” subwoofer channel is
generated by bass management in the receiver). Two
modes (Cinema and Music) are available using DTS
Neo:6 with two channel sources.
Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
About iPod
DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 is an extension of the original DTS Digital
Surround which offers high quality 96 kHz/24-bit audio
using a DTS 96/24 decoder. This format is also fully
backward compatible with all existing decoders. This
means that DVD players can play this software using a
conventional DTS 5.1 channel decoder.
“Made for iPod” means that an electronic accessory has
been designed to connect specifically to iPod and has
been certified by the developer to meet Apple
performance standards.
“Works with iPhone” means that an electronic accessory
has been designed to connect specifically to iPhone and
has been certified by the developer to meet Apple
performance standards.
DTS-EXPRESS
DTS-EXPRESS is a low-bitrate encoding technology
supporting up to 5.1 channels with fixed data transfer
rates. This format is incorporated with sub audio on HD
DVD and secondary audio on Blu-ray Disc while boasting
the potential applicability to upcoming broadcasts and
memory audio contents.
Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or
its compliance with safety and regulatory standards.
iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and
other countries. iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc.
101
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
12
•
THX Surround EX
THX Surround EX - Dolby Digital Surround EX is a joint development
of Dolby Laboratories and the THX Ltd. In a movie theater, film
soundtracks that have been encoded with Dolby Digital Surround EX
technology are able to reproduce an extra channel which has been
added during the mixing of the program. This channel, called
Surround Back, places sounds behind the listener in addition to the
currently available front left, front center, front right, surround right,
surround left and subwoofer channels. This additional channel
provides the opportunity for more detailed imaging behind the
listener and brings more depth, spacious ambience and sound
localization than ever before. Movies that were created using the
Dolby Digital Surround EX technology, when released into the home
consumer market may exhibit wording to that effect on the
packaging. A list of movies created using this technology can be
found on the Dolby web site at www.dolby.com.
Only amplifier and controller products bearing the THX Surround EX
logo, when in the THX Surround EX mode, faithfully reproduce this
new technology in the home.
This product may also engage the “THX Surround EX” mode during
the playback of 5.1 channel material that is not Dolby Digital
Surround EX encoded. In such case the information delivered to the
Surround Back channel will be program dependent and may or may
not be very pleasing depending on the particular soundtrack and the
tastes of the individual listener.
About THX
The THX technologies are explained below. See
www.thx.com for more detailed information.
•
THX Cinema processing
THX is an exclusive set of standards and technologies established by
THX Ltd. THX grew from George Lucas’ personal desire to make your
experience of the film soundtrack, in both movie theatres and in your
home theatre, as faithful as possible to what the director intended.
Movie soundtracks are mixed in special movie theatres called
dubbing stages and are designed to be played back in movie theatres
with similar equipment and conditions. This same soundtrack is then
transferred directly onto Laserdisc, VHS tape, DVD, etc., and is not
changed for playback in a small home theatre environment. THX
engineers developed patented technologies to accurately translate
the sound from the movie theatre environment into the home,
correcting the tonal and spatial errors that occur. On this product,
when the THX indicator is on, THX features are automatically added
in Cinema modes (e.g. THX Cinema, THX Surround EX).
•
Advanced Speaker Array (ASA)
ASA is a proprietary THX technology which processes the sound fed
to 2 side and 2 back surround speakers to provide the optimal
surround sound experience. When you set up your home theater
system using all eight speaker outputs (Left, Center, Right, Surround
Right, Surround Back Right, Surround Back Left, Surround Left and
Subwoofer) placing the two Surround Back speakers close together
facing the front of the room as shown in the diagram will provide the
largest sweet spot. If for practical reasons you have to place the
Surround Back speakers apart, you will need to go THX Audio Set-up
screen and choose the setting that most closely corresponds to the
speaker spacing, which will re-optimize the surround sound-field.
ASA is used in three new modes; THX Select2 CINEMA, THX Select2
MUSIC and THX Select2 GAMES.
•
Re-Equalization
The tonal balance of a film soundtrack will be excessively bright and
harsh when played back over audio equipment in the home because
film soundtracks were designed to be played back in large movie
theaters using very different professional equipment. Re-Equalization
restores the correct tonal balance for watching a movie soundtrack in
a small home environment.
•
Timbre Matching
The human ear changes our perception of a sound depending on the
direction from which the sound is coming. In a movie theatre, there is
an array of surround speakers so that the surround information is all
around you. In a home theatre, you use only two speakers located to the
side of your head. The Timbre Matching feature filters the information
going to the surround speakers so that they more closely match the
tonal characteristics of the sound coming from the front speakers. This
ensures seamless panning between the front and surround speakers.
•
Boundary Gain Compensation™
Depending on the listener’s and the subwoofer’s position, the listener
may experience an excessive bass effect. This feature compensates
for excessive bass resulting from a boundary gain effect. This feature
is designed to operate when used with a subwoofer certified to THX
Select2™ specifications.
•
Adaptive Decorrelation
•
THX Music
In a movie theatre, a large number of surround speakers help create
an enveloping surround sound experience, but in a home theatre
there are usually only two speakers. This can make the surround
speakers sound like headphones that lack spaciousness and
envelopment. The surround sounds will also collapse into the closest
speaker as you move away from the middle seating position. Adaptive
Decorrelation slightly changes one surround channel’s time and
phase relationship with respect to the other surround channel. This
expands the listening position and creates—with only two speakers—
the same spacious surround experience as in a movie theatre.
For the replay of multi-channel music the THX MusicMode should be
selected. In this mode THX ASA processing is applied to the surround
channels of all 5.1 encoded music sources such as DTS, Dolby Digital
and DVD-Audio to provide a wide stable rear soundstage.
•
THX Games
For the replay of stereo and multi-channel game audio the THX
Games Mode should be selected. In this mode THX ASA processing
is applied to the surround channels of all 5.1 and 2.0 encoded game
sources such as analog, PCM, DTS and Dolby Digital. This accurately
places all game audio surround information, providing a full 360
degree playback environment. THX Games Mode is unique as it gives
you a smooth transition of audio in all points of the surround field.
•
THX Select2 Plus
Before any home theatre component can be THX Select2 Plus
certified, it must incorporate all the features above and also pass a
rigorous series of quality and performance tests. Only then can a
product feature the THX Select2 Plus logo, which is your guarantee
that the Home Theatre products you purchase will give you superb
performance for many years to come. THX Select2 Plus requirements
cover every aspect of the product including pre-amplifier and power
amplifier performance and operation, and hundreds of other
parameters in both the digital and analog domain.
102
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
12
•
THX Loudness Plus Description
THX Loudness Plus is a new volume control technology featured in
THX Ultra2 Plus™ and THX Select2 Plus™ Certified amplifiers. With
THX Loudness Plus, home theater audiences can now experience the
rich details in a surround mix at any volume level. A consequence of
turning the volume below Reference Level is that certain sound
elements can be lost or perceived differently by the listener. THX
Loudness Plus compensates for the tonal and spatial shifts that occur
when the volume is reduced by intelligently adjusting ambient
surround channel levels and frequency response. This enables users
to experience the true impact of soundtracks regardless of the volume
setting. THX Loudness Plus is automatically applied when listening in
any THX listening mode. The new THX Cinema, THX Music, and THX
Games modes are tailored to apply the proper THX Loudness Plus
settings for each type of content.
About Neural – THX Surround
®
Neural-THX Surround is taking surround sound to the next level. This
•
ASA Description
revolutionary new technology delivers the rich envelopment and
discrete image detail of surround sound in a format that is fully
compatible with stereo from various content sources. Neural-THX
Surround enables 5.1, 6.1 and 7.1-channel support for gaming, movies
and digital music. By unmasking the audio details, typically lost by
other playback modes, audiences will experience the deep ambience
and subtle details of movies, music and games.
ASA is a proprietary THX technology which processes the sound fed
to 2 side and 2 back surround speakers to provide the optimal
surround sound experience. When you set up your home theater
system using all eight speaker outputs (Left, Center, Right, Surround
Right, Surround Back Right, Surround Back Left, Surround Left and
Subwoofer), be sure to go to the THX Audio Set-up screen and choose
the setting that most closely corresponds to the speaker spacing,
which will re-optimize the surround sound-field. ASA is used in three
modes; THX Ultra2 Cinema, THX Ultra2 Music and THX Ultra2 Games.
®
Neural-THX Digital Music™ is a new surround mode specifically
designed to enhance the playback of compressed digital music content.
It provides listeners with an expanded sound stage and clean surround
experience, even with compressed audio sources such as MP3s and
Internet streams.
Neural-THX Surround has been chosen as the official surround sound
format for TV sports broadcasting, 7.1 games, Music Direct Internet
streaming as well as leading FM/HD radio stations worldwide. And with
this technology being used by sound designers during content
creation, as well as embedded into playback devices, Neural-THX
Surround promises a listening experience that is true to the original
mix.
•
THX Select2 Cinema
THX Select2 Cinema mode plays 5.1 movies using all 8 speakers
giving you the best possible movie watching experience. In this mode,
ASA processing blends the side surround speakers and back
surround speakers providing the optimal mix of ambient and
directional surround sounds.
DTS-ES (Matrix and 6.1 Discrete) and Dolby Digital Surround EX
encoded soundtracks will be automatically detected in Select2
Cinema mode if the appropriate flag has been encoded.
For additional information, please visit www.neuralsurround.com.
This product is manufactured under license from Neural Audio
Corporation and THX Ltd. PIONEER Corporation hereby grants the user
a non-exclusive, non-transferable, limited right of use to this product
under USA and foreign patent, patent pending and other technology or
trademarks owned by Neural Audio Corporation and THX Ltd. “Neural
Surround”, “Neural Audio”, “Neural” and “NRL” are trademarks and
logos owned by Neural Audio Corporation, THX is a trademark of THX
Ltd., which may be registered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved.
Some Dolby Digital Surround EX soundtracks are missing the digital
flag that allows automatic switching. If you know that the movie that
you are watching is encoded in Surround EX, you can manually select
the THX Surround EX playback mode, otherwise THX Select2 Cinema
mode will apply ASA processing to provide optimum replay.
•
THX Select2 Music
For the playback of multi-channel music the THX Select2 Music mode
should be selected. In this mode THX ASA processing is applied to the
surround channels of all 5.1 encoded music sources such as DTS,
Dolby Digital and DVD-Audio to provide a wide stable rear
soundstage.
•
THX Select2 Games
For the playback of stereo and multi-channel game audio the THX
Select2 Games mode should be selected. In this mode THX ASA
processing is applied to the surround channels of all 5.1 and 2.0
encoded game sources such as analog, PCM, DTS and Dolby Digital.
This accurately places all game audio surround information,
providing a full 360 degree playback environment. THX Select2 Games
mode is unique as it gives you a smooth transition of audio in all
points of the surround field.
THX, the THX logo and Select2 Plus are trademarks of THX Ltd. which
may be registered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved. All other
trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
103
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
12
Auto Surround, ALC and Stream Direct with different input signal formats
The following charts show what you will hear with different input signal formats, depending on the Stream Direct mode (see
Using Stream Direct on page 53) you have selected.
Stereo (2 channel) signal formats
Input signal format
Surround Back speaker(s): Connected
Dolby Digital Surround
Auto Surround / ALC / DIRECT
PURE DIRECT
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE
Neo:6 CINEMA
Stereo playback
As above
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE
Neo:6 CINEMA
Stereo playback
ANALOG DIRECT (stereo)
Stereo playback
As above
DTS Surround
Other stereo sources
Analog sources
PCM sources
As above
DVD-A sources
As above
SACD sources
As above
As above
Surround Back speaker(s): Not connected
Dolby Digital Surround
2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE
Neo:6 CINEMA
Stereo playback
As above
2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE
Neo:6 CINEMA
Stereo playback
ANALOG DIRECT (stereo)
Stereo playback
As above
DTS Surround
Other stereo sources
Analog sources
PCM sources
As above
DVD-A sources
SACD sources
As above
As above
As above
Multichannel signal formats
Input signal format
Surround Back speaker(s): Connected
Dolby Digital EX (6.1 channel flagged)
Auto Surround / ALC
Dolby Digital EX
PURE DIRECT / DIRECT
Dolby Digital EX
a
a
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE
DTS-ES (6.1 channel sources/6.1 channel flagged)
DTS sources (5.1 channel encoding)
DTS-HD sources
DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete)
DTS+Neo:6
DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete)
Straight decoding
As above
Straight decoding
As above
Other 6.1/7.1 channel sources
Other 5.1 channel sources
As above
Dolby Digital EX
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE
As above
a
Surround Back speaker(s): Not connected
DVD-A sources/Multi-ch PCM
Straight decoding
As above
Straight decoding
As above
SACD sources (5.1 channel encoding)
Other 5.1/6.1/7.1 channel sources
As above
As above
a.Unavailable with only one surround back speaker connected.
104
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
Preset code list
12
You should have no problem controlling a component if you find the manufacturer in this list, but please note that there
are cases where codes for the manufacturer in the list will not work for the model that you are using. There are also
cases where only certain functions may be controllable after assigning the proper preset code.
example:
Category
TV
General
Pioneer 10037
Preset code
Manufacturer
TV
Casio 10037
Europa 10037
Hitachi Fujian 10150
Hoeher 10865
General
Cathay 10037
Europhon 10037
Evesham 11719
Evolution 11756
Exquisit 10037
Pioneer 10037, 10166, 10679, 11247,
CCE 10037
Celebrity 10000
Hornyphon 10037
HP 11502
11260, 11398
A.R. Systems 10556, 10037
Accent 10037
Centurion 10037
Cineral 10092, 10451
Citizen 10060, 10092, 10180
Clarion 10180
Hugoson 10890, 11217
Humax 12057
Hypson 10556, 10037
Hyundai 10865
Ferguson 10037, 10625, 10053,
12053
Acer 11403
Acoustic Solutions 11523
ADL 11217
Fidelity 10037, 10171
Finlux 10556, 10037
Firstline 10556, 10037
Fisher 10000, 10047, 10054, 10154
Flint 10037
Clarivox 10037
Iberia 10037
ICE 10037
Iiyama 10890, 11217
Imperial 10037
Indiana 10037
Innowert 10865
Inteq 10017
Admiral 10093
Clatronic 10037
Aiko 10037, 10092
Aim 10037
Condor 10037
Conia 11498, 11687
Contec 10037, 10180
Cosmel 10037
Akai 10556, 10037, 10000, 10702,
11675
Formenti 10037
Fortress 10093
Akiba 10037
Akito 10037
Craig 10180
Fraba 10037
Crosley 10054, 10180
Crown 10037, 10053, 10180, 10672
Crown Mustang 10672
CTX 11756
Friac 10037
Interbuy 10037
Interfunk 10037
Internal 10556
Intervision 10037
Irradio 10037
Isukai 10037
Akura 10037, 10171, 11498, 11687
Alba 10037, 10587
All-Tel 10865
Fujimaro 10865
Fujitsu 10683, 10809, 10853
Fujitsu General 10683
Funai 10171, 10180, 11394, 11817
Futuretech 10180
Allstar 10037
Curtis Mathes 10047, 10051, 10054,
10060, 10093, 10145, 10154,
10166, 10451
Amstrad 10037, 10000, 10171
Amtron 10000, 10180
Anam 10037, 10180, 10250
Anam National 10037, 10650, 10250
Anitech 10037
ITS 10037
ITV 10037
Galaxi 10037
CXC 10180
Galaxis 10037
D-Vision 10556, 10037
Daewoo 10556, 10037, 10092,
10154, 10178, 10451, 10623,
10661, 10865, 11812
Dansai 10037
Gateway 11755
JCB 10000
GE 10047, 10051, 10093, 10178,
10451, 11147
JMB 10556
Ansonic 10037
Jubilee 10556
AOC 10625, 11365
Ardem 10037
GEC 10037
JVC 10650, 10053, 10054, 10093,
10160, 10463, 10683, 10731,
11253, 11428, 12118
Genexxa 10037
Arena 10037
Dawa 10037
Gericom 10865, 11217
Gibralter 10017
Aristona 10556, 10037
Asberg 10037
Daytron 10037, 10092, 10178
Decca 10037
Kaisui 10037
Go Video 10060
Atlantic 10037
Kathrein 10556
KEC 10060, 10180
Kendo 10037
Dell 11264, 11403
Denon 10145
GoldStar 10037, 10178
Goodmans 10556, 10037, 10625,
10000, 10661, 11645, 11687,
11719, 12053
Audiosonic 10037, 10865
Audiovox 10092, 10180, 10451,
10623
Denver 10037, 10587
Desmet 10037
Kiton 10037
Aumark 10060
Kneissel 10556, 10037
Kolin 11240, 11331, 11610
Kolster 10037
Konig 10037
Diamant 10037
Digatron 10037
Digiline 10037
Gradiente 10037, 10053
Granada 10037, 10226
Grandin 10556, 10037, 10865
Grundig10556, 10037, 10587, 10672,
12053, 12127
AVP 10000
Awa 10451
Baird 10037
Digimate 10890
Dixi 10037
Konka 10037
Basic Line 10556, 10037
Baur 10037
Korpel 10037
DMTech 12001
Grunpy 10180
Kosmos 10037
KTV 10180
Baysonic 10180
Beaumark 10178
Beko 10037
Dream Vision 11704
Dual 10037
H & B 12001
Haier 11748
Dumont 10017
L&S Electronic 10865
Lecson 10037
Hallmark 10178
Bell & Howell 10017, 10154
BenQ 11574
Dux 10037
Hannspree 11351, 12027
Hanseatic 10556, 10037, 10625,
10661
Dynatron 10037
Dynex 11463
Lenco 10037, 10587
Beon 10037
Bestar 10037
Leyco 10037
LG 10556, 10037, 10017, 10178,
10856, 11178, 11423, 11663, 11768
Liesenk & Tter 10037
Liesenkotter 10037
Lifetec 10037, 10683
Loewe 10037, 10633, 11884
Logik 11217, 11687
ECE 10037
Hantarex 10037, 10865
Hantor 10037
Blue Sky 10556, 10037, 11314
BPL 10037
Elbe 10556, 10037
Electroband 10000
Electrohome 10463
Element 11687
ELG 10037
Harman/Kardon 10054
Harsper 10865
Bradford 10180
Brandt 10625
Harvard 10180
Brinkmann 10037
Brionvega 10037
Broksonic 10463
Bush 10556, 10037, 10587, 10661,
11645, 11687, 12053
Byd:sign 11309
Harwood 10037
Elin 10037
Elite 10037
Hauppauge 10037
Havermy 10093
Lumatron 10037
Lux May 10037
Emerson 10037, 10017, 10047,
10154, 10178, 10180, 10236,
10463, 10623
HCM 10037
LXI 10047, 10054, 10154, 10156
Highline 10037
M Electronic 10037, 10661
Madison 10037
Hinari 10037
Carena 10037
Carrefour 10037
Carver 10054
Envision 11365
Erres 10037
Hisense 10556, 11314, 12098
Hitachi 10037, 10000, 10047, 10051,
10054, 10145, 10150, 10178,
11484, 11576, 11691
MAG 11498, 11687
ESC 10037
Magnadyne 10054
Cascade 10037
Euroman 10037
Magnavox 10054, 11454, 11866
105
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
12
Magnum 10037
Plantron 10037
Soundwave 10037
Squareview 10171
SSS 10180
World-of-Vision 10865, 10890,
Manesth 10037
Playsonic 10037
Polaroid 11498, 11523, 11645,
11687, 11766
11217
Manhattan 10037
Xenius 10661
Xoro 11217
Xrypton 10037
Marantz 10556, 10037, 10054,
10704, 11398
Standard 10037
Portland 10092
Powerpoint 10037
Prism 10051
Starlite 10037, 10180
Strato 10037
Mark 10037
Yamaha 11576
Yamishi 10037
Yapshe 10250
Yokan 10037
Yoko 10037
Matsui 10556, 10037
Maxent 11755
Sunkai 10865
Profitronic 10037
Proline 10037, 10625
Proscan 10047
Sunstar 10037
Mediator 10556, 10037
Medion 10556, 10037, 12001
Megatron 10145, 10178
Memorex 10037, 10060, 10150,
Sunstech 12001
Sunwood 10037
Prosco 10156
Prosonic 10037
SuperTech 10556, 10037
Supreme 10000
Zenith 10017, 10463
10154, 10178, 10180, 10250, 10463 Protec 10037
Mercury 10037
Metronic 10625
SVA 10587, 10865
Swisstec 10865
Protech 10037
Proton 10178
Plasma television
Sylvania 10054, 10171, 11394, 11864
Symphonic 10171, 10180
Syntax 11144, 11240, 11331
Sysline 10037
Pioneer 10166, 10679, 11247, 11260,
Metz 10037, 10587
MGA 10150, 10178
Micromaxx 10037, 12001
Midland 10017, 10047, 10051
Minato 10037
ProVision 10556, 10037
Pulsar 10017
11398, 11633, 14002, 14003, 14004
Pvision 12001
Akai 11675
All-Tel 10865
Pye 10556, 10037
Tandy 10093
Quadral 10051
Quasar 10051, 10250, 10865
Quelle 10037
Tatung 10037, 11719, 11756
TCM 12001
CTX 11756
Minoka 10037
Mirai 11852, 12072
Mitsubishi 10556, 10037, 10093,
10150, 10160, 10178
Morgan's 10037
Daewoo 10661, 10865
Dell 11264
Dream Vision 11704
Teac 10037, 10171, 10178
Tec 10037
R-Line 10037
Tech Line 10037
Radiola 10556, 10037
Radiomarelli 10037
RadioShack 10037, 10047, 10154,
10178, 10180
Technics 10556, 10650, 10051, 10250
TechniSat 10556
Evolution 11756
Motorola 10093
MTC 10060, 10092
Multitec 10037
Multitech 10037, 10180
Mx Onda 11498, 11687
Myryad 10556
Fujimaro 10865
Fujitsu 10683, 10809, 10853
Fujitsu General 10683
Technosonic 10556, 10625
Techwood 10051
Radiotone 10037
RCA 10625, 10047, 10051, 10090,
10093, 11147, 11247, 11781
Realistic 10154, 10180
Recor 10037
Tecnimagen 10556
Teknika 10054, 10060, 10092, 10180 Gateway 11755
Telecor 10037
Gericom 10865
Grandin 10865
NAD 10037, 10865
Naiko 10037
Telefunken 10037, 10625, 10702
Telefusion 10037
Rectiligne 10037
Hantarex 10865
Harsper 10865
Nakimura 10037
NAT 10226
Telegazi 10037
Redstar 10037
Telemeister 10037
Telesonic 10037
Reflex 10037
Hitachi 11484, 11576
Hoeher 10865
National 10226
Relisys 10865, 11211, 11645
Remotec 10037, 10093, 10145,
10171, 10250
NEC 10053, 10704, 11704, 11797
Neckermann 10556, 10037
NEI 10037
Telestar 10556, 10037
Teletech 10037
Hyundai 10865
Innowert 10865
Teleview 10037
Revox 10037
Neovia 10865, 11710
Netsat 10037
Tennessee 10037
JVC 10053, 10731
RFT 10037
Tensai 10037
Roadstar 10037
L&S Electronic 10865
LG 10037, 10178, 11423, 11663
Neufunk 10556, 10037
New Tech 10556, 10037
Nikkai 10037
Tevion 10556, 10037, 11498, 11645,
11687
Runco 10017
Saba 10625
Thomson 10037, 10625, 11447
Thorn 10037
Magnavox 11866
Marantz 11398
Maxent 11755
Saivod 10037
Nikko 10178
Norcent 11365
Sampo 11755
TMK 10178
Tokai 10037
Samsung 10556, 10037, 10587,
10060, 10090, 10178, 10702,
10766, 10812, 10814, 11060,
11235, 11619, 12051
Sansui 10037, 10463
Sanyo 10037, 10000, 10047, 10154,
10704
Nordmende 10037, 12129
Normerel 10037
Novatronic 10037
NTC 10092
NEC 10704, 11704
Neovia 10865
Toshiba 10650, 10060, 10154, 10156,
11156, 11256, 11524, 11656
TRANS-continents 10556, 10037,
10865
Panasonic 11480, 10650, 10250,
10853, 11636, 11650
Philips 10556, 10605, 10690, 11756
Okano 10037
Transonic 10037, 10587
Trio 11498, 11687
Triumph 10556, 10037
TVTEXT 95 10556
Olevia 11144, 11240, 11331, 11610
Onida 10053, 11253
Onwa 10180
Quasar 10865
Sanyong 10037
SBR 10556, 10037
Schneider 10556, 10037
Scotch 10178
Relisys 10865
Opera 10037
Optimus 10650, 10166, 10250
Orbit 10037
Uher 10037
Sampo 11755
Samsung 10812, 11619
Sanyo 10704
Ultravox 10037
Unic Line 10037
United 10037, 10587
Universal 10037
Universum 10037
Univox 10037
Sears 10047, 10054, 10154, 10156,
10171, 10178
Orion 10556, 10037, 10236, 10463,
12001
Sliding 10865
Soemtron 10865
Sony 11651
SEG 10037
SEI 10037
Orline 10037
Osaki 10556, 10037
Osio 10037
Sei-Sinudyne 10037
Semivox 10180
Sunkai 10865
SVA 10865
Osume 10037
Semp 10156
V2max 10865
Otic 11498, 11687
Otto Versand 10556, 10037, 10226,
10093
Sylvania 11394
Serino 10093
V7 Videoseven 11217, 11755
Vestel 10037
Sharp 10053, 10093, 10818, 11093,
11393
Tatung 11756
Tevion 11645
Thomson 10625
Toshiba 10650
Vexa 10037
Pacific 10556
Shintoshi 10037
Shivaki 10037
Victor 10053, 10160, 10250, 11428
VideoSystem 10037
Vidikron 10054, 11398, 11633
Vidtech 10178
Packard Bell 11314
Palladium 10556, 10037
Palsonic 10037
Siemens 10037, 10145
Siera 10556, 10037
Silva 10037
Universal 10037
Panama 10037
Viewsonic 11755
Vision 10037
V2max 10865
V7 Videoseven 11755
Viewsonic 11755
Panasonic 11480, 10037, 10650,
10226, 10051, 10054, 10156,
10236, 10250, 10853, 11271,
11310, 11636, 11650
Panavision 10037
Silva Schneider 10037
Silvano 10587
Vizio 11758
Singer 10037
Vortec 10037
Xenius 10661
Yamaha 11576
Zenith 10017
Sinudyne 10037
SKY 10037
Voxson 10037
Waltham 10037
Penney 10047, 10051, 10060, 10156,
10178
Sliding 10865
Wards 10000, 10017, 10047, 10051,
10054, 10060, 10154, 10156,
10166, 10178, 10180, 11147
Watson 10037
Soemtron 10865
Solar Drape 10000
Solavox 10037
Perdio 10037
LCD
Perfekt 10037
Acoustic Solutions 11523
ADL 11217
Petters 10037
Soniko 10037
Wega 10037
Philco 10037, 10054, 10145, 11661
Philips 10556, 10037, 10000, 10017,
10054, 10605, 10690, 11254,
11454, 11506, 11756
Phoenix 10037
Sonneclair 10037
Sonoko 10037
Westinghouse 10885, 10889, 10890
Wharfedale 10556, 10037
White Westinghouse 10037, 10623
Wilson 10556
Akai 11675
AOC 10625
Sontec 10037
Sony 10810, 10037, 10000, 10053,
10150, 10154, 11651, 11685
Soundesign 10178, 10180
BenQ 11574
Blue Sky 11314
Bush 11645, 11687
Windy Sam 10556
Phonola 10556, 10037
106
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
12
Byd:sign 11309
Nordmende 12129
Loewe 11884
HDTV
Daewoo 10661
Dell 11264
Digatron 10037
Digimate 10890
Olevia 11144, 11240, 11331, 11610
Orion 12001
Pioneer 10679
TV/VCR Combination
Amstrad 10171
Rear Projection TV
Packard Bell 11314
Panasonic 11480, 10650, 11636,
11650
Philips 10556, 10605, 11506
Polaroid 11498, 11523, 11645,
11687, 11766
Broksonic 10463
Curtis Mathes 10051
Emerson 10463
Panasonic 11271
Philips 10037
Pye 10037
Element 11687
Envision 11365
Evesham 11719
Sony 11651
Ferguson 10625
Fidelity 10171
Funai 11394, 11817
Thomson 10625
Toshiba 11524, 11656
Relisys 11211, 11645
Gericom 10865, 11217
Goodmans 11645, 11687, 11719
Grandin 10865
GE 10047, 10051, 10093
GoldStar 10037
Grundig 10556, 10037
Samsung 10766, 10812, 10814,
11235, 11619, 12051
Sharp 10818, 11093, 11393
Sliding 10865
TV/DVD Combination
Grundig 12127
Akai 11675
Alba 10587
LG 10178
Haier 11748
Sony 10810, 11651, 11685
Sunkai 10865
Hannspree 11351, 12027
Hisense 11314, 12098
Hitachi 11484, 11576
Hoeher 10865
Bush 10587
Magnavox 10054
Memorex 10250
SVA 10587, 10865
Daewoo 11812
Denver 10587
DMTech 12001
Mitsubishi 10556, 10093
Swisstec 10865
Sylvania 11864
Orion 10463
Hugoson 10890, 11217
Humax 12057
Syntax 11144, 11240, 11331
Goodmans 11687
Grundig 12127
Panasonic 10051, 10250
Penney 10051
Philips 10556, 10037
Tatung 11719
TCM 12001
Iiyama 10890, 11217
H & B 12001
JVC 10053, 11428, 12118
Kolin 11240, 11331, 11610
Technosonic 10625
Thomson 10625
Toshiba 11524
Quasar 10051, 10250
Lenco 10587
Logik 11687
Radiola 10556
RCA 10047, 10051, 10093
LG 10037, 10178, 11423, 11663,
11768
Loewe 11884
Logik 11217
TRANS-continents 10865
Philips 10556, 11454
Polaroid 11523, 11766
Pvision 12001
V7 Videoseven 11217
Victor 11428
Vidikron 11398
Vizio 11758
Saba 10625
Sansui 10463
Schneider 10556, 10037
Sharp 10093
Sunstech 12001
Sylvania 11864
Magnavox 11866
Medion 12001
Micromaxx 12001
Mirai 11852, 12072
Siemens 10037
Sony 10000
Westinghouse 10885, 10889, 10890
World-of-Vision 10865, 10890,
11217
Thomson 10625
Sylvania 10054
United 10587
NAD 10865
NEC 11797
Neovia 10865, 11710
Norcent 11365
Teac 10171
Technics 10556
Thomson 10625
Xoro 11217
TV/PVR Combination
Hitachi 11691
DVR/VCR
Cathay 20278
Fujitsu 20037, 20000
Karcher 20081, 20278, 20642
KEC 20278, 20037
Kendo 20278, 20037, 20348, 20642
Kenwood 20067, 20038
Kneissel 20278, 20037, 20348
Kodak 20037, 20035
General
CCE 20278
Fujitsu Siemens 21972
Funai 20278, 20000, 21593
Pioneer 20081, 20067, 20042, 20058,
Centrum 21593
CGE 20000
Cineral 20278
20162, 22306, 22465, 22466, 22467
Galaxi 20000
A-Mark 20278
Galaxis 20278
Garrard 20000
GE 20035, 20060
GEC 20081
Adventura 20000
Citizen 20278, 20037
Clatronic 20000, 21593
Condor 20278
AEG 21593
Lenco 20278
LG 20278, 20037, 20000, 20225
Lifetec 20348
Aiko 20278
Aiwa 20037, 20348, 20000, 20032
Akai 20348
Craig 20037
Crosley 20081
General Technic 20348
GoldStar 20037, 20000, 20038, 20225 Lloyd's 20000
Alba 20081, 20278, 20348, 20000
Allstar 20081
Crown 20278, 20037
Curtis Mathes 20035, 20162
Cyrus 20081
Goodmans 20081, 20278, 20037,
20348, 20000, 20642
Loewe 20081, 21562, 20037, 20162,
21062, 21162
Luxor 20043
LXI 20037
America Action 20278
American High 20035
Amstrad 20278, 20000
Anam 20278, 20037, 20226, 20162
Anam National 20226, 20162, 21162
Ansonic 20000
GPX 20037
Daewoo 20278, 20642, 20045
Dansai 20278
Daytron 20278
De Graaf 20081, 20042
Decca 20081, 20000, 20067
Degraff 20081, 20042
Deitron 20278
Denon 20081, 20042
Diamant 20037
Dual 20081, 20278, 20348, 20000
Dumont 20081, 20000
Durabrand 20642, 21593
Gradiente 20000
Granada 20081, 20037, 20000,
20042, 20226, 20035
M Electronic 20037, 20000, 20038
Magnadyne 20081
Magnasonic 20278
Magnavox 20081, 20000, 20035,
20039, 21593
Grandin 20278, 20037, 20000
Grundig 20081, 20348, 20320, 20226
Aristona 20081
Hanseatic 20081, 20037, 20038
Harley Davidson 20000
Harman/Kardon 20038
Hewlett Packard 21972
Hinari 20278
ASA 20081, 20037
Magnum 20642
Astra 20035
Manesth 20081, 20045
Marantz 20081, 20035, 20038
Mark 20278, 20000
Marta 20037
Asuka 20081, 20037, 20000, 20038
Audiolab 20081
Audiosonic 20278
Audiovox 20037
Hischito 20045
Hitachi 20081, 20037, 20000, 20042
Hoeher 20278, 20642
Mascom 20642
AVP 20000
Elbe 20278, 20038
Electrophonic 20037
Elta 20278
Mastec 20642
Awa 20037, 20320, 20043
Hornyphon 20081
Master's 20278
Baird 20278, 20000
Hughes Network Systems 20042
Hypson 20278, 20037, 20000
Matsui 20037, 20348
Mediator 20081
Basic Line 20278
Emerex 20032
Bestar 20278
Emerson 20278, 20037, 20000,
20045, 20043, 20039
ESC 20278
Medion 20348, 20642
MEI 20035
Imperial 20000
Black Diamond 20642
Black Panther 20278
Blaupunkt 20081, 20226, 20162
Blue Sky 20278, 20037, 20348, 20642
Brandt 20320
Interbuy 20037
Memorex 20037, 20348, 20000,
20035, 20039, 20162, 21162
Metronic 20081
Interfunk 20081
EuroLine 21593
Internal 20278
Ferguson 20278, 20348, 20000,
20320, 20084
Fidelity 20000
International 20278, 20037, 20642
Intervision 20278, 20037, 20348,
20000
Metz 20081, 21562, 20037, 20226,
20162, 21062, 21162
MGA 20043
Brinkmann 20348
Bush 20081, 20278, 20348, 20000,
20642
Finlandia 20081, 20037, 20000,
20043, 20042, 20226
Finlux 20081, 20000, 20042
Firstline 20278, 20037, 20348, 20045,
20043, 20042
Irradio 20081, 20037
ITV 20278, 20037
Micormay 20348
Calix 20037
Microsoft 21972
JBL 20278
Canon 20035
Carena 20081
Carrefour 20045
Carver 20081
Casio 20000
Migros 20000
JMB 20348
Minolta 20042
Joyce 20000
JVC 20067, 20084
Mitsubishi 20081, 20642, 20067,
20043
Flint 20348
Fuji 20033, 20035
Motorola 20035
107
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
12
MTC 20000
Profitronic 20081
Shivaki 20037
Tisonic 20278
Multitec 20037
Multitech 20000
Murphy 20000
Myryad 20081
Proline 20278, 20000, 20642, 20320
Proscan 20060
Siemens 20081, 20037, 20320
Siera 20081
Tivo 20618
Tokai 20037
Topline 20348
Toshiba 20081, 20000, 20045, 20043
Totevision 20037
Tradex 20081
Prosco 20278
Silva 20037
Prosonic 20278
Protech 20081
Silver 20278
SilverCrest 20642
Singer 20045
Naiko 20348, 20642
NAP 20039
National 20226
Nebula Electronics 20033
NEC 20037, 20067, 20038
Neckermann 20081
Nesco 20000
Nikkai 20278
Nikko 20037
Nokia 20081, 20278, 20042
Nordmende 20642, 20320, 20067
ProVision 20278
Pulsar 20039
Sinudyne 20081
Ultravox 20278
Pye 20081
Smaragd 20348
United 20348, 21593
Universum 20081, 20037, 20348,
20000
Sontec 20278, 20037
Sony 20000, 20067, 20032, 20226,
20033, 20035, 20636
Soundwave 20037, 20348
Standard 20278
Quasar 20278, 20035, 20162, 21162
Quelle 20081
Radialva 20081, 20037
Radiola 20081
Vector 20045
Vector Research 20038
VIA Technologies 21972
Victor 20067
Radionette 20037
RadioShack 20037, 20000
Radix 20037
Stern 20278
STS 20042
Video Concepts 20045
Video Technic 20000
Videomagic 20037
Villain 20000
Sunkai 20278, 20348
Sunstar 20000
Oceanic 20081, 20000, 20320
Okano 20278, 20348
Olympus 20226, 20035
Onimax 20642
Randex 20037
RCA 20320, 20042, 20035, 20060
Realistic 20037, 20000, 20035
Reoc 20348
Suntronic 20000
Supra 20037
Susumu 20037
Wards 20081, 20000, 20045, 20042,
20033, 20035, 20038, 20039, 20058,
20060
Watson 20081, 20642
Weltblick 20037
White Westinghouse 20278
World 20348
Onkyo 20222
Ricavision 21972
Sylvania 20081, 20000, 20043, 20035
Symphonic 20000, 21593
Optimus 20058, 20162, 21062, 21162 Roadstar 20081, 20278, 20037,
Orion 20348
20038
Runco 20039
T+A 20162
Orson 20000
Tandberg 20278
Osaki 20037, 20000
Otto Versand 20081
Saba 20278, 20320
Saisho 20348
Tandy 20000
Tashiko 20081, 20037, 20000
Tatung 20081, 20348, 20000, 20067,
20043
Pacific 20348, 20000, 20642
Packard Bell 21972
Salora 20043
XR-1000 20000, 20035
Samsung 20045, 20060
Sanky 20039
Yamaha 20038
Yamishi 20278
Yoko 20037
Palladium 20037, 20348
Palsonic 20000
Tchibo 20348
TCM 20348
Sansui 20000, 20067
Sanyo 20067
Panama 20035
Teac 20037, 20000, 20642
Technics 20081, 20000, 20226,
20035, 20162, 21162
TechniSat 20348
Panasonic 21562, 20000, 20226,
Saville 20278
Zenith 20000, 20033, 20039
ZX 20348
20035, 20162, 20225, 20616, 21062, SBR 20081
21162, 21244, 21293
Pathe Cinema 20043
Penney 20037, 20042, 20035, 20038
Pentax 20042
Schaub Lorenz 20348, 20000
Schneider 20081, 20278, 20037,
20348, 20000, 20642, 20042
Scott 20043
Teknika 20037, 20000, 20035
Telefunken 20278, 20320
Telerent 20226
PVR
Pioneer 22306, 22465, 22466, 22467
Perdio 20000
Sears 20037, 20000, 20042, 20035
Seaway 20278
Teletech 20278, 20000
Tensai 20278, 20037, 20000
Tevion 20348, 20642
Texet 20278
Microsoft 21972
Philco 20035, 20038
Philips 20081, 20035, 20618
Phoenix 20278
Panasonic 20616
Philips 20618
SEG 20081, 20278, 20642
SEI 20081
Phonola 20081
Sei-Sinudyne 20081
Seleco 20037
Thomas 20000
VCR/PVR Combination
Pilot 20037
Thomson 20278, 20320, 20067,
20060
JVC 20067
Portland 20278
Semp 20045
Precision 20058
Sentra 20278
Thorn 20037, 20320, 20084
Prinz 20000
Sharp 20807
DVD
Atacom 31224
Audiosonic 30690
Audix 30713
Clatronic 30672, 30675, 30788,
31233
Digix Media 30826
DiK 30831
General
Pioneer 30571, 30525, 30142, 30631,
Clayton 30713
Dinamic 30788
30632, 31460, 31571, 32442
Autovox 30713
Auvio 30843
Coby 30730, 30778, 30852, 31351
Codex 31233
Disney 30831, 31270
DK Digital 30831, 32095
DMTech 30783
Dragon 30831
DreamX 31151
Dual 30730, 30831, 30651, 30790,
30665, 30713, 30779, 30783, 31023,
31530
Durabrand 30831, 30675, 30713,
31023, 31502, 31530
3D LAB 30539
4Kus 31158
Axion 30730
Commax 31321, 31338
Compacks 30826, 31107
Conia 30852
A-Trend 30714
Basic Line 30713
Acoustic Solutions 30730, 30713,
31228
Baze 30898
Contel 30788
BBK 31224, 31338, 32168
Bellagio 31004
Continental Edison 30831, 30872
Crown 30770, 30690, 30713, 31115
Crypto 31228
AEG 30770, 30790, 30675, 30788,
31233
Bellwood 30826
AFK 31051, 31152
Belson 31086
Cybercom 30831
AG Electronics 31228
Aim 30778
Black Diamond 30713
Blu:sens 31233, 31321
Blue Nova International 31321
Blue Sky 30695, 30651, 30790,
CyberHome 30714, 30816, 30874,
31023, 31502
E:max 31233, 31321
eBench 31152
Airis 30672, 30826, 31005, 31107,
31224, 31321, 31338
Aiwa 30533, 30641
Akai 30790, 30788, 30898, 30899,
31115, 31233
Cytron 30651, 31347, 31423
ECC 30730
30672, 30713, 30778, 30843, 31423 D-Vision 31115, 31367
Boghe 31004
Eclipse 30723, 30751
Electrohome 32116
Daenyx 30872
Boman 30783, 30898, 31005
Brainwave 30770, 31115
Brandt 30503, 30551, 30651
Broksonic 30695
Daewoo 30770, 30714, 30872, 31483 Elfunk 30713, 30850
AKI 31005
Dalton 31036
Elin 30770
Akura 30898, 31051, 31140, 31233,
31367
Dansai 30770, 30783, 31115
Dantax 30539, 30790, 30713, 30723
Daytek 30872, 31005
Ellion 30850, 31421
Elta 30770, 30672, 30690, 30784,
30788, 30850, 31051, 31115, 31151,
31233
Alba 30539, 30695, 30730, 30672,
30713, 30783, 31140, 31530
Alize 31151
Bush 30730, 30831, 30672, 30690,
30713, 30723, 30733, 30778,
Dayton 30872, 31158
31051, 31128, 31140, 31351, 31367, DCE 30831
Eltax 31233, 31321
Emerson 30591
Altacom 31224
31483, 31530
Decca 30770, 31115
Amitech 30770, 30784, 30850
Amoi 30852
Denon 30490, 30634, 31634, 32258
Denver 30672, 30778, 30788, 30898,
31056, 31107, 31321, 31338
Denzel 30665
Enterprise 30591
Enzer 31228
Cambridge Audio 30751
Campomatic Digital 31051
Cat 30789, 31421
Amstrad 30770, 30790, 30713,
31151, 31367
EuroLine 30675, 30788, 31115,
31233, 31351
CCE 30730
Amuseer 31351
AMW 30872
Desay 30843
Centrum 30675, 30713, 30779,
30789, 31005, 31227
CGV 30733, 30751, 31115
Cinea 30841
Fenner 30651
Dgtec 30672
Ferguson 30695, 30651, 30713,
30898
Ansonic 30831, 30759, 31351
Apex Digital 30672, 30794, 31004
Arena 31115
Diamond 30651
Digihome 30713
Finlux 30741, 30591, 30770, 30672,
30751, 30783
DigiLogic 30713
Cinetec 30713, 30872
Classic 30730
Aristona 30539, 30646
Asono 31224
Digitor 30690
Fintec 31530
Digitrex 31056
108
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
12
Firstline 30713, 30843, 30869, 31530 Luxman 30573
Prosonic 30752
Tangent 31321
Fisher 30670
Luxor 30713, 31004
ProVision 30730, 31107, 31321
Pye 30539, 30646
Targa 30741, 31227
Tatung 30770
Funai 30695, 30675
Magnavox 30539, 30503, 30646,
30675, 30713, 30821, 31140
Magnex 30723
Tchibo 30741
Gateway 31158
QONIX 30790, 31051
TCM 30741, 30790
Teac 30741, 30768, 30759, 31227
Tec 30898
Germatic 31051
Radionette 30741, 30869
Radiotone 30713
Raite 30665
Global Link 31224
Majestic 31107
Global Solutions 30768
Global Sphere 31152
Go Video 30783, 30869
GoldStar 30741, 30591
Goodmans 30730, 30651, 30790,
Manhattan 30713
Marantz 30539
Technica 31367
RCA 30522
REC 30490
Technics 30490, 30703
Technika 30770, 30831, 31115,
31530
Mark 30713
Marquant 30770
Mastec 31338
Redstar 30770, 30759, 30763, 30788,
30898, 31107
Technisson 31115
Technosonic 31051, 31115, 31367
Techwood 30713, 31530
Tedelex 31228
30690, 30713, 30723, 30783, 31004, Matsui 30695, 30651, 30672, 30713,
Relisys 31347
31140, 31152, 31423, 31530
GPX 30741
31004
Reoc 30768, 30752
Revoy 30841
Maxim 30713, 30872, 31367
MBO 30730, 30690
MDS 30713, 30778
Mecotek 30770
Graetz 30665
Richmond 31233
Telefunken 30551
Teletech 30768, 30713
Tensai 30770, 30651, 30690
Tevion 30651, 30898, 31036, 31227,
31483
Gran Prix 30831, 30898
Grandin 30713, 31233
Roadstar 30730, 30672, 30690,
30713, 30898, 31051, 31227
Ronin 30710, 30872
Rotel 30623, 30558, 31178
Rownsonic 30789
Grundig 30539, 30551, 30695, 30651, Mediencom 30751
30790, 30670, 30713, 30775, 31004, Medion 30741, 30630, 30831, 30651,
31036, 31128
30783, 31107, 31270, 31347, 31423
MEI 30790
Memorex 30831
Metronic 30690
Theta Digital 30571
Thomson 30551, 30522
Tokai 30790, 30665, 30784, 30788,
30898, 31233
Grunkel 30770, 30831, 30790
GVG 30770
Saba 30551, 30651
Saivod 30831, 30759, 31367
Salora 30741
H & B 30713, 30841, 30850, 31233,
31421
Metz 30571, 30525, 30713
MiCO 30723, 30751, 31223
Micromaxx 30695
Micromedia 30539, 30503
Micromega 30539, 31005
Microsoft 30522, 32083
Microstar 30831
Tom-Tec 30789
Sampo 31321
Hanseatic 30741, 30790, 30783
Harman/Kardon 30582, 30702
HCM 30788
Top Suxess 31224
Toshiba 30503, 30695, 31045, 31510,
31515, 31608, 31639, 31769
Tosumi 31367
Samsung 30490, 30573, 30199,
30744, 30899, 31044, 31075, 31635,
31748, 32107, 32269
Sansui 30695, 30751, 31228
Sanyo 30670, 30713, 31228
Scan 30850
HE 30730
Henss 30713
TProgress 30752
HiMAX 30843
TRANS-continents 30831, 30826,
30872, 31233, 31321
Tredex 30843
Minato 30752
Hitachi 30573, 30664, 30141, 30665,
30713, 31664, 31764
Hiteker 30672
ScanMagic 30730
Minax 30713
Schaub Lorenz 30770, 30788, 31115,
31151
Minoka 30770, 31115
Mirror 30752
Trevi 30831
Hoeher 30831, 30651, 30713, 30826,
31004, 31224, 31530
Home Electronics 30770, 30730
Home Tech Industries 31107, 31224
HotMedia 31152
TSM 31224
Schmartz 32367
Mitsubishi 30521, 30713, 31403
Mizuda 30770
TVE 30713
Schneider 30539, 30831, 30646,
30651, 30790, 30713, 30779, 30783,
30788, 30869, 31227, 31367
Schoentech 30713
Monyka 30665
Umax 30690, 31151
MPX 30843
United 30695, 30730, 30675, 30713,
30788, 30826, 31115, 31152, 31228,
31233, 31351, 31367
Mustek 30730
Humax 30646
Schwaiger 30752
Mx Onda 30651, 30751, 31223
Mystral 30831
HYD 31233
Scientific Labs 30768
Scott 30651, 30672, 31005, 31036,
31233, 31423
Universum 30741, 30591, 30790,
30713, 30779, 30869, 31227, 31530
Uptek 30763
Hyundai 30850
NAD 30741
Iekei 31107
Naiko 30770, 31004, 31367
Nakamichi 31222
Narita 31367
Ingelen 30788
Ingersol 31023
Initial 31472
Seeltech 31224, 31338
SEG 30665, 30713, 30763, 30872,
31483, 31530
Venturer 30790, 31769
Vestel 30713, 31530
Voxson 30730, 30831
Vtrek 31228
NEC 30785
Inno Hit 30713
Irradio 30869, 31115, 31224, 31233
IRT 30783
Shanghai 30672
Neufunk 30665
Nevir 30770, 30831, 30672
Nexius 30790
Sharp 30630, 30675, 30713, 30752,
30869, 31256, 32250
Sherwood 30741
Waitec 30730, 31151, 31224, 31233
Waltham 30713, 31530
Welkin 30831
ISP 30695
NFREN 30826
Sigmatek 31005, 31224
Siltex 31224
Silva 30788, 30898
Jamo 31036
Nintaus 31051
Wellington 30713
Jaton 30665
Nordmende 30831
Noriko 30752
Weltstar 30713
JDB 30730
Silva Schneider 30741, 30831,
30869, 30898, 31367
SilverCrest 31152
Wharfedale 30790, 30713, 30751,
30752, 31115
JDV 31367
Okano 30752
Olidata 30672
JGC 31530
Wilson 30831, 31233
Windsor 30713
JMB 30695
Onkyo 30503, 30612, 30627, 31612,
31769, 32147
Sistemas 30672
JVC 30623, 30539, 30503, 30558,
30867, 31164, 31275, 31550
jWin 31051
Skantic 30539, 30713
Skymaster 30730, 30768
Skyworth 30898
Windy Sam 30573
Oopla 31158
Woxter 31005, 31151, 31224, 31338
Oppo 30575
Xbox 30522, 32083
Xenius 30790
Kansai 31107
Optim 30843
Sliding 31115
Kansas Technologies 31233, 31530
Karcher 30783, 31367
Kendo 30831, 30672, 30713, 31483
Kennex 30770, 30713, 30898
Kenwood 30490, 30534
Kiiro 30770
Optimus 30525
Orbit 30872
SM Electronic 30730, 30768, 30690,
31152
Yakumo 31004, 31056
Yamada 30872, 31004, 31056, 31151,
31158, 31416
Orion 30695, 30713, 31128, 31233
Oritron 30651
Smart 30713
Sonic Blue 30783
Yamaha 30490, 30539, 30646, 30497,
30545, 30817
Ormond 30713
Sony 30533, 30864, 31033, 31069,
31070, 31431, 31516, 31533, 31536
Sound Color 31233
Soundmaster 30768
Soundwave 30713, 30783, 31530
Standard 30831, 30768, 30651,
30788, 30898
Pacific 30831, 30768, 30790, 30713,
30759
Kiss 30665, 30841
Yamakawa 30665, 30710, 30872
Yukai 30730
KLH 31149
Packard Bell 30831, 31321
Palladium 30695, 30713, 30779
Panasonic 30490, 30632, 30703,
31010, 31011, 31579, 31641
Panda 30789, 31107
Paramount Pictures 30779
peeKTon 30898, 31224
Philco 30690, 30733
Kreisen 31421
Zenith 30503, 30591
KXD 31107, 31321
Lawson 30768
Leiker 30872
Blu-ray
Star Clusters 31152, 31227
Starlogic 31005
Pioneer 30142, 32442
Lenco 30770, 30651, 30713, 30778
Lenoir 31228
Starmedia 31005, 31224
Strato 31152
Denon 32258
LG 30741
Lexia 30768
Strong 30713
LG 30741, 30591, 30790, 30869
Lifetec 30831, 30651, 31347
Limit 30768
Philips 30539, 30503, 30646, 30675,
30854, 31158, 31267, 31340, 31354,
31506, 32056, 32084
Sunkai 30770, 30850
Sunstech 30831
Onkyo 32147
Panasonic 31641
Philips 32084
Sunwood 30788, 30898
Supervision 30768, 31152
SVA 30672, 30752
LiteOn 31058, 31158, 31416
Lodos 30713
Plu2 30850
Powerpoint 30872, 31005
Prinz 30831
Samsung 30199
Sharp 32250
Sony 31516
Loewe 30539, 30741, 30511
Logik 30713
Sylvania 30675, 32194
Symphonic 30675
Prism 30831
Logix 30783
Luker 31367
ProCaster 31004
Synn 30768
Proline 30651, 30672, 30710, 31004,
31483
Syscom 30826
HD-DVD
Lumatron 30741, 30695, 30713,
31115, 31321
LG 30741
Proscan 30522
TAG McLaren 30894
Tandberg 30713
Lunatron 30741
Proson 30713
Microsoft 32083
109
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
12
Onkyo 31769
Toshiba 31769
Xbox 32083
Kansas Technologies 31530
Yakumo 31056
Bush 31483
Kreisen 31421
Yamada 31056, 31158, 31416
Yamaha 30646
Centrum 30675
Clatronic 30675
KXD 31321
LG 30741
Daewoo 31483
Durabrand 30675
DVD/PVR Combination
Lifetec 31347
LiteOn 31158, 31416
Loewe 30741
Lumatron 31321
DVD-R
Pioneer 30631
Pioneer 30631, 31460
EuroLine 30675
Airis 31321
4Kus 31158
Firstline 30869
Funai 30695, 30675
Blu:sens 31321
GPX 30741
Mastec 31338
Medion 30741, 31347
MiCO 30751
Airis 31321, 31338
Alba 31530
Aristona 30646
Go Video 30869
GoldStar 30741
Hitachi 30141
Oopla 31158
BBK 31338
Belson 31086
Bush 31530
JGC 31530
JVC 30623
Hitachi 30664, 30141
Irradio 30869
Packard Bell 31321
Panasonic 30490, 31010, 31011,
31579
LG 30741
LiteOn 31416
JVC 30867, 31164, 31550
Kendo 31483
Cat 31421
Philips 30646, 31158, 31506
ProVision 31321
Centrum 31227
Commax 31321, 31338
CyberHome 31502
Cytron 31347
Medion 30741
Mitsubishi 31403
LG 30741, 30869
Lumatron 30741, 30695
Lunatron 30741
Pye 30646
Panasonic 30490, 31010, 31011,
31579
Philips 30539, 31158, 31340
Relisys 31347
Roadstar 31227
Dayton 31158
Magnavox 30675
Micromaxx 30695
Denver 31056, 31338
Digitrex 31056
Samsung 31635, 31748, 32107
Schneider 30646, 31227
Seeltech 31338
Samsung 30490, 31635, 32107
SEG 31530
Dual 31530
Orion 30695
Sharp 31256
Durabrand 31502, 31530
SEG 31530
Panasonic 30490, 31579
Philips 30539, 30646, 30675, 31267
Proline 31483
Silva Schneider 30741
Sony 31033, 31069, 31070, 31536
Soundwave 31530
Sony 31033, 31069, 31070
Soundwave 31530
Star Clusters 31227
Sylvania 30675
E:max 31321
Electrohome 32116
Ellion 31421
Radionette 30869
Targa 30741
Eltax 31321
Tchibo 30741
Samsung 30744, 31075, 32269
Sanyo 30670
Tangent 31321
Targa 30741, 31227
Teac 31227
Fintec 31530
Firstline 31530
Funai 30675
TCM 30741
Technika 31530
Thomson 30551
Toshiba 31510, 31639
Schneider 30869
SEG 31483
Technika 31530
Techwood 31530
Tevion 31227
Gateway 31158
Goodmans 31530
GPX 30741
Sharp 30630, 30869
Silva Schneider 30869
Sony 30864
Universum 30741
Thomson 30551
Toshiba 31510
Yamada 31416
Symphonic 30675
H & B 31421
Hitachi 30141
Hoeher 31530
Humax 30646
Tevion 31483
Universum 31227, 31530
DVD/VCR Combination
Thomson 30551
Vestel 31530
Pioneer 31460
Toshiba 30503, 31045, 31510
Waltham 31530
Woxter 31338
AEG 30675
JGC 31530
JVC 31164, 31275
United 30675
Universum 30869
Broksonic 30695
CD
Genexxa 70000, 70032, 70037
Goldmund 70157
Onkyo 70101, 70102, 70138, 70381,
Tandy 70032
General
70868, 71322, 71323, 71327
Technics 70029
Pioneer 70032, 70468, 70101, 71063,
Grundig 70157
Optimus 70000, 70032, 70468, 71063 Thomson 70053
71087, 73468
Thorens 70157
Panasonic 70029, 70388, 70752
Thule Audio 70157
Harman/Kardon 70157
Inkel 70157, 70180
JVC 70072
Advantage 70032
AH! 70157
Philips 70157, 70626
Traxdata 70626
Primare 70157
Aiwa 70157
Proton 70157
Universum 70157, 70053
Arcam 70157
Kenwood 70157, 70028, 70626,
QED 70157
Quad 70157
Quasar 70029
Victor 70072
Atoll Electronique 70157
Audio Research 70157
Audiolab 70157
Audiomeca 70157
Audioton 70157
AVI 70157
70037
Wards 70000, 70157, 70032, 70053,
70087
Krell 70157
Linn 70157
Loewe 70157
Radiola 70157
RCA 70053
Realistic 70180
Restek 70157
Revox 70157
Rotel 70157
Yamaha 70036, 71292
Magnavox 70157
Marantz 70157, 70029, 70626, 70180
Matsui 70157
CD-R
Balanced Audio
Technology 70157
Bush 70388
Pioneer 71087
Kenwood 70626
Onkyo 71322, 71323
Philips 70626
MCS 70029
Memorex 70000, 70032, 70468,
70180
SAE 70157
Cairn 70157
Saisho 70000
California Audio Labs 70029
Cambridge 70157
Meridian 70157
Sansui 70157
Micromega 70157
Miro 70000
Sanyo 70087
Cambridge Audio 70157
Cambridge Soundworks 70157
Carver 70157
Sony 70100
Sharp 70037, 70180
Sherwood 70180
Siemens 70157
Simaudio 70157
Sony 70000, 70100, 71364
Sylvania 70157
Symphonic 70180
Thomson 70053
Mission 70157
Modulaire 70000, 70032, 70468,
70087, 70180
Cyrus 70157
MD
Denon 70626, 70034, 70766
DKK 70000
DMX Electronics 70157
Dynaco 70157
Myryad 70157
Pioneer 71063
NAD 70000
Naim 70157
Onkyo 70868
Sony 70000
TAG McLaren 70157
Satellite Set Top Box
Acoustic Solutions 01284
Allvision 01232, 01334, 01412
Amstrad 00847, 01175, 01113
Ansonic 02418
Arnion 01300
General
ADB 00642, 02367
Akai 00200
Alba 01284
Asat 00200
Pioneer 00853, 00329, 01308
ASCI 01334
AssCom 00853
Astro 00173, 01100, 01113
@sat 01300
Apro 01672
@Sky 01334
Allsat 00200
Armstrong 00200
110
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
12
Atlanta 02418
Atsat 01300
Hirschmann 00173, 01232, 01412
Rebox 01214
Regal 01251
Vestel 01251, 01284
Victor 00492
Hitachi 00819, 01284
AtSky 01334
Hornet 01300
HTS 00775
Hughes Network Systems 00749
Humax 01176, 01427, 01781, 01808,
01882, 01915, 02144, 02357, 02408
RFT 00200
Viola Digital 01672
Vision 01626
Audioline 01672
Austar 00879, 00642
Axil 01457, 02418
Axitronic 01626
Roadstar 00853
Rownsonic 01567
Visiosat 00560, 01457, 01807
SAB 01251, 01300
Saba 00820
Wharfedale 01284
Wisi 00173, 01232
Worldsat 01214, 01251
Woxter 02418
B@ytronic 01412
Balmet 01457
i-CAN 02367
Sagem 00820, 01114, 02107
Saivod 02418
ID Digital 01176
Imperial 01195, 01334, 01672
Inno Hit 01626
Belson 02418
Samsung 00853, 01206, 01458,
01570
Xoro 01807
Xsat 00847, 01214, 01323
Xtreme 01300
Big Sat 01457
Black Diamond 01284
Blaupunkt 00173
Boca 01232
Interstar 01214
ITT Nokia 00723
Sanyo 01626
Sat Control 01300
SAT+ 01409
Yes 00887
Jaeger 01334
JVC 00492, 00775
Boston 01251
Satelco 01232
Zehnder 01232, 01251, 01334, 01412
Zeta Technology 00200
Brainwave 01672
British Sky Broadcasting 00847,
01175
Satplus 01100
Kaon 01300
Schaub Lorenz 01214
Schneider 01206, 01251
Schwaiger 01334, 01412, 01457,
01672
Kathrein 00173, 00200, 01416, 01567
Kenwood 00853
SAT/PVR Combination
BskyB 00847, 01175
Bush 00560, 01284, 01291, 01645,
01672, 01974
@sat 01300
Kreiling 01626
Kreiselmeyer 00173
Sedea Electronique 01206, 01626
SEG 01251, 01626
Serd 01412
Allvision 01412
Amstrad 01175
Atsat 01300
L&S Electronic 01334
LaSAT 00173
Leiko 01626
Lemon 01334
Listo 01626
Lodos 01284
Logik 01284
Canal Digital 00853
Canal Satellite 00853, 02107
Canal+ 00853, 02107
CGV 01567
Chaparral 00216
Chess 01334, 01626
CityCom 01176, 01232, 01781
Classic 01672
Comag 01232, 01412
Coship 01457, 01672
Crown 01284
Cyfra+ 01076
Cyrus 00200
Servimat 01611
B@ytronic 01412
ServiSat 01251
British Sky Broadcasting 01175
BskyB 01175
Siemens 00173, 01334
Sigmatek 02418
Bush 00560, 01645
SKY 00847, 00887, 01175, 00099,
01848
Comag 01412
Magnavox 00722
SKY Italia 00853, 01848
Sky XL 01251, 01412
Sky+ 01175
Daewoo 01974
Manhattan 01300
Marantz 00200
Digifusion 01645
DigiQuest 01300
Maspro 00173
Skymaster 01334, 01409, 01567,
01611
Digiturk 01076
Matsui 00173, 01284, 01626
Maximum 01334
Dish Network System 00775
Dream Multimedia 01237
Skymax 00200
Mediabox 00853
D-box 00723, 01114
Daewoo 01974
Skyplus 01175, 01232, 01334, 01412
Skyvision 01334
eMTech 01214
Mediacom 01206
MediaSat 00853, 02107
Medion 01232, 01334, 01412, 01626
Mega 00200
Dantax 01626
SL 01672
GbSAT 01214
Gecco 01412
Denver 02418
SM Electronic 01409
Smart 01113, 01232
Sony 00847, 00853, 00639, 01558
Star Sat 01214
Digiality 01334
Globo 01412
Metronic 01334
Metz 00173
Digifusion 01645
Digihome 01284
DigiLogic 01284
DigiQuest 01300, 01457
DigiSat 01232
Goodmans 00560
Hirschmann 01412
Humax 01176, 01427, 01808, 02144,
02357
Maximum 01334
Mediacom 01206
MediaSat 02107
Medion 01412
Morgan's 01412
MySky 01848
NEOTION 01334
Nichimen 00560
Opentel 01412
Orbis 01412
Morgan's 00200, 01232, 01412
Multibroadcast 00879, 00642
Multichoice 00879, 00642, 01433,
01959, 01960
Starlite 00200
Stream 01848
Stream System 01300
Strong 00853, 00820, 00879, 01284,
01409, 01626, 02418
Sumin 01412
Digisky 01457
Myryad 00200
MySky 01848
Digiturk 01076
DirecTV 00099
Dish Network System 00775
DNT 00200
Sunny 01300
NEOTION 01334
Sunstar 00642
Netsat 00887, 00099
Neuling 01232
Dream Multimedia 01237
DSTV 01433
Supernova 00887
Systec 01334
Nichimen 00560
Durabrand 01284
Nikko 00723, 00200
Nokia 00853, 00723, 01223
Targa 01807
TBoston 01251, 02418
Technical 01626
Echostar 00853, 00775, 01323, 01409
Elap 01567
OctalTV 01505
Onn 01284
Elbe 02418
TechniSat 01100, 01195
Technosonic 00560, 01672
Technotrend 01672
Techwood 01284, 01626
TELE System 01251, 01409, 01611
Telestar 01100, 01195, 01251, 01334,
01626, 01672
Pace 01175, 01423
Panasonic 01304
Philips 00099
Elta 00200
Opentel 01232, 01412
Optex 01611, 01626
Optus 00879
eMTech 01214
Engel 01251
Pixx 01807
EuroLine 01251
Expressvu 00775
Orbis 01232, 01334, 01412
Orbitech 01100, 01195
Proscan 00392
Rebox 01214
Ferguson 01291
Finlux 01626
P/Sat 01232
Televes 01214, 01300, 01334
Televisa 00887
Telewire 01232
Samsung 01206, 01570
Sat Control 01300
Schneider 01206
Schwaiger 01412
Sedea Electronique 01206
Serd 01412
SKY 01175, 01848
SKY Italia 01848
Sky XL 01412
Skyplus 01175, 01334, 01412
Stream System 01300
Sumin 01412
Sunny 01300
Targa 01807
TechniSat 01195
Technosonic 00560
Telestar 01195
Thomson 01175
Topfield 01206
Visiosat 00560, 01807
Xoro 01807
Xtreme 01300
Pace 00847, 00853, 00200, 00887,
01175, 00329, 01323, 01423, 01848
Pacific 01284
Fly Com 01457
FMD 01457
Tevion 00560, 01409, 01672
Thomson 00847, 00853, 00820,
01175, 00392, 01046, 01291, 02107,
02176
Fortec Star 01821
Foxtel 00879
Palcom 01409
Panasat 00879, 01433
Panasonic 00847, 00701, 01304
Panda 00173
Fuba 00173, 01214, 01251
Galaxis 00853
Tiny 01672
Pansat 01807
Pass 01567
GbSAT 01214
Tokai 00200
Gecco 01412
Tonna 01611
peeKTon 01457, 02418
Philips 00853, 00173, 00200, 01114,
00099, 00722, 01076, 01672, 02107,
02176
General Satellite 01176
Globo 01251, 01334, 01412, 01626
GOD Digital 00200
Gold Box 00853
Topfield 01206, 01208
Toshiba 00749, 00790, 01284
TPS 00820
Trevi 01251
Phoenix 02418
Goodmans 00560, 01284, 01291,
02337
Triax 00853, 00200, 01113, 01251,
01291, 01611, 01626
Twinner 01611
Pino 01334
Pixx 01807
Gradiente 00887
PMB 01611
Grandin 01626
UEC 00879
Preisner 01113
Grocos 01457
Uniden 00722
Unisat 00200
Premier 00723, 02176
Proline 01284
Grundig 00847, 00853, 00173, 00879,
01284, 01291, 01672
United 01251
Proscan 00392
Hama 01567
Universum 00173, 01251
Radiola 00200
Hanseatic 01100
Hauppauge 01672
HB 01214
Variosat 00173
VEA 02418
Ventana 00200
Radix 01113
Zehnder 01412
RCA 00143, 00392, 00566
111
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
Cable Set Top Box
12
Humax 00660, 01813, 01885, 01981,
Philips 00817, 01582, 01619, 01958,
02174
US Electronics 00276
General
01983, 02142, 02447
i-CAN 01585
Virgin Media 01068, 01060, 01987
Visiopass 00817
Pioneer 00144, 00533, 00877, 01782
Premier 02174
ABC 00008, 00237
ADB 01585
Austar 00276
Pulsar 00000
Jerrold 00276, 00476, 00810
Zenith 00000, 00525
Runco 00000
Kabel Deutschland 01958, 01981,
01983
Sagem 00817
Salora 00000
Cable/PVR Combination
Birmingham Cable
Communications 00276
Freebox 01482, 01976
Macab 00817
Samsung 01060, 00000, 00144,
01666, 02015, 02174
Satbox 00375
Humax 01813, 01885, 01981, 01983,
02142
Matav 01082
Cable & Wireless 01068
Daeryung 00008
Encon 00008
Memorex 00000
Motorola 00276
Scientific Atlanta 00008, 00237,
00877, 01987
Philips 01619
Noos 00817
Nova Vision 00008
NTL 01068, 01060, 00276
Scientific Atlanta 01987
StarHub 01927
StarHub 00276, 01927
Supercable 00276
Fosgate 00276
France Telecom 00817
Freebox 01482, 01976
Telenet 01920
Telewest 01987
Telefonica 01585
Telenet 01920
Telewest 01068, 01987
Thomson 01256, 01582, 01958,
01981, 01983, 02174
Toshiba 00000
Ono 01068
Optus 00276
Orange 00817
Galaxi 00008
GE 00237
General Instrument 00276, 00476
GoldStar 00144
UPC 01582
Virgin Media 01987
Pace 01068, 01060, 00237, 01577
Panama 00107
Panasonic 00000, 00107, 00144
Paragon 00000
UPC 01582
Laser Disc Player
Pioneer 30241, 32447
Denon 30241
Magnavox 30241
Cassette Deck
Pioneer 40027, 42446
Inkel 40070
Optimus 40027
Victor 40244
Aiwa 40029
JVC 40244
Philips 40029
Wards 40029, 40027
Yamaha 40097
Arcam 40076
Audiolab 40029
Kenwood 40070
Radiola 40029
Revox 40029
Magnavox 40029
Marantz 40029
Myryad 40029
Carver 40029
Denon 40076
Grundig 40029
Sansui 40029
Sony 40243
Onkyo 40135
Thorens 40029
Digital Tape
Pioneer 40019
Onkyo 40019
Tascam 40019
Tescam 40019
Video Accessory
Pioneer 01010
Acer 01272
ADB 02586
Amino 01481
Daily Media 01272
Dgtec 01363
Fujitsu Siemens 01272
Hewlett Packard 01272
Kreatel 01385
Microsoft 01272, 02049
Packard Bell 01272
Philips 01272
Ricavision 01272
Sharp 01010
Sylvania 01563
VIA Technologies 01272
Xbox 02049
112
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
Specifications
12
Miscellaneous
Power requirements . . . . . . . AC 220 V to 230 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz
Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410 W
In standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.5 W (KURO LINK OFF)
0.8 W (KURO LINK ON)
• These specifications are applicable when the power
supply is 230 V.
Dimensions . . . . . .420 (W) mm x 173 (H) mm x 433 (D) mm
Weight (without package). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.5 kg
Audio section
Rated power output (1 kHz, 6 Ω, 1 %)
Front. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 W + 150 W
Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 W
Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 W + 150 W
Surround back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 W + 150 W
Rated power output (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω, 0.09 %)
Front. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 W + 110 W
Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 W
Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 W + 110 W
Surround back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 W + 110 W
Total Harmonic Distortion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.06 %
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω, 100 W + 100 W)
Furnished Parts Number
MCACC Setup microphone (APM7009). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Remote control unit (AXD7547) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
AA/IEC R6 dry cell batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
iPod cable (ADE7129) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
AM loop antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
FM wire antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Power cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Warranty card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
These operating instructions
Guaranteed speaker impedance
Note
. . . . . . . .16 Ω to 8 Ω, less than 8 Ω to 6 Ω (setting required)
Signal-to-Noise Ratio (IHF, short circuited, A network)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 dB
Frequency Response . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Hz to 100 000 Hz dB
(Pure Direct Mode)
• Specifications and the design are subject to possible
modifications without notice, due to improvements.
Input (Sensitivity/Impedance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 mV/47 kΩ
Output (Level/Impedance)
REC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 mV/2.2 kΩ
Cleaning the unit
• Use a polishing cloth or dry cloth to wipe off dust and
dirt.
Tuner Section
• When the surface is dirty, wipe with a soft cloth
dipped in some neutral cleanser diluted five or six
times with water, and wrung out well, and then wipe
again with a dry cloth. Do not use furniture wax or
cleansers.
Frequency Range (FM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87.5 MHz to 108 MHz
Antenna Input (FM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Ω unbalanced
Frequency Range (AM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531 kHz to 1602 kHz
Antenna (AM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loop antenna (balanced)
Video Section
Signal level
Composite/S-Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 Ω)
Component Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Y: 1.0 Vp-p (75 Ω),
PB, PR: 0.7 Vp-p (75 Ω)
• Never use thinners, benzine, insecticide sprays or
other chemicals on or near this unit, since these will
corrode the surface.
Corresponding maximum resolution
Component Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1080p (1125p)
(Video convert off)
Our philosophy
Pioneer is dedicated to making your home theater
listening experience as close as possible to the vision of
the moviemakers and mastering engineer when they
created the original soundtrack. We do this by focusing
on three important steps:
Digital In/Out Section
HDMI terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-pin (Not DVI)
HDMI output type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 V, 100 mA
USB terminal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . USB2.0 Full Speed (Type A)
iPod terminal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . USB, and Video (Composite)
1
Designing with carefully selected components so
as to transmit the original soundtrack accurately
Integrated control section
Control (SR) terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . Ø 3.5 Mini-jack (MONO)
Control (IR) terminal. . . . . . . . . . . . . Ø 3.5 Mini-jack (MONO)
IR signal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High Active (High Level: 2.0 V)
12 V Trigger terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . Ø 3.5 Mini-jack (MONO)
12 V Trigger output type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 V, Total 50 mA
RS-232C cable type. . . . . . . 9-pin, cross type, female-female
2
Allowing for customized acoustic calibration
according to any listening area
3
Tuning that transmits soul
®
This product includes FontAvenue fonts licenced by NEC corporation.
FontAvenue is a registered trademark of NEC Corporation
113
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
12
Index
Numerics
12V trigger 34
E
Effect 61
A
F
Acoustic Cal EQ 81
Fine Channel Level 75
Fine Speaker Distance 75
Flicker Reduction 90
Front Stage Surround Advance 52
Acoustic Calibration EQ 60
Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust 77
Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional 77
Advanced MCACC 71-83
Output PC 34, 81
Advanced surround 51
Analog attenuator 64
Aspect 62
Audio cable 21
AUDIO PARAMETER 60
Auto delay 61
Auto level control (ALC) 50, 104
Auto MCACC 39, 72
Auto surround 50, 104
H
HDCP 26
HDMI 23-26, 35, 42, 57-59, 65, 97
HDMI Audio 61
Hue 62
I
Input function 42
Default and possible settings 41
Input Setup 40-41
Input signal 55
B
iPod 36, 43-44, 101
Switching controls 44
IR jack 33
Bass 60
Bi-amp 16, 20, 21, 85
Bi-wiring 20
Brightness 62
K
KURO LINK 26, 57-59
C
Center Image 61
Center Width 61
Channel Level 80, 86
Chroma Level 62
Contrast 62
L
LFE Attenuate 60
Loudness 60
M
CONTROL jack 33
Manual MCACC 74
Manual speaker setup 84
MCACC Data 80
MCACC preset 54, 60, 82
Midnight 60
Multi Zone 16, 19, 21, 31-32, 63, 85, 89
Multichannel analog input 28, 43, 89
D
Data Management 82
DeepColor 26
Default system settings 66
Demo 71
Detail 62
Dialog Enhancement 60
Digital Noise Reduction 60
Digital Video Conversion 62
Dimension 61
N
Neural THX 48, 103
Display 12, 65, 96
Dolby 50, 100
DTS 50, 101
O
OSD Language (GUI) 38
Dual Mono 60
Dynamic Range Control 60
114
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
12
P
U
Panorama 61
Phase control 55
Placing 17
Up Mix 53
USB 36, 45-47, 99
Playable file formats 47
Play 42
Power cord 37
Power ON Level 90
PQLS 59
V
Video cable 22
Video converter 22
VIDEO PARAMETER 62
Volume Limit 90
Pre-out 29
Preset code 105
Progressive Motion 62
Pure direct 53
PureCinema 62
W
WMA9 101
WMA9 Pro 29
R
RDS 49
X
Recording 64
Remote control 8, 9, 67-70, 90, 97, 105
Reset 66
x.v.Color 26
X-Curve 87
Resolution 62
Y
YNR 62
S
SACD Gain 61
Setup microphone 39, 73
Sharpness 62
Sleep timer 65
Sound Delay 60
Sound Retriever 60
Speaker 16-21, 91
Speaker B 16, 19, 21, 63, 85
Speaker Distance 80, 87
Speaker impedance 38
Speaker Setting 80, 85
Standard surround 50
Standing Wave 60, 76
Status 65
Stream direct 53, 104
Streo 52
Surround back channel processing 53
Surround back speaker 85
Synchronized amp mode 59
System Setup 84
T
THX 17, 72, 87, 102
Home THX 51
Tone Control 60
Treble 60
Troubleshooting 92
Tuner 30, 48-49
115
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PIONEER CORPORATION
4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan
PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.
P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404
PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.
300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901, 905-479-4411
PIONEER EUROPE NV
Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11
PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.
253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555
PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.
178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300
PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V.
Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D. F. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270
K002_B_En
Published by Pioneer Corporation.
Copyright © 2009 Pioneer Corporation.
All rights reserved.
<ARB7428-A>
Printed in
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|